You are on page 1of 1950

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Printable PDF version

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

GRAPHISOFT
Visit the GRAPHISOFT website at http://www.graphisoft.com for local distributor and product availability information.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide


Copyright 2009 by GRAPHISOFT, all rights reserved. Reproduction, paraphrasing or translation without express prior written permission is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks
ArchiCAD is a registered trademark, Virtual Building and GDL are trademarks of GRAPHISOFT. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Contents
Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13 _____________________________________ 29 ArchiCAD 13 New Features _______________________________________ 35
Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Client-Server Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 On-Demand Reservation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Remote Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Data Safety, Project Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Interactive Schedule Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Annotated Schedule Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Improved Curtain Wall Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Library Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Objects Saved into the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Model View Options for Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Selected New Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Fill Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Symbolic Soft Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Image Fill as Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Gradient Fill Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Improved Find & Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Boundary Contour Options for Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 DWG Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 _________________________________ 75


Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Migrating from ArchiCAD 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lost Criteria Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 No Automatic Home Story Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Review New Model View Options for Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Configuration __________________________________________________ 111


Start ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Opened by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Saved by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archive Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Projects through a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-Ons and Goodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 112 116 118 119 120 124 132 133 135 136 138 140 141 143 145 146 147 150 151 152

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Quick Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Layer Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods) . . 163 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Define a Custom Composite Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Components of Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Pen Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Apply a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Redefine a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 About Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Assign a Material to a Construction Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Align 3D Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Display of Materials in the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Display of Materials in Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Custom Attributes of GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 About Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Add Objects to Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Manage Embedded Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Add a Linked Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Add BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Remove Library Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Library Container File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Library Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Favorite Settings as Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Favorite Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Favorite Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Favorite to Placed Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ArchiCAD User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Your Customized Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fit in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing 3D Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explore Model (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orbit (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Dconnexion Enabler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Display the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

209 210 211 212 214 216 217 219 220 222 224 225 226 227 229 230 233 235 237 239 241 243 246 247 248 251 258 259 260 262 263 264 266 267 270 271 273 274 275

Interaction ____________________________________________________ 245

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Project Workflow in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Organizer Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Navigator Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Navigator Project Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Navigator View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Clone a Folder in the View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Setting up a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Saving a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Modifying View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Quick Options Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Navigator Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Navigator Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 External Projects in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 About Origins in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Create a User Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 User Origin in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 About Elevation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Elevation Values in the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Quick Selection of Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Selection of Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Selection Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Selection Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Selection Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Element Information Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 The Intelligent Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Deselecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Find and Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Edit Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Store and Access Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Marquee Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 About Marquee Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Marquee Area Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 View Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Removing a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Editing Operations within the Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Input Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Shown in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Tracker Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Snap Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Guide Lines on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Guide Lines During Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place an Orthogonal Guide Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples for Using Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Construction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Bisector Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapping to Existing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Snap Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Snap Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

338 339 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 350 351 352 353 355 356 357 358 359 361 362 363 364 365 368 369 370 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 380 382 384 386 387 388

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Cancel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Move Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Nudging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Dragging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Rotating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Mirroring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Elevating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 About the Align function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 How to Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Special Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Distribute Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Special Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Modify Element Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Overview of Modifying Element Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Stretching Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Modifying Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Modifying Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Stretching with the Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Stretch Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Splitting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Adjusting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Intersect Two Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Create a Fillet or Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Adding Element Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Curve/Straighten Element Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Explode into Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Create Element Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Multiply Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Parameter Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Group Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Lock/Unlock Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 About the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Using the Magic Wand in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Magic Wand Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings . . . . . . . 466 About Trace References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Access Trace Reference Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Show/Hide Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Choosing a Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Move Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Rebuild Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Compare Reference with Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Why Consolidate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Linework Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Fill Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Virtual Building ________________________________________________ 489


ArchiCAD Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Model Views in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigate Among Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create or Delete Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Story Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Home Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show On Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Elements Floor Plan Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 490 491 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 501 504 506 507 510 512 514 516

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Show All in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Show Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Show Stored Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Show Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Default Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Filter Elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Save Contents of 3D Window as a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 3D Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 3D View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 3D Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 3D Navigation Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 3D Cutaway Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 About Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Create a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Define Marker Reference for Source Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Assign Section Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Model Display in the Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Open a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Place a Linked Section Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 Place an Unlinked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Create an Independent Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Updating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Summary of Rebuild Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Display of Section Lines and Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Interior Elevations (IE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 About Interior Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Create Multiple IE Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Interior Elevation IDs and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Interior Elevations and Zone Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Display of Elements in Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

11

Contents

3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefine the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Display of the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Detail Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet vs. Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing in the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Worksheet Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Markers in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Marker Range Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source Marker Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Marker Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Using Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find Linked Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Markers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing and Updating Schedule Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

582 583 585 587 588 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 624 625 626 627 629 631 632

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Sort Schedule Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Format a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Schedule Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Add Annotations to Schedule Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 About Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Index of Published Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 About Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Create a Straight Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Create a Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Create a Chain of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Create a Rectangle of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Create a Trapezoid Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Create a Composite Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Create a Log Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Create a Gable Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Wall-Wall Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 Column Display on Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Column Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Creating Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 Create a Slanted Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Columns and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Beam Reference Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Beam Display on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Create a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 Create a Hole in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Beams and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

13

Contents

Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Simple Roof in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Dome-Shaped Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Hole in a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Roof Slant Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Roof Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersect Roof Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Element to Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Holes in Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New Points to the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Display of Zone Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Display of Zone Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Zone to Another Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall: A System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

699 700 702 706 708 712 713 715 718 719 721 722 727 728 729 730 734 736 744 750 751 752 753 754 756 757 758 759 761 762 765 766 767 769 770 771 774 775 777 779

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

About Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Working with Curtain Walls: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Create a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 System-Level Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 Curtain Wall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 Curtain Wall Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 Edit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838 Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 Curtain Wall Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Curtain Wall Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 Curtain Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858 Free-Rotate Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 About Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 Object Settings of Library Part Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Locating a Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Placing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878 View-Dependent Display of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Global Options for Object Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Selecting a Placed Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 Stretching Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Customizing Object Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Parameter Transfer Between Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 Create Patch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Graphic Creation of Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 Saving Library Parts from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Saving 3D Models as Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 Saving Custom-Shape Holes or Niches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

15

Contents

Scripting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Sill or Header Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Doors or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Empty Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corner Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stairs with StairMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . StairMaker Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure and Landing (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and Save Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrussMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

900 902 908 909 910 911 913 915 916 917 921 922 923 924 925 928 929 930 932 941 945 946 951 953 954 955 958 959 960 961 962 964 965 967 968 969 974 975 976 978

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Choose Partial Structure Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Save Partial Structure Settings by View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 How to Define Composite Structure Components as Core or Finish . . . . . . 984 Visualizing the Entire Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker . . . . . . 990

Documentation _________________________________________________ 993


Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 About Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996 Assign a Cut Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Assign a Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Draw a Drafting Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Available Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Fill Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 Create New Solid Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Display of Vectorial Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Create a New Symbol Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 Adding Area Text to a Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 Using Gradient Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Create or Edit Image Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Line Categories in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Stretching or Shrinking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Stretching Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Editing an Arc Using its Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 Convert Ellipse to Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Drawing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033 Editing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 Drawing Freehand Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Decompose a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

17

Contents

Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings in Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary of Dimensioning Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Wall Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Dimension Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Witness Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Text Type and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move or Edit Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document . . . . . . . . Secondary Dimensions (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Exterior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Interior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Straight Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Curved Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing Text Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Favorite Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1041 1043 1044 1046 1047 1049 1051 1052 1053 1054 1059 1062 1063 1065 1066 1067 1069 1071 1075 1076 1077 1079 1080 1081 1084 1086 1087 1089 1090 1092 1093 1095 1096 1099 1100 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

How to Insert Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 Autotext Reference Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 Placing Independent Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 Placing Associative Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 Tool-Specific Default Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 Define Default Text Content of Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 Symbol Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120 Text Editing in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121 Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123 Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 The Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126 Layouting Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127 Layout Book Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128 About the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1132 Master Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134 Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1137 Drawings in the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138 Placing Drawings Onto the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 Importing PDF Files As Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Modifying Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Drawing Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 Managing and Updating Placed Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154 Layout and Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 Simple Layout Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156 Automatic Layout ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1157 Custom Layout/Subset IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161 Layouting Workflow Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 Layouting Workflow: Smaller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163 Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 Publisher Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

19

Contents

Planning to Publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Publisher Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Output Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Redlining DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create PDF Output Using the Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Document in PDF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Content in PDF (WIN only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Teamwork Project from Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Users on the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrator Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize User Roles for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Project Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1174 1175 1177 1178 1181 1182 1183 1184 1186 1189 1192 1193 1196 1197 1199 1201 1204 1210 1211 1213 1214 1217 1221 1224 1226 1227 1228 1231 1232 1236 1240 1241 1244 1245 1253 1255 1257 1259 1261

Collaboration _________________________________________________ 1209

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Force User to Leave a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 Join or Leave a Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 Open Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 Close Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 Working Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 Accessing Your Teamwork Project from Different Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Teamwork Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 Reserving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276 Overview of Teamwork Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 Reserve Elements by Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278 Reserve Elements by Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 Reserve Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Feedback on Element Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289 Element Reservation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 Feedback on Ownership of Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300 Reserve Publisher Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302 Reserve and Delete Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Reserve Find and Select Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304 Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 Reserve Mark-up Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307 Review Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308 Creating and Sending Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 Assign Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1310 Request Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 Release Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Request Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318 Create a New Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 Receive and Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Ask for Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Add Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1324 Libraries in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 Library Management Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 External Files Linked to Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1330 Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

21

Contents

External Drawings in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module(s) from Multistory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Module Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Order of Hotlinked Module Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules: Multiplatform Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREFs and the Layer Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using XREFs in Round-Trip Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge a DXF/DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Management with Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork and Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualization Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1332 1333 1334 1335 1339 1341 1343 1345 1346 1347 1350 1351 1357 1358 1359 1361 1362 1363 1366 1369 1370 1372 1373 1374 1380 1381 1382 1386 1387 1388 1390 1392 1394 1397 1402 1407 1410 1411 1413

Visualization __________________________________________________ 1389

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

VR Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415 Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Align View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419

User Interface Reference ________________________________________ 1425


Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 Navigator Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 Project Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428 Project Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429 View Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 Layout Book Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431 Publisher Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 Organizer Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435 Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Coordinates Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447 Search and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 Trace & Reference Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 Project Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 Project Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458 Project Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1459 Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1460 Edit Targets and Operators (Solid Element Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Library Loading Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 Work Environment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Scheme Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 Dialog Boxes and Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 Selection and Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 Tracker and Coordinate Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479 Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 Guide Lines Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 Imaging and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1486 More Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 Advanced Redraw Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

23

Contents

On-Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network And Update Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcut Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Units and Rules Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zones Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction Elements Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Levels and Project North Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Appearance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite Structures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pens & Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Exposure to Light Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Vectorial Hatching Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightWorks Shader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Categories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Story Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Story Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

1491 1493 1496 1498 1500 1503 1505 1506 1507 1510 1513 1515 1516 1518 1522 1524 1526 1529 1533 1536 1538 1539 1540 1541 1543 1544 1548 1551 1552 1554 1555 1558 1562 1563 1567 1569 1571 1573 1574 1576

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Grids & Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578 Linework Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 Fill Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582 Model View Options Combinations Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584 Model View Options for Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585 Model View Options Override Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586 Model View Options for GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588 3D Document Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590 Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 3D Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596 Open GL Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600 3D Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601 Parallel Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602 Perspective Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607 Set Cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609 RoofMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 TrussMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620 Grid System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 GDL (Geometric Description Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 GDL Master Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627 Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 About GDL Object Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641 Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642 Format Options (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 Index Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 View Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652 Book Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 Subset Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1658 Import Views from ArchiCAD Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659 Master Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661 Drawing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1665 Pasting Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 Paste Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 Print 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669 Print 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671 Print Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

25

Contents

Print Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header/Footer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating PDF Output in MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Dialog Box (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow for MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-Buffer Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlink Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREF Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF/DWG Translation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font-Style Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge DXF-DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Options for Elements on Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart Merge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mark-Up Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1673 1675 1676 1678 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1692 1696 1697 1700 1701 1705 1707 1708 1711 1713 1716 1717 1720 1723 1725 1728 1731 1732 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1740 1742 1746

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Contents

Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 Project Reviewer Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755 Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Wall Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1761 Door/Window Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767 Skylight Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 Roof Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1774 Beam Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 Column Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783 Slab Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Stair Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792 StairMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Mesh Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810 Zone Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813 Curtain Wall Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Curtain Wall Settings: System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819 Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825 Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) . . . . . . . . . 1828 Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1831 Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833 Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837 Object/Lamp Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 Linear Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844 Elevation Dimensioning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 Radial Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849 Angle Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851 Level Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853 Dimension Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856 Text Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857 Label Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860 Fill Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1864 Line Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 Arc/Circle Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871 Polyline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1872 Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1873
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

27

Contents

Section Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall End Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspot Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera/VR Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create VR Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create VR Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1880 1889 1896 1902 1904 1906 1909 1910 1911 1912 1914 1915 1918 1919 1920 1921 1923 1925

Index ________________________________________________________ 1927

28

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13


Context-Sensitive Help Finding a Help Topic Navigating in Help For More Information Context-Sensitive Help
ArchiCAD is equipped with a context-sensitive Help system. To launch the Help: Press F1 Or right-click on any particular ArchiCAD user interface element and choose the Whats this command The Help will open to a topic relevant to the ArchiCAD interface item you have clicked. (In some cases, the Help will open to the ArchiCAD main page.) You can also select Help from the ArchiCAD Help menu to bring up the Help main page.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

29

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Finding a Help Topic


From the Help main page, you have several ways of navigating to the topic you need: Use the Contents tab page in the left pane to browse the hierarchical list of topics. You can extend the tree-view by clicking on a topic to see sub-topics. Click on your topic of choice to open it in the right-hand pane. Click the book icon to close an open topic.

Click the Index tab, then click the first letter of the topic you are interested in. The list of matching topics will be instantly displayed. Select from the list to access the topic you wish to open.

30

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Click the Search tab, then enter your search term in the field. Use the * key (asterisk) as a wildcard to denote any string of characters in the search criteria. Hit Enter or click the Go button to bring up search results. Click on a selected topic to display it in the right panel.

Navigating in Help
Use the buttons at the top of the Help page to navigate.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

31

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Go to the next page in the Help

Click the right-arrow button to move forward to the next topic in the hierarchy.

Go to the previous page in the Help

Click the left-arrow button to move backwards to the previous topic in the hierarchy.

Go back to the Help page you were before


Use the Back button of your Internet browser application. (This button may vary depending on your browser.)

Locate the current Help topic in the Table of Contents

Click the circling arrows button to highlight the location of the currently open topic in the Contents hierarchy.

Print out the current Help topic

Click the print button to open the print dialog box to print the current topic from ArchiCAD Help. (Make sure you click with the cursor in the opened Help topic which you want to print.)

32

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Access Drop-Down text


Some Help topics include drop-down subheadings: to display the text under the subheading, click the arrow.

Access Related Topics

Some Help topics include links to Related topics. If the currently open topic has such Related topics, the Related Topics button at the top of the screen is active. Click to display, or click the Related Topics caption at the bottom of the current html page to display the links.

Print PDF

Click the PDF icon to display the Help pages in PDF format and to access Adobes commands for printing the pages using PDF format. To return to viewing it in HTML format again, click anywhere in the Helps Table of Contents.

Write to GRAPHISOFT

Click the email button at the top of any Help page to send your comment on ArchiCAD Help to GRAPHISOFT. The current topic will be automatically shown as the subject of your email.

For More Information


To access additional sources of information about using ArchiCAD: See the links in the ArchiCAD Help menu See the Getting Started booklet.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

33

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

34

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

ArchiCAD 13 New Features


Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution Oriented View Interactive Schedule Enhancements Improved Curtain Wall Editing Library Improvements Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows Fill Enhancements Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D Ruler Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views Improved Find & Select Boundary Contour Options for Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation DWG Exchange Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software License Borrowing

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

35

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution


The new Teamwork in ArchiCAD 13 represents an entirely new approach to collaborative project work, and is specifically designed to meet the demands of a modern, international team effort. This next generation Teamwork solution is based on a client-server architecture and is designed to ensure maximum flexibility, speed and data safety to enable teams - even those spread out around the world - to collaborate on large projects. Highlights of the new Teamwork:

Client-Server Technology On-Demand Reservation System Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication Remote Project Management Data Safety, Project Reliability Performance

36

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Client-Server Technology

This new collaboration solution is based on a client-server technology, in which one or more server applications are connected through the network to many client applications. The clients: architects using ArchiCAD. The server: a new application called Graphisoft BIM Server. This technology ensures Fast, simultaneous access to projects for multiple clients Low network traffic featuring DELTA-Server technology: only the changes since the last Send&Receive will be sent through the network and processed by the server or clients High level of data integrity Access to project data via Internet (even without VPN) A single user can work on several projects with different Roles and permissions levels Always up-to-date information about project and users Offline work support Server-based control via remote access to project settings and user roles This system is scalable, and can be tuned to fit the needs of either a small office or large multinational operations. The number of server clients is unlimited; several server computers can be used in tandem to ensure top performance. The Graphisoft BIM Server application is a new, multithreading, object-oriented database application. Graphisoft BIM Server is available in 32 and 64 bit versions.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

37

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

On-Demand Reservation System

In Teamwork 13, users can reserve or release elements or other data quickly and easily, anywhere in the project. Reserve or release elements individually by selection or criteria Reserve or release other data using simple Control Light interface (See Overview of Teamwork Reservation) Request data in case of a reservation conflict (See Request Elements or Project Data) Assign elements to users with an attached message (See Assign Elements) Use this dynamic reservation approach to: Continuously keep track of which project areas other users are working on (ownership information is always up to date - no Send & Receive necessary) See who owns what at a glance: reservation by user is displayed on screen with different colors (See Colored Workspaces.)

38

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication

Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 introduces an efficient, easy way for users to instantly communicate and manage workspaces. Teamwork Messaging is integrated with the ArchiCAD project: its functions are tied to elements and actions within the project, so that many messaging functions are automated. Send instant messages to other users about project-related tasks (e.g. Send changes to the Server, Release these elements) Request specific elements reserved by others Ask for review of selected elements Flyover appears on screen when a new message arrives; messages set to high priority will stay on screen until handled Follow up on your pending requests and to-do tasks in separate lists Check online/offline status of users before sending a message Undeliverable messages will be stored on the server, then delivered as soon as the recipient is online again See Messaging.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

39

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Remote Project Management

In Teamwork 13, the company user list, project list and company-specific permissions (Roles) are managed centrally for all projects by the Graphisoft BIM Server application. All data can be accessed remotely via Internet with the BIM Server application, so the Server Administrator(s) can, for example: Start a new project or modify the settings of existing projects Add or remove Teamwork users or modify their permissions/settings Define or modify the company-specific Roles Create project archive at any time See BIM Server Manager.

40

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Data Safety, Project Reliability


A priority goal of the new Teamwork: to preserve data integrity in all cases. This is achieved with the following methods: Client-server technology: the BIM Server double-checks the data received from the client and handles the action only if the data fits the needed conditions (user permissions and reservation status) Transaction management: the BIM Server refuses and revokes all actions which are faulty for any reason (e.g. hardware failure, network split or power cut) Automatic creation of project backups at scheduled intervals Better control over user access helps further ensure data integrity: Administrator can tailor user rights to match user responsibilities and knowledge Project log accessible - even from a remote location - providing list of key project-related actions

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

41

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Performance
Teamwork 13 sets the standard for high performance: not only in terms of the speed of different hardware and software components, but also in terms of team effectiveness and flexibility. Functions that speed up the workflow include: The ability to work on the project from anywhere, with a simple internet connection The sophisticated send and receive process decreases the time needed to synchronize with the server - so users are willing to send in their modifications more often Faster local save Dynamic reservation system meets user needs immediately; no need for exclusive access

42

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Oriented View

To simplify editing and documentation when working with models at odd angles, use this technique to rotate the project view (in Floor Plan, Worksheet, Detail, or 3DD) while keeping project coordinates constant. The rotation angle is saved with the view, which is published as shown on the screen that is, in its rotated position Annotation elements (texts, labels, markers, zone stamps, etc.) can be adjusted automatically to match the oriented view See Oriented View.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

43

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Interactive Schedule Enhancements


Annotated Schedule Drawings More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules

44

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Annotated Schedule Drawings

In the Interactive Schedule window, annotations (e.g. associative or static dimensions, text, fills, lines) may be added to any object/door/window preview. For doors/windows, dimensions can be placed automatically. See Add Annotations to Schedule Previews.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

45

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules

In Scheme Settings, nested parentheticals and user-defined and/or conditions enable any combination of logical relationships among criteria Previews can be aligned along their top or bottom; or can be positioned in the cell to reflect the elements elevation from the story/project zero level or any reference level Manually adjust the height or width of any row or column individually, using rulers at top and side of the window See Interactive Schedule.

46

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules

Interactive Schedule criteria now include Conditional criteria for certain listing parameters involving the calculation of walls, slabs, roofs, and beams. Define these criteria using the new Calculation Rules options: for example, specify which fill types used in your project should be calculated as insulation and air space. This way, these quantities will be calculated in the Interactive Schedule and other list outputs. See Calculation Rules.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

47

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Improved Curtain Wall Editing


Direct Editing of Curtain Wall Reference Line

The Reference line of a selected Curtain Wall can now be edited directly on the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation, or 3D windows using familiar pet palette commands, without needing to enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. See Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line.

Editable Curtain Wall Height/Angle Parameters


After Curtain Wall is placed, its height and slant angle parameters will appear in the Selection Settings dialog box. The user can modify these parameters numerically from the settings dialogs or the info box, or graphically, using pet palette commands. Curtain Walls with horizontal Reference lines will behave the same way as walls; they will have the following parameters: - Base height - Height of Curtain Wall - Offset of Reference Line from base - Slant Angle

48

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

For a Curtain Wall with a non-horizontal Reference Line: - Length of extrusion - Vertical position from the Curtain Walls lowest point - Offset of Reference Line from base

See Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

49

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Library Improvements
Objects Saved into the Project Model View Options for Library Parts Selected New Library Objects

50

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Objects Saved into the Project

Project-specific GDL objects (such as StairMaker Stairs and Patch objects) can be automatically saved as part of the project file. Such embedded objects will behave the same way as regular library parts, but it will be impossible to lose them. Thus, all linked libraries can be uniform for every project. All newly created objects are stored in the Embedded Library by default, and can be organized into folders. Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 13. See Libraries.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

51

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Model View Options for Library Parts

Model View Options now include options for the global display of certain library parts in the project. (e.g. Show Opening Lines; Show/hide Door handles) Model View Options will vary depending on the loaded libraries, to enable specialization for local requirements (e.g. scale-dependent display of window components according to local documentation standards). See Model View Options for GDL Objects.

52

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Selected New Library Objects


Some of these objects may not be available in all localized libraries.

Pivot Door
D1 Pivot door leaf turns around a vertical axis that can be offset to any distance from the center.

Sliding Folding Multipanel Door


D Sliding Folding Multipanel door has optional outside/inside/middle stacking. In closed position, access is through a panel at one end that behaves like a normal door.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

53

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Asymmetric Curtain Wall Door Panel


CW Door 2 Asymmetric object. Double door with asymmetric leaf width option.

Enhanced Curtain Wall Anchor Object


Possibility to place it on the frame side, and to rotate it at 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees.

Enhanced Options for Curtain Wall Panels at Corner Positions


Mitred and butt-joint options for connecting panels.

New Steel Pan Stair


Stair stringer can be channel, tube or bar. Metal riser is optional.

54

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Swimming Pool
Vary number of lanes (4-10) and length (25, 33 and 50 meters).

Bowling Alley
Standard competition size.

Bed Layout
Several variations for design aid, plus 3D model.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

55

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Trapezoid Bathtub
Freely resizeable.

Space Saver Toilets


New WC High Seat Corner and WC LT Corner space saver toilets for corner positioning.

Minimal Space for Wheelchair Access


New design aid and symbol: Wheelchair man. Define and check minimal space for disabled access; display it on 2D and section. Display disabled person symbol on 2D and section.

56

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows

The Automatic Exterior Dimensioning function now gives you full flexibility in defining the Door and Window values you wish to dimension. New options enable you to dimension the wallhole, the reveal, the window/door unit, and/or the doors egress or leaf size. See Automatic Exterior Dimensioning.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

57

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Fill Enhancements
Symbolic Soft Insulation Image Fill as Cover Fill Gradient Fill Enhancements

58

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Symbolic Soft Insulation

New Symbol Fill representation makes it easy to model insulation in a composite or complex structure, including curved elements, and ensures proper display of the insulation, even as the skin thickness varies. This option is available for any symbol fill, so its use is not limited to insulation: you can apply it to display any directional fill, e.g. when modeling wood sheathing or metal decking. See Orientation at: Composites Edit Selected Item (Composite Structures), as well as at: Components - Default/Selected Panel (Profile Manager) .

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

59

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Image Fill as Cover Fill

To display surfaces more attractively in 2D views, you can now apply an image fill to any Roof, Slab or Mesh with a cover fill.

60

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Gradient Fill Enhancements

Transparent background available for Gradient fills Accurate output of Gradient fills in various 2D formats including PDF and DWG. DWG Translator option to explode Gradient fills to separate components (including the transparent fill background)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

61

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings

To match the slope angle of the connecting building structures, you can slant a slabs edges individually. For an even better match, modify the material of any slab or roof edge. For Roofs, you can also assign an edge type (e.g. gable, eaves, etc.) which will classify the roof for calculation purposes. See Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material and Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material.

62

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D

Sharp contour lines and improved shading colors in 3D views using OpenGL will enhance the quality of every 3D drawing, reducing the necessity to fine tune the images in 3rd party graphical applications.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

63

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Ruler

New editing aid gives instant, dynamic feedback on cursors vertical and horizontal position. Available in every ArchiCAD window, except the 3D Window and Schedules. Create Guide Lines by clicking and dragging on the Ruler See Ruler.

64

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views

New Fit in Window option in View Settings ensures that this view will always display the entire project contents on screen, subject to Layer status. This setting is also applied when drawings from this view are updated or published. See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

65

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Improved Find & Select

More sophisticated Find & Select interface, analogous to criteria lists for Interactive Schedule, enables more complex searches. Add multiple search values to a single criterion Use stored Find & Select criteria to reserve elements in Teamwork Store Find & Select criteria sets locally or share them in Teamwork See Find and Select Elements.

66

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Boundary Contour Options for Section/ Elevation/Interior Elevation

Display of element contour lines at the place where they are cut by the Section boundary can now be controlled precisely. Define the contours visibility, pen colors and line types from Section Settings. See Boundary Contours.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

67

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

DWG Exchange
Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer

68

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG

New option enables you to merge the entire Publisher Set contents into a single DWG file. Merge all Layout items plus the model to which they refer into a single DWG Resulting DWG file will contain as many Paper Spaces as the number of Layouts that have been used as Publisher Set items. Resulting DWG file will be in Paper Space, and the same translation options apply for all published Layouts. See Defining Output Format.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

69

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File

Filter elements by layer to restrict DWG conversion to just the elements that you need. This function enables faster conversion speed and reduced file size when opening DWG file in ArchiCAD. See Enable Partial Open in Open Options in DXF/DWG Translation Setup.

70

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers


Improves the quality of your projects converted to DXF/DWG, providing greater control over which elements and sub-elements should be assigned to their own layers. New Custom Layers now available in DXF-DWG Translator Setup dialog box: - Zone Background (any visible zone cover fills) - Zone Outline - Zone Stamp (geometry of zone stamp) - Zone Texts (textual content of zone stamp) Insert AutoText into Custom Layer name with a single click. - While editing the Custom Layer field, click the Insert Source Layer button to insert an AutoText for the elements Source Layer. This way, the name of each elements ArchiCAD layer will automatically appear as part of the layer name of the saved element. See Custom Layers (in DXF/DWG Translation Setup.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

71

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer


This new option helps you avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. If you place a Drawing in DWG format to ArchiCAD, then explode it, the Explode follow-up dialog includes a new option: to keep all drawing primitives on their original layer (that is, the same layer as the Drawings layer). See Explode into Current View.

72

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software


Standard Steel Column/Beam Profiles
You can access thousands of standard profiles from a worldwide industry standard profile database. These profiles can then be used when placing Columns or Beams. During the data exchange process, structural engineering programs will recognize and identify such standard elements accurately and completely, without requiring any settings adjustments. See Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile.

Define Load-Bearing/Non-Load-Bearing Structure for Construction Elements


Walls, Beams, Columns, and Slabs can now be defined as either Load-bearing or Non-loadbearing. This is useful when exchanging data with structural programs. See Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

73

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

License Borrowing
License borrowing allows you to continue working in ArchiCAD with a network license, even when the license server is not accessible - e.g. when you are visiting the client or on a business trip. The user can borrow a license with a single click from the ArchiCAD interface, and return it before it expires so that other users can access it. Administrator determines the number of borrowable licenses and borrowing period Administrator monitors who has borrowed the licenses and when they will expire Expired licenses stop functioning and are returned to the Server, even if the user is not connected to the server

See License Borrowing.

74

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13


To use this Migration Guide, click on the subtitle below that corresponds to the project version you wish to migrate. This will take you to a checklist of migration issues you should consider.

Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 Migrating from ArchiCAD 9 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1
To review a list of Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13 (compared to ArchiCAD 12), click here:

Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

75

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13


Note the following interface changes in ArchiCAD 13:

File > Open


The commands used to open existing projects have been redesigned. To open a solo project, use File > Open > Open... to access a file directory dialog box. To open an existing Teamwork project, use File > Open > Open/Join Teamwork Project... to access a server and a list of projects.

Recent Documents
Recently opened ArchiCAD solo projects are now listed at the bottom of the File > Open submenu, rather than under a separate File menu command.

Story Settings
The Story Settings dialog box controls are unchanged, but they are now divided between two separate dialog boxes: Story Settings contains the controls for inserting, deleting, and naming stories. Edit Elements by Stories allows you to copy and move elements among the stories of your project. These commands are available from the Design menu; by right-clicking any story in the Navigator Project Map; and/or by customizing your menu structure to include these commands.

Library Manager Tab Pages


Following a re-design of the Library Manager, the FTP and Web Objects tab pages have been eliminated.

Simplified Icons in Navigator Project Map


Regardless of type (e.g. independent or project-based; Floor Plan or Section-based; linked or unlinked), all Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, Detail and Worksheet viewpoints are displayed in the Navigator with uniform icons.

76

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Publisher Set Interface


The Publisher Set controls work the same as in earlier versions, but to enable reservation of individual Publisher Sets by Teamwork users, Publisher Sets have a new listing option in the Publisher maps (Organizer and Navigator): click the Up One Level button to view the full list of Publisher Sets and to choose and manage them. In this view, use the command buttons at the bottom of the list window to manage Publisher Sets.

Fill Types Setting


The setting for solid fills in the Fill Types dialog box is now called Opacity. (In earlier versions, this setting was called Translucency.)

Hotlink Management
The Open in single-story mode checkbox has been eliminated from the New Hotlink directory dialog box. This function is now merged into the Choose Story dialog box that appears when you first place a multi-story module file. The option to Skip Nested Modules can now be set separately, in the Module Settings of each placed instance of a hotlinked module. You can also skip or include nested modules for all instances of a module, using the general control in Hotlink Manager.

Project Preferences Changes


Options > Project Preferences is now a sub-menu. The following Project Preferences screens have been eliminated and their controls moved elsewhere. (See table below.) Layout Preferences Miscellaneous

Working Units a Separate Project Preference


Working Units is now a separate dialog box, in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. This is a user-specific preference and (unlike other Project Preferences) cannot be shared or reserved in Teamwork. (In earlier versions, these controls were grouped under the title Working Units and Levels and constituted one tab page of the Project Preferences dialog box.)

Renamed Project Preferences: Levels and Project North


The Levels and Project North controls (formerly Working Units and Levels) have their own Preferences tab page. This page now also includes the editable control for setting Project North.

Renamed Project Preferences: Calculation Units and Rules


The former Calculation Units page of Project Preferences is renamed as Calculation Units and Rules to reflect the additional settings on listing rules.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

77

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Network and Update Options Replaces Web Options (Work Environment)


The new name of the Web Options Work Environment dialog page is Network and Update Options. Here, the old Web Objects Folder location controls have been eliminated. The new option on this dialog page is: Teamwork Discovery Port.

New Work Environment Dialog Page


On-Screen Options is a new page of the Work Environment dialog box. Many of these settings have been moved here from other parts of the Work Environment dialog box (primarily from More Options). See table below.
Preference, Command or Option Name Working Units Reference Levels Display of Master Layout Items (now called Display Master Layout) Color of Master Layout Items (now: Use uniform color for Master items...) Show Ghost Bounding Box Autohide Special Snap Points Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment Special Snap Point Color Feedback Graphics Color Source Marker Color Line Type/pen color of Marker Elements on-screen-only parts When placing model views onto Layouts, adjust each drawing frame to show only zoomed area of model view Update Auto-rebuild Model viewpoints continuously Create Detail/Worksheet Boundary in Detail/Worksheet Window Auto ID Increase New Location Options > Project Preferences > Working Units Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North Master Layout Settings Work Environment > On-Screen Options

Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > More Options

Options > Work Environment > More Options Options > Work Environment > More Options Options > Work Environment > More Options

78

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating from ArchiCAD 12


Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

79

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating from ArchiCAD 11


Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display Review New Model View Options for Fills DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills

80

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating from ArchiCAD 10


Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display Review New Model View Options for Fills DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

81

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating from ArchiCAD 9


Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills

82

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1


Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

83

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13


The active libraries of older-version projects will be loaded in ArchiCAD 13 as linked libraries. (They will be listed in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager.) Other Objects items in the older versions will appear in the Embedded Objects folder of ArchiCAD 13. Any library missing in the Library Manager of the older version will be listed as unavailable in the Library Manager of ArchiCAD 13. Locate these libraries and add them as linked libraries, using the Library Managers Add command. Missing objects in the older-version project are also listed as missing in ArchiCAD 13, both in the Library Manager as well as the Library Loading Report. To solve the problem, locate the source files of these missing objects and add them to Library Manager.

Subset Library/Migration Library


If you are migrating earlier-version ArchiCAD projects, some of your library parts will be incompatible with new library parts in ArchiCAD 13. If you want to keep the old library objects, but also use the new library objects, do the following: load the ArchiCAD 13 library (use Add in Library Manager) load the migration libraries from AC 10, 11 or 12, as appropriate. - For projects migrated from ArchiCAD 10, 11, or 12, these are called ArchiCAD Migration Libraries and are available as .lcf files available from the GRAPHISOFT website. Note: Available migration libraries may vary, depending on your localized version. - For projects migrated from ArchiCAD 9: certain localized versions delivered an ArchiCAD 9 Subset Library. In this case, you should load all of the following libraries: ArchiCAD 9 Subset + ArchiCAD 10/11/12 Migration Library. This way, the compatible old elements will be automatically replaced by AC 13 library elements. The incompatible old elements will remain in place, and will not conflict with the AC 13 objects. If you want to continue working on your project using the new objects: load the ArchiCAD 13 library (use Add in Library Manager) The non-compatible elements in your migrated project will be shown as Missing library parts; you must replace them one by one, and you must reset their parameters. The compatible elements will be automatically replaced by AC 13 library parts.

84

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13


1) Open the Teamwork project in its original, older-version ArchiCAD. 2) After all changes have been sent, all users should sign out (except the Administrator). Then save the .plp file. 3) In ArchiCAD 13, go to File > Open > Open. 4) In the appearing file directory dialog box, select the .plp file you saved in Step 2. Click Open. 5) Share the project to a BIM Server. (Teamwork > Share). As part of the Share process: - Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 13. - You should upload the Linked Libraries to the BIM Server. Important: All users and workspaces will be lost! Users and roles must be created and assigned for this project on the BIM Server, using the GRAPHISOFT BIM Server Manager. If the older Teamwork project contained Hotlinks and Drawings referring to external content, these will function without any problems in ArchiCAD 13. - However, if the older Teamwork project was created in ArchiCAD 11 or earlier, these Hotlinks and linked Drawings cannot be updated from their original sources. In this case, follow the migration procedure described at Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks. If the older Teamwork project is the source project of Hotlinks and Drawings placed into other projects, then those links will be broken when the older Teamwork project is opened in ArchiCAD 13. Thus, these hotlinks and drawings must be relinked to the host project. (In the host projects, use the relink commands in the Hotlink Manager and Drawing Manager.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

85

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12


If you are back-saving an ArchiCAD 13 project to ArchiCAD 12, and if your project contains sections that display composite walls whose patterns are set to Fit to Skin, then you must rebuild the Sections in ArchiCAD 12 to avoid distortions in display.

86

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Lost Criteria Sets


Find & Select criteria sets from earlier versions will be lost when you open the older-version projects in ArchiCAD 13.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

87

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule


Interactive Schedule criteria from earlier versions may create unexpected results in ArchiCAD 13 if you are listing Object-type elements: The Object value in earlier versions listed objects from all Object subtypes. The Object value in ArchiCAD 13 lists only those objects that are placed using the Object tool. All other object subtypes are listed only if you add those subtypes as separate Element Type criteria.

88

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

No Automatic Home Story Settings


There is no Automatic Home Story setting in ArchiCAD 13. Elements from older projects whose Home Story was set to Automatic will now be assigned Home Stories that correspond to the story they were placed on. In ArchiCAD 13, during editing operations that affect the elements elevation (e.g. elevate, multiply with vertical displacement), you have the option to automatically re-assign those elements home stories accordingly.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

89

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display


As of ArchiCAD 12, Door/Window objects have been reprogrammed to display correctly in light of the partial structure display feature. Doors and Windows migrated from older-version projects (version 11 and earlier) into ArchiCAD 13 will not be displayed properly if you use Partial Structure Display. These Door/Window objects are incompatible for the purposes of Partial Structure Display. To address the issue of incompatible library parts, see Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13.

90

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13


This chapter contains detailed information about how to migrate your ArchiCAD 8.1 or ArchiCAD 9 project files and PlotMaker 8.1 or PlotMaker 9 Layout Books into ArchiCAD 13. Note: In this description, version 9 should be understood as either version 8.1 or version 9. In version 9, the Project Model is always located in a PLN file, and the layouts in an LBK (Layout Book) file. ArchiCAD 13 (and every ArchiCAD version from 10 up) contains both Model Views and Layouts in an integrated environment in a single file. Since ArchiCAD 13 Projects can be divided among multiple ArchiCAD PLN files, there are two basic ways to migrate your ArchiCAD 9 Projects and PlotMaker 9 Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13: 1) Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 13: The ArchiCAD 9 Project file should be placed into its own Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (this file would contain only Model Views, plus the default Layout Book), and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book should be placed into a second, separate Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (this file would contain all Layouts with no Model information). 2) Create a Single File in ArchiCAD 13: If the Project is small enough, both the ArchiCAD 9 Project File (PLN) and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book (LBK) can be merged into a single file in ArchiCAD 13. The following sections outline how to carry out both options.

Option 1: Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 13


1) To migrate the ArchiCAD 9 Project File, simply open the PLN file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it. Although there are several settings which can affect how elements are displayed on the Floor Plan, these are all automatically set during the conversion so that the same look is preserved in ArchiCAD as far as possible. Because of new settings in ArchiCAD 13, it is possible that some elements will look slightly different than they did in ArchiCAD 9. For detailed information, see Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues for a detailed list.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

91

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

2) To migrate the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book, use the File > Open command. In the Dialog, select PlotMaker Layout Book (*.lbk) as File Type and select the desired LBK file. Click the Open button to start opening it.

3) Since Title Types of PlotMaker 9 have become GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 13, the program will convert all Title Types defined in the Layout Book File into Library Objects (GSM Files). ArchiCAD will place these created Library Parts into its Embedded Library; they will be listed in the Library Manager. Please note that these generated Title Types have become non-parametric GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 13, displaying the same information as the source Title Type in PlotMaker 9. However, if you used default Title Types in PlotMaker 9, you will find the counterparts of these in the ArchiCAD 13 Library and you may change the generated Title Types into parametric ones shipped with ArchiCAD 13.

92

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

4) When ArchiCAD is finished converting the Layout Book data, an Information Dialog will alert you to data that could not be converted because of essential differences between the features of ArchiCAD 13 and PlotMaker 9. For more detailed information, press Show Detailed Report in Browser to launch your default web browser containing a fuller explanation of what could not be converted and why, plus what you can do about it.

For example, in PlotMaker 9, you could define custom line weights for each individual drawing element (e.g. Lines, Fills, etc.). In ArchiCAD 13, you can define line weights only for Pens, and all elements using a certain Pen will be drawn using the line weight defined for that Pen. Because of this difference, specific line weights defined in PlotMaker 9 will be converted back to their line weights as specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog of ArchiCAD 13. Please see Conversion Warnings for a detailed list of conversion warnings. 5) Now your new ArchiCAD 13 Documentation Project File (a file containing only Layout Book information) is ready for use. One Story will be created as default, but no model data will exist in any Model Views. All Layouts will be displayed in the Navigators Layout Book.

Option 2: Create Single File in ArchiCAD 13


Use this option for relatively small projects, to merge both the Layout Book from PlotMaker and Project File from ArchiCAD 9 into a single project file in ArchiCAD 13. When creating a single PLN file in ArchiCAD 13, you will merge Layout Data into a Project File. In ArchiCAD 13, every Project File must contain both Model Views and a Layout Book as default. This means that the PLN file into which Layout Book data is merged will already contain one or more Layouts, with their own attributes and settings. For this reason, the procedure follows the usual rules of merging, which means that if a particular setting already exists in the receiving file, existing data are used, and are not overwritten by merged data. Therefore, when merging Layout Book data into a PLN file, the following settings of the Layout Book are not merged:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

93

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Book settings Project Info Grid settings Default Master Layout setting Also, Layout-specific settings in the Work Environment of ArchiCAD 13 will not be modified by data of the imported Layout Book. The program will compare the names of the Attributes and Master Layouts of the merged file and the host ArchiCAD 13 file. Please note that the program compares only the names (but not content or definition) when checking for matching Attributes/Master Layouts. If the Attribute or Master Layout names in both files are identical, they will be considered identical by the program, and the existing files in ArchiCAD 13, along with their settings, will be kept. The structure of the merged Layout Book (its Layouts, Subsets, Master Layouts and placed Drawings) is inserted into the existing Layout Book structure of the ArchiCAD 13 PLN file.

Follow these steps:


1) Open the PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it as an AC 13 PLN file. 2) Open the ArchiCAD 9 PLN file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it as another AC 13 PLN file. You now have two new ArchiCAD 13 files; these two must now be merged. 3) In the latter active Project File (the one containing model data), use the File > File Special > Merge command to merge data from the other saved ArchiCAD 13 file (the one containing Layout Book data). In the appearing dialog box, choose Layout Book to merge Layout Book data of the file into your active Project File. Click the Merge button.

94

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

If you open the Organizer from the Navigator, you will see that all Layout Book data has now been merged into the Project File.

Note: You should follow the route specified in this guide, that is, merge the PLN File containing Layout Book data into the PLN File containing Model data, and not the other way around. This is because of the rules of merging, and because Views and certain other data would not come through if you merged the Model data into the file containing Layout Book data. In case you do not wish to merge the Layout Book in its entirety, only some of its Layouts, do the following: 1) Open the ArchiCAD 13 PLN File containing the Model data. 2) Open the ArchiCAD 13 PLN File containing the Layout Book data.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

95

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

3) In the PLN file containing Model data, open the Organizer in such a way that you see the Layout Book of both files. In the illustration below, the PLN File containing the Model data is on the right.

4) Using drag-and-drop, move the desired Layouts from the Layout Book PLN file (on the left) into the Model PLN file (on the right). If you have Drawings placed into the Layout Book PLN which point to the Model PLN as their source, then the Drawing references will automatically switch from external file references to internal references after the Layouts are merged. Note: Such drawing links will not be redefined as internal references if the name of the source project file has changed since the drawings were placed. In this case, you should select all such drawings in the Drawing Manager and use the Link To button to re-link these Drawings to their source PLN (the renamed project file).

Conversion Warnings
When you migrate a PlotMaker 9 Layout Book file, ArchiCAD 13 may warn you of some project elements that will not be reproduced in ArchiCAD 13, due to changed feature sets. The following is a list of all warnings that may be displayed by the program during conversion. The warnings displayed always apply to the file currently being converted. 1) Printing/Plotting Publisher sets should be reviewed Some Print/Plot Options in PlotMaker 9 have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so these settings need reviewing before Printing/Plotting them. 2) Original output color of Elements drawn or pasted into Layouts has been restored In PlotMaker 9, in the Book Settings Dialog box, output color of elements on Layouts may be set to grayscale or black. This option has no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so elements will appear in their original color.

96

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

3) Fill-related display and output options could not be converted In PlotMaker 9 you may apply global settings to Fills. These options have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so they cannot be converted. Therefore, all fills are displayed as defined in the Fill Settings Dialog Box. 4) OLE Drawings could not be converted ArchiCAD does not support OLE technology, so OLE drawings within the LBK file cannot be converted properly. (If the OLE drawing was embedded in the LBK file, with no live link to the source application, you will see the drawing, but you cannot update it.) You can identify OLE drawings using the Drawing Manager palette: look for the OLE icon in the Type column. It is recommended to replace these OLE Drawings with PDF files in ArchiCAD 13. 5) Edited drawing Layers are restored In PlotMaker you could modify the show/hide status of Drawing Layers. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so these drawing Layers will be displayed according to their original show/hide status. 6) Text and Markers size changes In PlotMaker, you could set the size of Texts and Markers to retain their original size even after the Output Scale was modified. (You checked the Fix Size option for Text and Markers in the Drawing Settings dialog box.) This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so Text and Markers will be resized according to the scale change, just like any other element in the drawing. 7) Custom line weight is restored to pen line weight In PlotMaker you could assign a custom line weight to lines, circles and splines. In this case the color of the line came from the assigned pen, but the weight was custom set in the element's settings dialog box. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so the line weights of lines, circles or splines will be set to values specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog.

Conversion of Other Attributes/Settings


Layers, Pens, Fills: The ArchiCAD 13 PLN file will inherit the Layers of the LBK Layout Book. The PlotMaker Layer will be renamed to ArchiCAD Layer. Pens and Fills come through unaltered. Autotext items: All Autotext entries are converted. The name of some of these items will change. The following Autotext items (located in PlotMaker 9s Book Info Dialog) are now found in the Project Info Dialog of ArchiCAD 13: Client Project Name Street City State/Country Postal Code Company Project Number Architect
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

97

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Draftsman (CAD Technician in ArchiCAD 13) Project Status Date of Issue Custom1 Custom2 Custom3 The following Autotext items are also converted. They are available in ArchiCAD 13 while editing a Text Block in either a Model View or on a Layout. Some names have changed. Some no longer apply, so these are converted into their closest match: Layout Name Layout Number (Layout ID in ArchiCAD 13) Subset Name Subset Number (Subset ID in ArchiCAD 13) Page Number (Layout Number in ArchiCAD 13) Number of Pages (Number of Layouts in ArchiCAD 13) Book Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 13) Book Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Name Drawing Name with Extension (Drawing Name in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Number (Drawing ID in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Scale (Original Scale in ArchiCAD 13) Output Scale (Drawing Scale in ArchiCAD 13) AC File Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 13) AC File Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Last saved at Last saved by Long Date Short Date Time Master Layout: Layout size is defined differently in ArchiCAD 13. In PlotMaker 9 and earlier versions, the size of the Layout means the printable area of the page (the full size of the paper minus margins on all four sides). In ArchiCAD 13, the size of a Layout means the full size of the paper. This change does not affect either the full size of the Layout (printable area + Margins on all four sides) or the sizes of the printable area or any of the Margins. They will be the same as in previous versions; only the names have changed to better approximate real-world practice, where a Layout is the whole paper used for printing/plotting. So Master Layout sizes are converted accordingly. The Grid for Drawing Numbering and Master Layout default come through unaltered. Layout settings: comes through unaltered. Subset settings: comes through unaltered. 98
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Book settings: comes through unaltered, except Output Color settings, which does not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13 - see Warning 2 above). Drawing settings: all settings come through (Title is converted into GDL Object), except for Attributes Update Rules, which have no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13. Layer changes are not carried through (see Warning 5 above). If the Text and Markers option in PlotMaker has been set to Fix Size, Warning 6 above is displayed. If a placed Drawing had its own Pen Set, the same Pen Set will be created in ArchiCAD 13 and the Drawing will continue using it. The Output Scale setting will be converted into Drawing Scale. Note: In ArchiCAD 13, Drawing Scale is the scale of the Drawing on the Layout, which will be output, while Original Scale is that of the Drawings source view. If several Drawings in PlotMaker 9 used the same Pen Set, ArchiCAD 13 will create only one Pen Set for all the Drawings. This Pen Set will have the same name as the first converted Drawing which uses this Pen Set, but all the converted Drawings which used it in PlotMaker 9 will use it in ArchiCAD 13. Publishing Contacts: If you have saved your Publishing Contacts from PlotMaker into a file, you can open that Contacts file in ArchiCAD 13 after opening the PlotMaker 9 LBK file. Grids: come through unaltered. Project Preferences: Working Units, Mouse Constraints, Publisher preferences, Uniform Pens and Colors setting, Miscellaneous settings come through. (Since there is no Uniform Pens and Color settings checkbox in ArchiCAD 13, this means in effect that all Drawings will refer to the same Pen Set). If cache data was stored in the Layout File in PlotMaker 9 (the option is in Preferences > Cache Folder), the Drawings will be stored in the Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (see Drawings placed on Layout below). Custom line weights do not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13 - see Warning 7 above). Drawings placed on Layouts: In PlotMaker 9, Project links are saved with the Layout Book File (Preferences > Cache Folder > Include Cache in Layout Book). By default, external links (e.g. PMK files, bitmap files) are not saved with the Layout Book File. If a Drawing was saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 13 will be set to be a manual-update Drawing, and will be saved with the ArchiCAD 13 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog). If a Drawing was not saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is not checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 13 will be set to be an auto-update Drawing, and will not be saved with the ArchiCAD 13 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will not be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog).

Drawing Status
It is recommended that you perform an update of all placed Drawings after opening or merging a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13. Background: The modification status checking of Drawings is significantly enhanced in ArchiCAD 13, compared to PlotMaker 9. In PlotMaker 9, the program monitored the last
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

99

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

modification date of the Drawings source files. If the last modification date of the file had changed, the program assumed that all Drawings coming from that file would need updating. In contrast, ArchiCAD 13 can monitor the modification status of each Drawing with a PLN source separately. When opening a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13, a transitional state exists: the LBK file does not contain all information necessary for ArchiCAD 13 to decide the modification status of Drawings in the Layout Book file. (This transition state can cause Drawings with OK status in PlotMaker to have Modified status in ArchiCAD.) In this case, the status checking will be performed according to the old method (which assumes all drawings from a modified PLN source require updating). Only after the first update performed in ArchiCAD 13 will the status checking mechanism run on the drawing level instead of the file level.

Drawing Name and Drawing ID


Not all Drawing Names and Drawing IDs coming from a PlotMaker 9 LBK file will have their exact equivalent when opened in ArchiCAD 13. Therefore it is recommended to review Drawing Names and Drawing IDs to make sure everything came through correctly. For checking Drawing Names/IDs and updating Drawings, it is highly recommended to use the Drawing Manager of ArchiCAD 13, which has many customizable columns listing information about Drawings. Background: In PlotMaker 9, the Drawing Name was always the same as the name of the View from which it was created. In ArchiCAD 13, a View Name consists of two parts: View Name and View ID. For this reason, Drawing Name can be either View Name or View Name + View ID (or Custom). In PlotMaker 9, the value of Drawing ID (which was called Drawing Number in PlotMaker 9), could come from the Layout or from the ArchiCAD Viewpoint, or it could be set to a custom value. In ArchiCAD 13, the ArchiCAD Viewpoint option is not available. Instead, the View ID value is used.

Library Objects
When merging an LBK file into ArchiCAD 13, all elements placed on Layouts, including library parts, are merged. However, the libraries used by the merged project are not automatically loaded into the ArchiCAD 13 project. Thus, if after a merge you find that any library parts (such as Drawing Titles) are missing, you should load any missing libraries to resolve the problem.

Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues


ArchiCAD 13 offers more sophisticated Display Options for elements than ArchiCAD 9, but predefined settings will ensure that files migrated from ArchiCAD 9 will have compatible displays in ArchiCAD 13. While display options have changed since ArchiCAD 9 (they are now called Model View Options), the following information should help you recreate the same display in ArchiCAD 13 for migrated projects. 100
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

In ArchiCAD 13, options for Doors and Windows are set separately in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options, Options for Construction Elements Panel, giving you more flexibility in applying model views: If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, but leave the with Markers checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Show on Plans option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, and check the with Markers checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Show with Dim. option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, but leave the with Contours checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Hide on Plan options in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, and check the with Contours checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Reflected Ceiling options in ArchiCAD 9. The Hide on Floor Plan radio button is a new choice: it means that Doors/Windows will not be shown on the Floor Plan at all, just as if there were no Doors/Windows in Walls. In Section, Elevation, and Interior Elevation, the Door/Window hole will be visible. Regarding the display of Cut Fills (Document > Set Model Display > Model View Options > Override Fill Display), you will notice that there is no option to set Bitmap Patterns. A bitmap display is available for on-screen display only: Bitmap or Vectorial is set globally using the Show as Vectorial Hatching option of On-Screen View Options.

When you check Override Cut Fills and the Show Skin Separator Lines box, you will achieve the same result as the Separators Only option in ArchiCAD 9. If you check Override Cut Fills and click Solid Foreground, it will achieve the same result as the Solid w/o Separation Lines option in ArchiCAD 9. Also, the Show Skin Separator Lines checkbox is enabled. Check this to achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the lower left corner is for Drafting Fills. If you check Override Drafting Fills and click the Solid Foreground option, you will achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the upper right corner is for Cover Fills.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

101

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

To adjust Cover Fill display, check the Override Cover Fills box and choose one of the following options: Solid Foreground: This replicates the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: A new option; this creates a cover fill over the element, displayed in the background color defined for the elements cover fill. No Fill: A new option; this draws no fills at all, and displays only the contour if any. The last area is for Zone Fills and Zone Stamps. The options in this area achieve the same as the Zone Polygons Display Options and Zone Stamps fields achieved in ArchiCAD 9. Zone Stamp: Check Hide Zone Stamp to hide it. If you leave the Override Zone Fills box unchecked, this corresponds to the Cover Fill Display Option for Zone Polygons from ArchiCAD 9. To adjust Zone Fill display, check the Override Zone Fills box and choose one of the following options: No Fill: This replicates the None option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Category: This replicates the Category Color option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: This replicates the Solid Background Colored Fill option in ArchiCAD 9. Category Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern on Category option in ArchiCAD 9. Hide Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern Only option in ArchiCAD 9.

102

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display


For both Section and Elevation Markers, the Marker appearance is set in the Tool Settings Dialog Box for each individual Section and Elevation. (Place Marker at either or both ends of the S/E line, or place one Marker in the middle.) The Section/Elevation Marker display option is no longer a Model View Option, so a given S/E Markers appearance will be uniform throughout the project, regardless of which view it is saved in. When migrating an older-version file in which you used any Section/Elevation Marker Model View Option other than As in Settings, you should adjust individual Markers as needed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

103

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Review New Model View Options for Fills


The Model View Options panel, formerly called Options for Fills and Zones, is now called Override Fill Display. As in earlier versions, this panel is used to globally define the Fill Backgrounds, the display of Cut, Cover, and Drafting Fills, and the display of Zone Fills in the project. The various options have changed somewhat, but when you migrate an older-version file (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 13, the program will assign corresponding Model View Options to ensure that fills are displayed correctly in ArchiCAD 13. However, you should doublecheck the fill display in ArchiCAD 13 and make any adjustments necessary.

104

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills


When saving an ArchiCAD 13 file to AutoCAD-compatible format, the results may vary from earlier version conversions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier). You should check these converted files and make any changes necessary. Possible Differences in Fill Conversion within ArchiCAD 13: When converting ArchiCAD fills, a new option in the DXF/DWG Translator enables you to manually set up a custom Fill Conversion table. Also, Fill types in ArchiCAD 13 are converted by default as follows: - Image: converted to a solid fill (technically a background-color hatch) - Gradient: converted to a solid fill (technically a foreground-color hatch) - Symbol: if you chose Convert all fills as Solid, symbol fills are converted into Blocks. If you chose Convert Fill Backgrounds as Additional Solid Hatches, they are converted into Blocks plus a Background-color Solid fill.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

105

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks


Note: This process is applicable when migrating older-version projects (11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 13. When you open a project in ArchiCAD 13 which contains hotlinks to source files saved in versions 11 or earlier, you will see the following warning:

Open Hotlink Manager to View Hierarchy of Project's Hotlink Sources


To get a list of all the files that are hotlinked to the current project, open the project in ArchiCAD 13. Go to Hotlink Manager (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager). The Hotlinked Modules list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules hotlinked into the current project. The Hotlink Sources list displays the sources of the hotlinked module files together with their status.

106

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

For a more comprehensive and printable display of the hotlinked source files, click the Show hierarchy in browser button. This will open your default internet browser in a separate window, showing the hotlinked source files in a hierarchical format, together with file locations that are hyperlinked.

Conversion of a project with Hotlink Source files available in their original location
In this workflow, you will open the hotlinked source files one by one and save them in ArchiCAD 13. Suppose you have the following hotlinks linked into Project A:

1) Open the project (A.pln) 2) In the warning dialog which appears, choose the Open Hotlink Manager option.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

107

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

3) The Hotlink Manager contains a list of Source files.

4) For each Source file shown as Legacy or Missing - B.pln, C.pln and D.pln in our example you must open the file in ArchiCAD 13, making sure to use the Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD checkbox as part of the Open process. Then save the opened file (File > Save.) We recommend that you save the files in this order: go through the hierarchy file by file from bottom to top in the hierarchy. (In our example, start with D.pln.) Note: It is possible that the opened source files contain other hotlinks that are not used in A.pln. (for example, if the module is placed on a story that is not shown in A.pln, or if B.pln contains nested modules, yet the Hotlink Manager for A.pln has checked the Skip Nested Modules box). If these nested modules are in legacy format, ArchiCAD will display a warning when they are opened. In this case, you should continue the conversion process, treating B.pln as a separate project that contains legacy hotlinks: you must save those hotlink sources in ArchiCAD 13 as described in this document - by resaving the files, locating missing sources, resaving nested legacy source files, etc. 5) In the Hotlink Manager, click the Refresh Status button. If you have successfully re-saved all the Legacy files from the Source list (as described in Step 4), then the Source list should not show any files in Legacy status.

108

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

6) Click Update.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

109

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

110

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Configuration
Start ArchiCAD Create New Solo Project Open a Solo Project Close a Solo Project File Types Opened by ArchiCAD File Types Saved by ArchiCAD File Compression Template Files Backup Files Archive Files License Borrowing Opening Projects through a Network Merging Files Add-Ons and Goodies Working Units Project Preferences Scale Attributes Libraries Favorites The ArchiCAD User Interface Customizing your Work Environment

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

111

Configuration

Start ArchiCAD
Double-click on the ArchiCAD icon in your program folder to start the program. The Start ArchiCAD dialog box appears.

In the top section, What would you like to do?, choose either:

Create a New Project


or

Open a Project Create a New Project


Creates a new blank project in ArchiCAD. If you choose this option, the Set up Project Settings section below offers two choices for the new Projects settings.

112

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

1) Use a Template: Click the pop-up to choose a template.

At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location. 2) Use Latest Project Settings Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

113

Configuration

Open a Project
If you choose Open a Project, the You can section below gives you three choices:

1) Browse for a Solo Project. Choose this button, then click the Browse button at bottom left to bring up a file directory dialog box. 2) Browse for a Teamwork Project See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project. Note: If you want to open a Teamwork project from ArchiCAD 12 or earlier (file extension .plp, .bpn, .plc), you must first open it as a solo project. Thus, use the first radio button above, Browse for a Solo Project, for if you are opening an older Teamwork Project. See the Migration Guide for more information on converting older Teamwork projects.

114

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

3) Select a Recent Project. Choose this button, then select a recent project from the list below and click the Open button at bottom left to open it. Note: Another way to open a recent project is by selecting from the list at the bottom of the File > Open > Open... submenu.

Set up Work Environment


Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13 and Customizing your Work Environment.

Do not Display this Dialog Next Time


If you dont want to see the Start ArchiCAD dialog box every time you start the program, disable it by checking this box. To enable it again, use the File > New & Reset All command.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

115

Configuration

Create New Solo Project


Use File > New > New to create a new solo project (file extension .pln).

Note: If you press Alt (Opt) key when choosing the New command, its name changes to New and Reset All, and ArchiCAD will automatically use the default project settings. The New Project dialog box appears. Click either Use a Template, or Use Latest Project Settings.

Use a Template
Click the pop-up to choose a template. At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. 116
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location.

Use Latest Project Settings


Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.

Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD


Use File > New to create a new project. From the New Project dialog box, check the Launch a new instance box if you want to open an additional ArchiCAD in addition to the currently running program, if any.

Setup Work Environment


Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13 and Customizing your Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

117

Configuration

Open a Solo Project


Use File > Open > Open... to open a solo project.

The Open file directory dialog box appears. Browse for the project you need.

To open a recent project, select from the list at the bottom of the File > Open > Open command.

File Types Opened by ArchiCAD Join or Leave a Teamwork Project


118
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Close a Solo Project


If you use File > Close to close the Floor Plan, you close the entire Project. You will be prompted to save recent changes, if any. External files (GDL Object windows, pictures) will remain open. When you save and close a project with many windows open simultaneously, ArchiCAD will reopen these windows the next time you open the project. Re-opening all these windows may take time, especially if they must be rebuilt. If the number of windows to be re-opened exceeds 20 (not including PhotoRendering windows, which are not saved with the project), then ArchiCAD will show a warning dialog in which you can opt to re-open just the frontmost window (plus the Floor Plan), instead of all of the previously open windows.

File Types Saved by ArchiCAD Close Teamwork Project

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

119

Configuration

File Types Opened by ArchiCAD


Use File > Open to open a project. (See Open a Solo Project.) The File > Open command allows you to open documents of the types recognized by ArchiCAD. This command is not available if the active window belongs to an open GDL Object.

ArchiCAD Projects (.pln, .pla, .bpn)


ArchiCAD 13 can open projects saved as ArchiCAD 8.1, 9, 10, 11 and 12. Solo Projects (.pln) are the main native document type of ArchiCAD. A .pln file includes all model data and the views generated for the project, as well as the default settings, attributes and library references.

Archive (.pla)
Archive files are similar to Solo Projects, but these include all the library parts, background images and linked textures used in the Project, not just references to them. For more information, see Archive Files.

Backup Project file (.bpn)


Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the last saved version of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety.

ArchiCAD Teamwork (AC12 and earlier) file formats (.plp, .plc, .pca, .bpc)
Note: To open a Teamwork file saved in earlier ArchiCAD versions (12 and earlier), use the Open Project command (not the Open Teamwork Project command). For information, see the Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 for ArchiCAD 13.

ArchiCAD Project Template (.tpl)


For details, see Template Files.

ArchiCAD 2D Lines (.2dl)


These files are vectorial drawings saved from ArchiCADs 3D Window or a Section/Elevation/IE window. These drawings contain no model information and can be touched up in the Floor Plan with 2D tools. Important note: In the 3D Window, this option is only available with the Internal Engine not available in OpenGL mode.

Module File (.mod)


For details, see Hotlinked Modules.

120

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

PlotMaker Layoutbook (.lbk) PlotMaker Drawing (.pmk) Windows Enhanced Metafile (.emf) Windows Metafile (.wmf) All Images (.sgi, .psd, .bmp, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .jfi)
Various types of picture files can be opened as model pictures, but they will appear in their own separate windows, not the ArchiCAD main window. All QuickTime based image files and a number of additional formats are available.

DWF File (.dwf)


Drawing Web Format, a 2D vector graphics format created by AutoDesk for use on the World Wide Web which supports hyperlinks, layer information and views. This is also the recommended format when publishing views that will be redlined through the Internet or on an Intranet. The DWF file will contain all drawing elements with some exceptions and limitations: Pictures: due to format limitations, only straight pictures can be written to a DWF file. Cameras will not be included

DXF/DWG File (.dxf, .dwg)


DXF and DWG files are the most widely used CAD file formats. If you choose this file type, the Settings button appears in the Open dialog box, which opens the DXF-DWG Translation Setup dialog box. For details, see Opening DWG/DXF Files. However, in most cases you need not adjust these translation settings, because the default setup will give you the desired result when opening a DXF/DWG file.

IFC 2x2, 2x3 (.ifc), IFCXML (.ifcxml)


IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/ downloads/

HPGL File (.plt)


For details, see Plot.

3D Studio File (.3ds)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

121

Configuration

MicroStation Design File (.dgn)


If you choose this option and select a DGN file, the DGN Open dialog box lets you specify the unit conversion factor, the name of the configuration file (optional) and whether you would like to use the level symbol correspondence defined in the DGN file. Options and Notes Dimension elements are converted only if you break them up in MicroStation before the conversion using the Drop Dimension command. The conversion of associated dimensions cannot be completed because their internal structure is not known. Tag elements are not handled at all because of lack of information. Custom lines are not converted in the current version, as MicroStation can use more elements than ArchiCAD in this type of element. Shared cells become library parts in ArchiCAD. They are placed in a folder called DGN_filename.LIB (where DGN_filename is the name of the original DGN file), which is created and saved by the conversion process. If such a folder exists, it will be emptied first. Image files assigned to the DGN file are not converted. The reference point for text elements is always located in the bottom left corner of their box, because the text measurement algorithms of MicroStation are not known. This can lead to problems for associative points. As the Spline generation algorithms are very different in the two applications, the shapes of the converted splines will differ somewhat from the originals. During conversion, all elements on all levels are converted, regardless of the visibility of the level in the DGN file. You have the option of using a configuration file. For the text to be positioned correctly, use a monospaced font both in MicroStation and ArchiCAD. Files referenced by the DGN file can be also converted.

122

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Sample Configuration File


#-----------------------------------------------#ArchiCAD <--> MicroStation conversion config file #-----------------------------------------------# Config file syntax: # # Comment # [Section name]: [Layers], [Fonts], [Linestyles], [Pens], [ColorTable] #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Layer name = MicroStation Level number #-----------------------------------------------[Layers] Electrical = 27 Dimensioning = 28 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Pen weight = MicroStation weight number #-----------------------------------------------[Pens] 0.1 = 2 0.5 = 7 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Font name = MicroStation Font index #-----------------------------------------------[Fonts] Courier New Western = 2 Arial New Western = 3 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Linetype Name = MicroStation Linetype index # For Custom defined linestyles you have to give either a negative index, # or the line style's name in MicroStation, or both #-----------------------------------------------[Linestyles] Solid Line = 1 Double = -3 Rail Road

See also Save as MicroStation Design File (.dgn).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

123

Configuration

File Types Saved by ArchiCAD


Use File > Save to save your project. Choosing File > Save as allows you to save the Project under a new name, archive it or save the current windows contents in a variety of file formats. Some of the available options may depend on the set of currently loaded Add-Ons. Some file formats are 2D-only or 3D-only formats.

ArchiCAD Projects (.pln)


ArchiCAD 13 can back-save project files in ArchiCAD 12 format only (among previous ArchiCAD file formats). ArchiCAD supports unicode file names of essentially unlimited length.

Archive (.pla)
For details, see Archive Files.

ArchiCAD Project Template (.tpl)


Choose this option if you want to save the current project settings for future use as a template. For details, see Template Files.

Archive Options
See Archive Files.

Project (.pln) in an earlier ArchiCAD version format


ArchiCAD 13 projects can be saved as projects of ArchiCAD version 12. Important: When saving an ArchiCAD 12 project in an earlier version, an alert will appear warning you that elements and information not supported by ArchiCAD version 12 will be discarded.

Module File; Module File from Clipboard (.mod)


For details, see Create Module.

GDL Script (.gdl)


This option will save your model in GDL script. For details, see GDL Master Window.

PDF (.pdf)
Click Page Options and Document Options to set output preferences. These options will vary depending on the active window from which you are saving. For details, see Save Document in PDF Format.

124

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Windows Enhanced Metafile (.emf)


Click Options to set output preferences.

Windows Metafile (.wmf)


Click Options to set output preferences.

SGI Image (.sgi)


Click Options to set output preferences.

Photoshop Image (.psd)


Click Options to set output preferences.

Windows BMP Image (.bmp)


Click Options to set output preferences.

JPEG Image (.jpg)


Click Options to set output preferences.

PICT Image (.pct)


Click Options to set output preferences.

PNG Image (.png)


Click Options to set output preferences.

TIFF Image (.tif)


Click Options to set output preferences.

Truevision TGA Image (.tga)


Click Options to set output preferences.

JPEG 2000 Image (.jp2) QuickTime Image (.qtif)


Click Options to set output preferences.

DWF File (.dwf)


You can save Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document views in DWF (Drawing Web Format):

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

125

Configuration

Activate the required story or Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window and choose the Save as command in the File menu. Select the DWF file format from the list, click the Save button and choose one of the following options: ASCII - readable and editable ASCII text file. May be rather long. Binary - binary file with a smaller size than the ASCII version. Compressed Binary - smallest, most easily transportable compressed binary file. When you have made your choice, click the OK button to save the DWF file. You can view the saved DWF file with any web browser that supports the DWF Plug-In. You can download a DWF viewer from http://www.autodesk.com/products/. A Java-based public domain viewer - with some limitations - can be found at http://www.cadviewer.com.

DXF/DWG Files (.dxf, .dwg)


For details, see Saving DWG/DXF Files.

MicroStation Design File (.dgn)


The ArchiCAD to MicroStation converter exports 2D views (plan, elevation and section windows) from ArchiCAD into 2D MicroStation format. All elements are exported as drawing primitives (points, lines, arcs, texts, polylines, triangles, and polygons). During the output, you are prompted to designate an optional configuration file (.txt), which controls the layer assignment, font and color conversion. MicroStation is limited to 64 layers. If the ArchiCAD file contains more, then it rolls around. The configuration file can control the correspondence between layers. In the absence of the configuration file, the default order is alphabetical. Pen color conversion can be defined in the configuration file. Otherwise, the Add-On will use the default assignments. You can also define the line type conversion in the configuration file. The specified ArchiCAD line types will be replaced with the MicroStation line style having the given index. The default MicroStation line styles are in the range [0-7]. The configuration file can control the font conversion. If the configuration file is missing, the add-on will default to the international vector font (always present in MicroStation). If you define a Chicago-Chicago translation, make sure that the Chicago TrueType font is loaded into MicroStation (with the Element/Text/View/File/Import command). If it is not loaded, it will revert to the default. If you would like the text to look the same in both files, use monospaced fonts (e.g., Courier) on the plan. Symbol hatches and linetypes are not exported in this version. You can specify the background color for the exported file at the top of the dialog box. The desired output unit can also be changed here. If you loaded the original file from a MicroStation file, then the units specified there will appear. After the DGN file is loaded into MicroStation, you must use the Full View command to see the entire drawing; it will not adjust the scale automatically.

126

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

MicroStation elements: Line Polyline Shape Arc Ellipse Text Complex chain Complex shape Shared Cell Cell Multiline Spline

Saving From a List Window


Basic Element, Component and Zone Lists can be saved as Plain Text, Tabulated Text, HTML tables or PDF. Click either radio button to include the files Used Column only or All Columns in the file. Formatted lists including graphic information can be saved in .rtf (Rich Text Format), ArchiCAD Project format, or PDF.

Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule)


Schedules can be saved in the following formats: Tabbed text, DWF, and PDF. From a PC, with MS Office, you can also save in .doc and .xls formats.

IFC 2x2, 2x3 (.ifc), IFCXML (.ifcxml)


IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/ downloads/

Additional Formats Available When Saving from 3D Window


WaveFront File (.obj)
You can save 3D models and the surface materials used in 3D models of your projects in the WaveFront format, a photorealistic rendering/animation system. Two output files are generated: one for the geometry and one for the surface material definitions, according to the WaveFront standards. The .mat file is automatically created in the same folder that was selected in the Save as dialog box for the .obj file.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

127

Configuration

The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry (.obj file): All surfaces. No edges in the WaveFront format. ArchiCAD surface materials (.mat file): All materials used in the model, identified by name, with full characteristics. After choosing the .obj file format, click Save. The WaveFront dialog box opens: Layers-Materials: Click this radio button to create groups in the WaveFront file for each ArchiCAD layer, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Elements-Materials: Click this radio button to create a group in the WaveFront file for each ArchiCAD construction element, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Set drawing unit to: In this field, you can define the distance in the WaveFront project that will be translated into a drawing unit in ArchiCAD or vice versa. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion.

3D Studio File (.3ds)


With the 3D window in front you can save 3D models of your projects in AutoDesks 3D Studio 3DS photorealistic rendering and animation file format. The resulting document will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces and all edges. Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and the characteristics. Light sources: Both the sun and the additional light sources are included. Sun will be handled as a spotlight very far away from the project. 3D projection: The current perspective settings and Fly Through paths are included. Shadow casting information: The current shadow casting setup in the PhotoRendering Settings/Effects dialog box of ArchiCAD is included. Smooth (welding) information: The smoothing setup in the PhotoRendering Settings/ Effects dialog box of ArchiCAD is included. After choosing the .3ds file format, click Save. The Save 3D as 3D Studio object dialog box opens: Construct 3D Studio objects according to ArchiCAD objects: Click this button to create a 3D Studio file without grouping. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Element types and Materials: Click this button to create a group in the 3D Studio file for each ArchiCAD construction element, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Layers and Materials: Click this button to create groups in the 3D Studio file for each ArchiCAD layer, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Materials: Click this button to create a group in the 3D Studio file for each surface material.

128

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Drawing Unit: In this field, you can define the distance in the ArchiCAD project that will be translated into a drawing unit in 3D Studio. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion. Colors: You can choose either the ArchiCAD pen colors, or match the ArchiCAD colors to a similar 3D Studio color. ArchiCAD texture information: You can select whether to include material texture information in the 3D Studio file. Object = Group Name: You can select whether the objects name should be a generated unique ID or the groups name. Note that 3D Studio works with names up to 10 characters. For names generated by ArchiCAD the convention is the following: Chars 1 to 7: unique ID or clipped layer/material name. Chars 8 to 9: used for a distinctive number to avoid identical names generated by clipping. Up to 100 variations of the same name are allowed this way. Char 10: used for slicing information. 3D Studio can handle up to 65,536 polygons by object. If an object has multiple polygons, ArchiCAD will split the object into several objects and put the segment number into Char 10.

ElectricImage File (.fact)


You can save 3D models of your projects in the FACT format for ElectricImage Animation System (EIAS), a photorealistic rendering/animation system. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces. (No edges in the FACT format.) Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and characteristics. Light sources: Both the sun and the additional light sources are included. 3D projection: The current perspective settings are included. With the 3D window in front, choose File > Save as, or Document > Creative Imaging > Create Fly-Through. The Save 3D FACT Document dialog box will appear: Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Layers: Click this button to create groups in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD layer. Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Elements: Click this button to create a group in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD construction element. Do NOT use this grouping option for large models. EIAS is not very efficient when working with a large number of groups. Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Materials: Click this button to create groups in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD surface material. Color Blend, Super Sample, Self Shadowing: Of the numerous FACT group attributes, these three can be controlled from within ArchiCAD. To learn more about these and other group attributes, see the EIAS documentation. Output Format: You can choose to save your file in either ElectricImage 2.1 or 2.9 format.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

129

Configuration

Set Drawing Unit to: In this field, you can define the distance in the ArchiCAD project that will be translated into a drawing unit in ElectricImage. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion. Note: You do not need to use the Transporter application required for previous versions. ArchiCAD automatically transforms the coordinate system to match the EIAS specification.

VRML File (.vrl)


You can save 3D models of your projects in the VRML format. VRML is an acronym for the Virtual Reality Modeling Language. Using VRML you can build your own three-dimensional virtual worlds and link them together on the World Wide Web. To view VRML worlds, you need a VRML helper application (or plug-in) called VRML browser. Check both your HTML and VRML browsers manual to see how to configure them. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces as IndexedFaceSet elements including surface attributes. Surface materials: All materials used in the project. Texture data is included; texture coordinates will be computed by the VRML browser. Check your browser manual to see what texture image file formats it supports. Light sources: Additional light sources are included. If no additional lights are placed you have to use your VRML browsers default headlight. 3D projection/Animation path: The current perspective settings are included. Set up a 3D view and with the 3D window at the front, choose Save as from the File menu and choose the VRML format, or place any number of cameras on the Floor Plan and choose Create Fly-Through and set the Result to VRML File, then click Save. The Save VRML 3D Document dialog box will appear: Copy textures to destination folder: Check this box to export the material textures used by the ArchiCAD model. Write vertex normals: Check this box to export normal vectors. With these options active, you can export a sophisticated and complex model. If the viewer application does not display the model correctly, try exporting again with one or more checkboxes inactive.

Lightscape File (.lp)


You can save 3D models of your projects in the native file format of Lightscape, a visualization system for generating lighting simulations of three-dimensional models using a radiosity algorithm. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces. Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and characteristics. Textures: Exported surface materials will refer to the appropriate texture according to the current settings of the material dialog. Texture images are not included in the output file: however, the path of the first texture file is included. If all the image files are collected into a 130
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

single ArchiCAD library folder, the visualization system will automatically locate them. Otherwise, you will have to collect and copy these image files into the appropriate folder of the visualization system. Note: Use DOS filename conventions for naming texture image files when working with Lightscape. Before saving the Lightscape model, open the Materials dialog box, check the image names and make the necessary changes. Light sources: All light sources used in the project, except the sun. Shadow casting information is also exported according to the current settings of the PhotoRendering effects dialog box. Projection information: 3D projection data exported as the default view in Lightscape. Only perspective views can be used. If you choose an axonometric view, the saving process will report an error. Set up a 3D perspective view in ArchiCAD, generate the view, then choose File > Save as. In the list, choose the Lightscape document format, and click the Save button. The Save as 3D Lightscape Object dialog box appears: Construct Lightscape objects according to Layers: Click this radio button to create groups for each ArchiCAD layer in the Lightscape file. Materials: Click this radio button to create groups for each ArchiCAD material in the Lightscape file. Decompose elongated triangles: Check this box if you want to decompose elongated triangles into smaller triangles. This will generate a more detailed mesh, which is useful for Lightscapes radiosity algorithm. Note that in the case of very large scenes, it may excessively increase the number of polygons (and the file size).

U3D File (Windows Only)


See 3D Content in PDF (WIN only).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

131

Configuration

File Compression
When saving certain file types from ArchiCAD (.pln, .tpl, .pla, .mod), the Options button in the Save dialog box presents you with the option to Compress file. This option is enabled by default, and is recommended in most cases, since file compression reduces file size considerably (by 60-70%). Using this option also increases download speed if you are working from a slow network, because the files are smaller. However, note that using the Compress file option means increased file saving time (about 30% longer), as a consequence of increased calculation needs. If the saving procedure takes too long, try turning this option off. Note: If you are using a computer with dual processors, file saving time should increase by only 5-10%.

132

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Template Files
A template is a read-only project file with extension tpl. It contains all project preferences settings, placed elements and tool default settings of the project. ArchiCAD 13 is shipped with a default template file together with the default library. Upon installation, the default template is located in the Defaults folder. Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD When you create a new project in ArchiCAD using a template file, this default template is at the top of the pop-up list when you choose a template:

See also Create New Solo Project.

To create a customized template:


1) Open a new empty project file. 2) Edit your project preferences, set up the project structure and/or place elements. 3) Save this project file as a template: use File > Save as, and choose ArchiCAD Project Template (*.tpl) as the file type. These files are saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

133

Configuration

To open a template:
1) Choose the File > New command 2) Select the Use a Template option 3) Select the desired template file. When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled. Note: Settings of the Work Environment Profile used to open your project will override Template file settings.

134

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Backup Files
Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the latest backup copy of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety.

Data Safety Managing Backup Options in Teamwork

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

135

Configuration

Archive Files
Documents saved as Archives are stored together with their Library Parts (in a Library Container File, with extension lcf), and properties contained in and defined with the Project. The Archive format is recommended if you want all files referenced in the Project to be included, as when: Moving a Project to another computer Storing a completed Project

To save a Project in the Archive format:


1) Use the File > Save as command. 2) From the appearing Save dialog box, choose ArchiCAD Archive Project (*.pla) from the Save as type drop-down. 3) Click the Options button to access the Archive Options dialog box to choose which library parts to include in the Archive file.

Include All Drawings: This will include all drawings placed on layouts, even those which are NOT marked as Store Drawing in the Project file in its Drawing Settings dialog box.

Important Notes about Archive Files:


If any Library Parts are missing from your Project at the time you save the Project as an Archive, these missing parts will not be included in the Archive document either. If you add a .pla file to your Linked Libraries folder using Library Manager, make sure you add the explicit .pla file itself, not a folder that contains the .pla. Otherwise the parts located within the .pla will not be read. Because of the larger volume of information it stores, an Archive file size is somewhat larger than the corresponding Project document. Archives store the font information used in the project, but not the fonts themselves. This means that if you wish to display textual information the same way as it appears in the original environment, you have to install the appropriate fonts. Archive files do not store Add-Ons. Therefore, if your project contains elements affected by Add-Ons, these elements may lose certain features or behavior if these Add-Ons are not present.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

136

Configuration

To Open a File in Archive format:


When you open an Archive type document, the Open Archive Project dialog box appears.

Choose one of the three options: Read elements directly from archive: this means that the library parts will not be extracted from the archive file. You can place Objects referring to the elements in the Archive file, but you cannot edit the Library parts themselves (unlike the elements in an .lcf file). This also applies to list schemes used in calculations. This method saves a lot of disk space, but limits the modification possibilities. Extract elements to a new folder: the external library parts required for the project will be extracted from the archive and placed in a new folder that you can name. This solution is recommended if you need to actually work on the project objects. (You cannot extract objects to the Embedded Library.) Select a library: instead of extracting the library parts saved with the project, you can indicate a folder that houses the required elements. This solution is recommended if you wish to update the Projects objects with their latest versions.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

137

Configuration

License Borrowing
If your firm has multiple (network) licenses to use ArchiCAD or other GRAPHISOFT programs, the License Borrowing feature allows individual users to borrow a license key temporarily if they will be going offsite, to enable use of the software even without being connected to the network. License borrowing is available if your firm uses the CodeMeter network protection. To access this feature, ArchiCAD 13 must be running on your machine with a network license. Do one of the following: Click on Help > License Information From the Help > About ArchiCAD Dialog, click on License Information. In the License Information dialog box, the Available Products section lists the relevant installed GRAPHISOFT products, by Product Name and License.

Note: It is possible that you have installed MEP Modeler on your machine without a license key. (This means that you can view MEP elements correctly in ArchiCAD, but you cannot create or modify them.) In this case, the License Information dialog box lists MEP Modeler product as Disabled. You can click Enable Product here to start using a license for MEP Modeler: this way, you will have full access to MEP functions.

Below, the Product Information section displays language version and other license information, including expiration date if you have borrowed a license.

138

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

In any case, borrowing is available only if the selected products License is Network (CodeMeter). Click Borrow to borrow a license for that product.

If the process is successful, the program lets you know that you have borrowed a license for the product, with a particular expiration date. In the License Information dialog box: The selected products License information is listed as either Borrowed (CodeMeter Stick) or Borrowed (License file), depending on the form of protection used. (This can vary by country.) The selected product is now shown with a Return button: click here when you are ready to return the license. The expiration date of the borrowed license is shown in the Product Information section. If your license expires before you return it, the program will automatically return it for you, even if you are not online.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

139

Configuration

Opening Projects through a Network


If the file that you wish to open is already in use by someone else on the local network, ArchiCAD will warn you about this and let you know the name of the user, that is, the name defined in the Sharing Setup Control Panel (MacOS) or as the User Name (Windows).

You have the following choices: Open the file as read-only Open the file with exclusive access Cancel opening the file If you choose to open the file as read-only, you can see and modify the whole file, but you can only save it under a different name or into another location. If you try to overwrite the original file, you will again be notified that it is in use and that you cannot replace it with your modified Project. You can also choose to open the file with exclusive access. However, you should be very careful about using this option. There are a number of reasons why ArchiCAD may state that a file is in use although it actually is not: The person who last used the file did not properly open and close the file in ArchiCAD, e.g., because of a system crash. You have made a copy of a file that was in use at the moment, and the copy of the file also includes the name of the person who was using it during the copying operation. Note: If you do open a file with full access while another person is using it, you will both overwrite each others work without getting any further warning message from ArchiCAD. Therefore, be extremely careful when opening a file with exclusive access in any situation other than the emergencies mentioned above.

140

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Merging Files
Use the File > File Special > Merge command to paste the elements of another ArchiCAD Project, or a Module, DWF/DWG/DXF, PLT or image file into ArchiCAD. Files can be merged into either the current Floor Plan, the currently open Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. Note: When merging a Module into a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, only 2D Elements will be pasted. The elements of the merged files will become independent of each other after being placed. You can place the same elements repeatedly with the Paste command. When merging a Project or Module, you can drag, rotate and mirror it before placing it to the final location. Until the file is placed, its elements will be surrounded by a dashed rectangle. Click within the rectangle to move the elements to the desired position. Click outside the rectangle, or click OK from the context menu (or the Control Box) to place the elements.

Merging and Story Structure


When merging a Project or Module file, ArchiCAD matches the stories of the merged (imported) file to the current (open) one. When you merge a multistory building into your current Floor Plan, ArchiCAD will ask you to define which story from the imported file will match the story you are working on, and it will also suggest a possible match. If you do not have enough stories in your current plan to accommodate all the merged ones, ArchiCAD will automatically create the missing stories. Note: You cannot merge multistory elements or modules into 2D windows other than the Floor Plan. Note: There is a difference between merging a multistory project, and placing a multistory Hotlinked Module. If the host project contains fewer stories than Hotlinked Module you are placing, the module stories which do not fit in the host project will not be placed.

Merging and Attributes


Since attributes (Layers, Materials, Line Types, Fill Types, etc.) are identified by their names, the following rules are observed: If the name of the attribute is the same in the two Projects, the merged (imported) elements will inherit the attributes of the current Project. If the name of an attribute for the merged Project is not present in the current one, this attribute is appended to the current Projects attribute set to accommodate the new names.

Merge DXF/DWG File


If you merge a dxf/dwg file, the Merge DXF-DWG dialog box appears.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

141

Configuration

Merging Image-Type Files


You can merge an image-type file into your ArchiCAD Project. (These include documents created in drawing or painting programs; 3D views and elevations saved in picture format; PhotoRenderings saved only in picture format.) Before choosing Merge for an image-type file, you can define its size on the plan in advance: Choose the Marquee tool and draw a Marquee of the desired size and position. See also Marquee Area.

The merged image will fit into this rectangle.

Note: Be careful to draw the Marquee with the same proportions as the original picture, otherwise the figure will be distorted.

142

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Add-Ons and Goodies


Add-Ons are small applications that extend ArchiCADs core functionality. Many add-ons are integrated as ArchiCAD menu commands. Goodies are other Add-Ons that are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface.

Managing Add-Ons
Open the Add-On Manager using Options > Add-On Manager command.

Use the Add-On Manager to Load Add-Ons from any location. They will be loaded after the next startup of ArchiCAD Permanently remove Add-Ons while ArchiCAD is running Control which Add-Ons should load automatically when ArchiCAD is started Show information about the loaded Add-Ons

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

143

Configuration

Menu Location of Add-On Functions


You can freely customize visibility and the menu and toolbar location of these integrated add-ons in the settings dialogs of Options > Work Environment > Menus/Toolbars. The location of these additional add-ons in the menu structure depends on where the Add-On Anchor Point is located for that menu. You can move this Add-On Anchor Point to any menu location, again using the controls in Options > Work Environment > Menus and Toolbars.

If the Add-On Anchor Point is not part of your customized menu structure, then the additionally loaded Add-Ons will not be displayed in the menu either.

Goodies
Goodies are another source of ArchiCAD Add-Ons. They are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface. To access them, go to ArchiCADs Help menu and choose the Goodies command, from which you can access a web page containing information on available add-ons and how to install them. Once you have installed a Goody into the program, you can then customize the location of the associated menu commands as described above, and manage it with the Add-On Manager.

144

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Working Units
To set working units for the current project, use the dialog box at Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.

If you open a Teamwork project from the server, its Working Units will have default values based on the template used to create the Teamwork project. However, you are free to change these Working Units while you work on the Teamwork project. Your Working Units preferences specific to each user, and are not saved to the server when you Send or Receive changes. For details on each of these controls, see:

Working Units

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

145

Configuration

Project Preferences
The Options > Project Preferences menu contains the Project Preferences tab pages where you set standards and working methods specific to the project you are working on, and which are saved along with the project. Note: Working Units are in a separate dialog box, also opened from the Options > Project Preferences menu. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. In Teamwork, you must have access rights and must reserve the Project Preference dialog box in order to change these preferences. The Project Preferences dialog box contains a pop-up menu at top left listing each preference category (which you can also access directly from Options > Preferences). Clicking the Next and Previous buttons allows you to go from one screen to the other

For details on each of these controls, see:

Dimensions Preferences Calculation Units and Rules Preferences Zones Preferences Construction Elements Preferences Levels and Project North Preferences

146

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Scale
To set the scale of the currently active window, choose the Document > Floor Plan Scale command. (The name of the command varies depending on which window is active.) You can have a separate scale in effect for each window.

Select either a standard scale from the pop-up list or type a nonstandard scale into the input field. The name of the given window is displayed in the caption of the dialog box.

Standard scales are shown according to either metric or US standards, depending on the Length Unit setting made in the Working Units dialog box.

You can also use the Scale pop-up from the Quick Options Palette to reset the scale of the current window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

147

Configuration

After setting a scale, what you see is a preview of the Project if it were printed or plotted at that scale. To make a zoomed view match the view at the currently set scale, choose View > Zoom > Actual Size (or click the zoom button) after setting the scale.

Actual Size is the equivalent of the 100% scale value. The 2D Symbol of some GDL Objects (see the 2D Detail Level parameter) can be set to be sensitive to the current scale: the symbol varies depending on the current scale.

Model Size vs. Paper Size Elements


Model Size elements are rescaled along with the model whenever you change the project scale. Model size elements include all construction elements such as walls, objects, slabs etc. Paper Size elements are printed or displayed on the screen at the size you specify, regardless of the scale selected for the Project. For elements that do not have any real size, such as dimensions and arrowheads, you can specify a fixed size defined in either points or millimeters. Either Model Size or Paper Size: The following elements may be either model size (scaled with the plan) or scaled (scale independent): Text Blocks created with the Text tool: Choose Model or Paper size in Text Tool Settings Dashed and symbol line types: Choose Model or Paper size in Line Types Dialog Box Vectorial, symbol and image fill types: Choose Model or Paper size in Fill Types Dialog Box

Set a Different Scale for Each View


As you save views of your project, the scale is saved along with the view. Naturally, you will vary the scale as your project develops and you save multiple views at different scales for different purposes, using the Scale option in View Settings.

148

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Set a Separate Printing Scale for 2D Document


The Scale options in the Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document dialog boxes allow you to specify a Custom printing scale each time you print or plot your work from a Floor Plan or other 2D window. The Text and Markers options enable you to reduce/enlarge text and markers as the printing scale is changed, or keep them at a fixed (paper) size.

Drawing Scale
Drawings based on an ArchiCAD view have a Drawing Scale. By default, this Drawing Scale is the same as the Original Scale (the scale of the Drawings source view), but you can customize the Drawing Scale in Drawing Settings.

Customizing the Drawing scale has no effect on the scale of objects within the drawing; it is equivalent to a graphical resizing of the Drawing, like the effect of magnifying a document with a copy machine.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

149

Configuration

Attributes
ArchiCAD Attributes are groups of defined settings available to your project. For example, Line Types and Materials are Attributes which you can apply to many project elements as you create them. You will access these attributes in the appropriate dialog boxes: for example, when assigning Wall Settings, you will choose from the projects Fill set and Line Type set, using the appropriate pop-up menus in the Wall Settings dialog box. What you see in these pop-up menus are defined in Options > Element Attributes.

ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Attributes. For most users, these default attribute sets are amply suited to their design needs. If you wish, you can customize Attributes or create new ones. For example, you can draw a new fill type, or customize a default material to give it a new look. Attributes are saved with your project, so if you open the project on a different computer, your customized Attributes are available. To open and (if needed) edit Attribute sets, use the commands from Options > Element Attributes. Each attribute type is described in detail here:

Layers Line Types Fill Types Composite Structures Pens & Colors Materials Zone Categories Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box Profile Manager Dialog Box Attribute Manager Custom Attributes of GDL Objects
150
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Layers
About Layers Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Layers Layer Combinations Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

151

Configuration

About Layers
Layers are used to separate elements logically. Related groups of elements, such as dimensions, furniture, electrical symbols and so on, are placed on common Layers. An element can only belong to a single layer. For each layer, you can define the following settings: lock/unlock show/hide 3D view mode layer intersection group ArchiCAD comes with a predefined set of layers. Each tool has a default Layer assignment, so if you place an element using that tool, the new element is automatically placed on the corresponding layer (e.g. External Wall, Column, Beam). Note: Doors, Windows, Wall Ends and Corner Windows do not have separate layers; they are handled together with the layers of the wall into which they are placed. Cameras do not have layers. Layers can be deleted; in this case, you will delete all the elements on it. However, the ArchiCAD Layer is a special layer that cannot be deleted, hidden or locked, since an ArchiCAD project must always contain at least one layer. In case of a file error, any elements that may have lost their layer definitions will be placed on the ArchiCAD layer. Each ArchiCAD project has a single layer set, managed in the Layer Settings Dialog Box, which is accessible from: Options > Element Attributes > Layer Settings Document > Layers > Layer Settings (shortcut: Ctrl+L) Layer Settings icon in the Info Box of any ArchiCAD tool.

The Quick Layers palette contains shortcuts for changing layer states for multiple layers quickly and easily.

152

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Layers are global, which means that the same layers are available on all stories and in all windows. However, layers used in the Layout book can have different settings than those used in Model views. (The title bar of the Layer Settings dialog box reflects which type of window is active in ArchiCAD - a Model View or the Layout Book.) See Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book.

Use Layers to Lock Elements to Prevent Editing


Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the lock icon to toggle between locked/unlocked status for the selected layer.

If a layer status is locked, then elements on that layer cannot be edited - this is useful if you want to prevent unintended changes.

Use Layers to Show/Hide Elements


Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. To show/hide a layer, toggle the eye icon open or shut for the selected layer. If a layer is in hidden status, elements on that layer are not displayed on your plan.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

153

Configuration

Use Layers to Show 3D Elements in Wireframe Mode

Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the shaded/wireframe icon for the selected layer to toggle between these display mode options for 3D. This setting is independent of the current 3D mode set in the View > 3D View Mode menu.

154

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Quick Layers
The Quick Layers palette lets you quickly change the state of the Layers in your Project without having to open the Layer Settings dialog box. To display this palette, choose the Window > Palettes > Quick Layers command. Select the element(s) whose layers you wish to manage. (You can select elements using both explicit selection and Marquee areas.) The toggle buttons, from left to right:

Show/Hide Toggle: inverts the visibility of all layers. Lock/Unlock Toggle: inverts the state of all protected and unprotected layers. Hide Selections Layer: Hides the layer of the selected elements. Lock Selections Layers: Locks layer of the selected elements. Unlock Selections Layers: Unlocks layer of the selected elements. Hide Others Layers: Hides the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be hidden.) Lock Others Layers: Locks the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be locked.) The Undo Quick Layer Actions command undoes the last Quick Layer action (up to 10 actions). The Redo Quick Layer Actions command redoes the last undone QuickLayer action (up to 10 actions).

Quick Layers Example


Suppose you want to edit this roof in the Floor Plan:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

155

Configuration

You dont need the Section and Elevation markers; to temporarily hide them, select all the Section/Elevation markers...

... then click the Hide Selections Layers command.

Now the unneeded markers and lines are hidden.

Once you are done working on the roof and want to show the hidden layers again, click the Undo Quick Layers button.

All Section and Elevation markers are now shown again.

156

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Layer Combinations
Layer Combinations are named sets of Layer settings. For example, you can set up a Show All, Lock 3D Elements Layer Combination, in which all the layers are visible, yet all Layers assigned to 3D model elements are locked, making those elements uneditable. You might use this Layer Combination when working with 2D only functions, such as dimensioning, to prevent inadvertent modifications to the building elements. Each view can have a different Layer Combination. (Assign a Layer Combination the View Settings Dialog Box.) ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Layer Combinations. Layer Combinations are listed on the left panel of the Layer Settings Dialog Box; individual Layers are listed on the right. The currently active Layer Combination is shown as selected.

Apply a Layer Combination


To apply a Layer Combination to the project, do one of the following: Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Select a Layer Combination from the list in the left panel, then click OK to close the dialog box. Use the Layer Combination pop-up control in the Quick Options Palette.

Go to Document > Layers and click on any of the Layer Combinations listed there. 157

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Create New Layer Combination


To create a new Layer Combination: 1) Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. 2) As needed, set the state (locked/unlocked, shown/hidden, solid/wireframe) of the individual layers, listed on the right. Use the sorting and selection controls to set the state of several layer at the same time. (See Layer Settings Dialog Box for details on these controls.) 3) Click the New button (below the list of Layer Combinations) and give the new set a unique name in the appearing dialog box.

Modify Layer Combination


To modify an existing layer combination: 1) Select the Layer Combination from the list on the left 2) Make the necessary adjustments to individual layers on the right 3) Click the Update button.

158

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Modify Layers Status in Multiple Layer Combinations


By selecting an individual Layer from the Layer list (on the right side of the Layer Settings dialog box), you can modify its state in the various defined Layer Combinations (on the left). For example, below we selected the Foundation Layer on the right. In the left, you can now see the layer states for the Foundation Layer as defined for each Layer Combination.

On the Layer Combination side, you can directly change the Foundation layers state (e.g. from Show to Hide) in any or all Layer Combinations: just go down the list of Layer Combinations one after the other, and click the Foundation Layers status icons as necessary. The Layer Combinations are now redefined accordingly. (You dont have to click Update.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

159

Configuration

Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections


You can work with Layer states to control Wall/Column/Beam intersection display in 2D. To do this, you can vary their Layer Intersection Group numbers. Intersecting elements that belong to the same Layer Intersection Group will be joined to each other, provided they are drawn correctly. Elements on different Layer Intersection Groups will not be joined.

The numbers under the intersection icon in the Layers panel (Document > Layers > Layer Settings) indicate the number of the intersection group the elements on that layer belong to.

Only elements on the same intersection group will connect to each other. By default, every layer is set to Group 1, so all intersecting elements will be joined according to the regular intersection rules for ArchiCAD. You may want to prevent this intersection - for example, to show the details of composite walls that have not been joined. In this case, place the intersecting walls on different layers, and then give one of these a layers a different Layer Intersection Group number. Wall Layers Have Identical Intersection Group Numbers:

Wall Layers Have Different Intersection Group Numbers:

160

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Note on Intersection with Hidden Layer: Elements having identical intersection groups will intersect even if one of the layers is hidden. This may result in missing lines, indicating an intersection with an element on a hidden layer. To avoid this, go to Layer Settings, select one of the layers, and assign it any different intersection group. Exception for Level 0: Elements which are both on intersection group 0 (whether on the same or different layers) will NOT intersect.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

161

Configuration

Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book


While each ArchiCAD project has only one Layer set, the settings of any particular layer (for example its show/hide or locked/unlocked status) can be different in the Layout Book and in Model Views. The settings variation you see in the Layer Settings Dialog Box (either Layout Book or Model Views) depends on which window is active when you open Layer Settings. Both the Layer Settings command and the dialog box are labeled accordingly.

Important: Layer settings for the Layout Book serve to show/hide elements directly placed on layouts, such as lines, texts and drawings as a whole. Layout Book layers do not affect the drawing content, which is determined by the layers of its associated view.

162

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods)
If you wish to simulate AutoCAD work methods, the Active Layer command is an easy way of assigning a single default layer to all tools, instead of than using ArchiCADs default layer set-up. Choose Document > Layers > Layer Extras > Active Layer from the menu and choose the One Active Layer for all Element Types option from the appearing palette.

This will set the default layer of all element types to the layer of the currently active tool (regardless of any selection). All Tool Settings dialog boxes will now use the same default Layer definition and successive elements will all be placed on that layer, regardless of type. You can override this setting manually for selected elements. If you wish to return to the previous layer state, choose the Individually Set Layers option. The last set of manually defined layers will be used.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

163

Configuration

Line Types
Line types are assigned to each ArchiCAD construction element in its own Tool Settings dialog box, depending on the element type. For example, when defining how a Column should be displayed in a 2D window, you will apply different line types for its core outline, for its overhead display and for its crossing symbol.

The line types available in the element Settings dialog boxes are defined and managed as the projects Line Type attributes, in Options > Element Attributes > Line Types. Use the Line Types Dialog Box to modify the standard line types (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) and define customized line types.

164

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Line Weight Display


By default, all lines will be displayed at Hairline width, at one pixel wide. In addition, you can enable Bold Cut Lines (View > On-Screen View Options); this will show all Cut lines as bold (two pixels wide, regardless of the lines true pen weight). All other lines will be shown at Hairline width. The alternative to Hairline weight is display each pens True Line Weight: enable Line True Weight in View > On-Screen View Options. Each lines pen weight (depending on its pen weight value as defined in the Pens and Colors dialog box) will be displayed accurately.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

165

Configuration

Fill Types
ArchiCAD includes a predefined set of default fill patterns, or fill types. You can access them from the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types Dialog Box where you can define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete them. Fill types are assigned to ArchiCAD construction elements in their own Settings dialog boxes. Related topics:

Fill Types Dialog Box Fills

166

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Composite Structures
Walls, Slabs and Roofs can be defined as composite structures. Related topics:

Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab Define a Custom Composite Structure Components of Composite Structures Composite Structures Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

167

Configuration

Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab


1) Select the element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2) In the Floor Plan & Section panel, open the Structure pop-up list, and click on Cut Fills. The Structures Cut Fills pop-up list of Wall, Slab and Roof Settings includes a number of predefined Composite Structures (in addition to the uniform structures).

Note: Composite Structures are defined for specific element types: Wall, Slab, and/or Roof, by the Use With control, in the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box. Therefore, a composite element available from the Walls Structure - Cut Fills pop-up may not be available in the Roof Settings Structure - Cut Fills pop-up. 3) Choose the desired composite structure. This composite structure will be applied to the currently selected or created element.

168

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Define a Custom Composite Structure


Customize any composite structure, or create a new one, using the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

169

Configuration

Components of Composite Structures


The layers of the composite element are called skins; a composite structure can have up to 8 skins. The skins are separated by separator lines; and the outline of the composite is the contour line. All composite elements include structural skins called Core, which play an important role when connecting Walls and Columns. See Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan. The skins you define as Core or Finish will also affect views in Partial Structure Display. Assign these definitions in the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.

Note: A Wall skins Core or Finish status has no relation to its 2D intersection priority (which is set separately in Wall Settings).

170

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Pens & Colors


Each Pen has a specific color and line weight. You assign pens to ArchiCAD elements in their own tool settings dialog box. Note: Your current On-Screen View Options (Bold Cut Lines, True Line Weight) may affect the on-screen display of your lines. To assign a pen to an element, open the pencolor pop-up (in the element settings dialog box or in the Info Box of a selected element) and choose the desired pen for the element or one of its components - such as the cut line pen assigned to the slab in the following image:

The available pens in these pop-ups are derived from the Pen Set currently applied for this project. See Pen Sets.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

171

Configuration

Pen Sets
ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. These are listed and managed Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. You can just use the default pen set, or you can apply a different Pen Set for your project, depending on the purpose of the current output.

Apply a Pen Set Redefine a Pen Set Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions Pens & Colors Dialog Box

172

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Apply a Pen Set


To choose and apply a pen set, use: Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. Both commands open the identical Pens & Colors Dialog Box.

Select a pen set from the Available Pen Set list and click OK. For a quick way to change the pen set of your model view, use the Pen Set pop-up in the Quick Options Palette.

Apply a Separate Pen Set for the Layout Book


You can use a separate pen set for your Model Views and your Layout Book: the name of the dialog box includes either Model Views or Layout Book, depending on which type of window is active.

The Pens & Colors (Layout Book) settings are applied only to items placed onto the Layout (such as Autotext and Master Layout items), but not to the content of placed Drawings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

173

Configuration

Apply a Pen Set to a Drawing


When you place a view onto a Layout, it becomes a Drawing. By default, the Drawing placed in the Layout Book uses its own pen set (the one saved in the source views View Settings - by default, the pen set defined for the projects Model Views). However, you can override this pen set in Drawing Properties Panel of Drawing Settings: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only.

Drawings that have their source in external files - such as DWG/DXF/PDF files placed using ArchiCADs Drawing tool - can be assigned pen sets the same way: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only. Alternatively, you can change the source views pen set: go to its View Settings Dialog Box and choose a different Pen Set from the pop-up:

174

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Redefine a Pen Set


The predefined Pen Sets shipped with ArchiCAD are based on common workflows. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. However, you can use the Pens & Colors Dialog Box to redefine or rename any pen set together with its description redefine any pens line weight or color, using the Edit Color control

Pen numbers remain constant even if you change pen sets. After redefining a color or changing the Pen Set, the ArchiCAD construction elements immediately change to the new colors on the Floor Plan. The 3D window, 3D Document and Section/Elevation/IE/Worksheet windows may require that you rebuild the view.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

175

Configuration

Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project


Pen Sets are attributes, and can be transferred among different ArchiCAD projects using the Pen Sets tab page of the Attribute Manager (Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager). Similarly, each pen set's individual definitions can be copied among projects in the Attribute Manager (Pens and Colors tab page).

176

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views


When the luminance value of a particular background color falls below a threshold value - that is, if your background is sufficiently dark - black pens will be shown as white on your ArchiCAD screen. (This is useful if you use a dark or black background to imitate AutoCAD methods.)

However, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. Non-black pens that would be difficult to see against a particular background will automatically shift to a similar, but more easily visible color. On a white background, elements in white pens are adjusted to a light gray to enhance visibility. Again, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. To disable this automatic color adjustment, uncheck the Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

177

Configuration

Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions


Architects often wish to output the same model in several versions, using different pen colors or pen weights each time to meet different requirements for scale, color or emphasis. To aid users in this effort, ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. This way, you can switch pen sets for the entire project with a single click: you might prefer to use the architectural plans pen set when outputting plans for approval, then switch to the electrical pen set to output layouts for a subcontractor. When you change the pen set of a given project, the pen index numbers assigned to individual elements remain the same, but the colors and line weights associated with those pen indexes may change in accordance with the definitions in the new pen set, and your display and output will get a whole different look. When you assign a pen to an element, you are assigning a pen index number to that element. ArchiCADs default pen indexes assigned to element parameters correspond to the element function. For example, slabs are assigned a default cut line pen with index 29, which corresponds to the function Slabs - Cut Structural. Note: Depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD, your default pen sets and pen index assignments may vary. For more information on pen sets in ArchiCAD, see http://www.archicadwiki.com/Pen_Sets. Since each pen index number has a distinct function definition, it is worth paying attention to the pen function when assigning a pen to an element. (Or you can simply use the default element pens that are shipped with ArchiCAD.) If you assign pen index numbers consistent with the function of the element, then switching from one pen set to the other will ensure a consistent display that is in line with the purpose of your output.

178

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Materials
About Materials Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window Display of Materials in the 3D Document Display of Materials in Renderings Material Settings Dialog Box LightWorks Shader Settings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

179

Configuration

About Materials
To display your plan realistically, you can apply materials to your elements. Materials contain color, texture and light effects. Materials can be displayed in the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/ IE and 3D Document windows, and in PhotoRenderings.

Materials can be created or modified in the Material Settings Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Materials). Materials defined here can then be assigned to elements in their Element settings dialog boxes (Model panel). Some materials have vectorial hatching and/or textures as part of their definition, as indicated by icons. This material, for example, can display either a vectorial hatching or a texture:

Important: Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. Textures are displayed only when using the OpenGL 3D engine. To switch between 3D Engines, use the commands in View > 3D View Mode.

Assign a Vectorial Hatching to a Material


Vectorial Hatching is a vectorial fill pattern used with a Material. In the Material Vectorial Hatching Panel, choose a vectorial hatching from one of the projects defined vectorial fill types. Note: When assigning a 3D Vectorial Hatching in the Materials dialog box, you can access only fills defined as Cover Fills.

180

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Assign a Texture to a Material


Textures are image files that can be assigned to materials to give them a more realistic look and feel. They are displayed in PhotoRenderings, and in the 3D window using the OpenGL 3D engine. By default, many ArchiCAD materials have textures assigned to them (such materials will have a texture icon next to their name.) You can load additional textures from the ArchiCAD library, or load other custom images. Textures are assigned and edited in the Material Texture Panel.

Suggested Workflow for Using Materials


1) Edit the default set of materials and/or create new materials. (This step is optional and recommended for advanced users.) 2) Choose a material for each construction element, using the material pop-up in the Model panel of the elements Settings dialog box. (For Wall Ends, materials are set in the 3D Representation section of the Parameters panel.) 3) In the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, choose a Rendering Engine, then adjust the relevant settings (transparency, effects, background, etc.) to define how the materials will be displayed in the final rendering.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

181

Configuration

Assign a Material to a Construction Element


1) Select a placed element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2) Use the Model panel to access the available materials for the elements top, bottom and side surfaces in the 3D window. 3) Choose the desired materials to apply them to the current element. (Apply a single material to all surfaces using the Chain icon, or apply separate materials, as needed.) Note: Wall geometry and the direction of its reference line affect the assignment of materials to each surface of the Wall. For more information, see Wall Model Panel.

Note: Clicking the Chain icon (Link Materials) in this or other element settings dialog boxes means that the group of materials next to the chain icon are linked: each of the linked surfaces will use a single material; changing the material for one surface will change the material for all surfaces. To set a separate material for each surface, unlink them by clicking the chain again.

182

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window


The 3D Window displays the materials colors, vectorial hatching and applied textures, if any. To display vectorial hatchings, the Vectorial 3D Hatching control in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings must be On. Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. 3D Textures are visible only when using the OpenGL 3D engine, and if the Textures box is checked in OpenGL options as in the image below:

To switch between 3D Engines, use the commands in View > 3D View Mode. You can customize the orientation and origin of textures in 3D views: see Align 3D Texture.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

183

Configuration

Align 3D Texture
Use the commands at Design > Align 3D Texture to set the orientation and origin of construction element textures in 3D views. These commands are only available in the 3D Window on selected construction elements whose Material attribute includes a Texture assignment (Options > Element Attributes > Materials).

Set Texture Origin


Use Set Origin, the first command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to define the origin of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1) Select one or several elements. 2) Enter a 3D location by clicking on an element hotspots, or typing coordinates into the Tracker. In this example, the brick wall texture originally looks like this:

To reset the texture origin to the corner of the wall - so that the brick pattern starts from the corner - select the wall; then use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Origin. Click on the corner and view the result.

The texture origin will affect all of the elements surfaces. You cannot, for example, use a different origin for the inside and outside surfaces of a wall.

184

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Set Texture Direction


Use Set Direction, the second command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to change the orientation of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1) Select one or several elements. 2) Use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Direction. 3) Click on a surface of a selected element. You must click a surface. (Clicking a Wall, Slab or Roof edge will cancel the action.) 4) In the dialog box that opens, choose to either define the textures angle graphically or numerically. Then click OK.

5) If you chose to define the angle graphically, draw the desired vector for the texture orientation. You can snap to element hotspots. 6) If you define the angle numerically, it will be applied relative to the default orientation of the Texture and measured counterclockwise.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

185

Configuration

Reset Texture
To return to the default Texture settings, select the element, open its Settings dialog box and go to the Model panel. The Custom Texture information text is active. Click the Reset Texture button to discard the customization. You can also select several elements and choose the Reset command in the Design > Align 3D Texture hierarchical menu. To remove all customization of the elements of the 3D Window, do not select any of them and choose Reset All.

186

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window


The Section/Elevation/IE window can display an elements materials colors and/or vectorial hatching on the elements uncut portion. To display material colors: 1) Open the Model Display panel of the Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog box. 2) Choose Fill Uncut Surfaces and activate one of these two options. Elements Own Material Colors (Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects, as in the image below.

Elements Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface.

3) Check Vectorial 3D Hatching to display the materials vectorial hatching, if any. Material colors and vectorial hatching can be displayed only on uncut surfaces of elements in the Section/Elevation/IE windows.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

187

Configuration

Display of Materials in the 3D Document


A 3D Document has its own Settings dialog box. Use the 3D Document Model Display Panel to define how materials will be displayed. Unlike for a Section-type window, the 3D Documents Model Display settings enable you to choose materials, element-specific fills and shaded or non-shaded colors to display cut surfaces, for the current 3D Document only.

The Vectorial Hatching in 3D and Transparency options for the 3D Document are specific to the 3D Document, and are not connected to the same options set for the 3D Window.

188

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Display of Materials in Renderings


Different Rendering Engines have different capabilities for displaying materials. Thus, when editing a Material in the Material Settings Dialog Box, some of the available controls may not have any effect on the materials rendered appearance. To streamline the process, choose your intended Rendering Engine as the Preview Engine in the Material Settings dialog box and check the Disable unrelated Controls box.

This way, only those controls will be available in Material Settings that will actually affect the final rendered appearance. If you intend to render with LightWorks, choose the LightWorks Rendering Engine in Material Settings, and check Disable unrelated controls. The LightWorks Shader Settings panel is now the only one you need to edit in Material Settings.

Renderings display all material characteristics except vectorial hatching. The general appearance of your renderings is defined in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, whose settings apply to all materials in the rendering.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

189

Configuration

Attribute Manager
Open the Attribute Manager from Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager. Displaying the dialog box might take some time, since it has to list all the attributes of the project. This dialog box allows you to copy (append, overwrite) attributes (Layers, Layer Combinations, Pens & Colors, Pen Sets, Line Types, Fill Types, Composite Structures, Materials, Profiles, Zone Categories and Cities) between two opened files. It can also duplicate or delete attributes in either of the two files:

On the left, the attributes of the currently opened ArchiCAD file are shown. On the right you can either open a second ArchiCAD file (Project, Archive or Module) or create a new one in a special format that belongs to Attribute Manager. The buttons between the two parts of the dialog box allow you to copy attributes in either direction, and delete, append or overwrite them. Appending an attribute will add it to the list of the other file under a new index. Overwriting an attribute will replace it with another attribute from the other file that has the same index number. On top of the dialog box, the attribute types icons represent tab pages that display one type of attribute at a time. The last tab shows all types of attributes in a single list.

190

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

At the bottom of the dialog box a number of buttons allow you to perform different operations on the files: The Purge Unused button deletes all attributes of the selected type that are not used by any element of the Project. Note: Unused attributes referred to in GDL Scripts of Library Parts are considered unused and will be purged. The Revert button restores the attributes to their previous state. (The Cancel button has the same effect, but also closes the dialog box.) The Apply button applies the changes you have made without closing the dialog box. To sort an attribute list by a particular criterion, click the top of the desired column. For example, you can display pens by line width or cities by latitude. In the row below the list, it is possible to partly edit the attribute selected in the list. Layers: You can modify the visibility and locking state as well as the name of the selected layer. Layer Combinations: You can rename the selected layer combination. Pen Tables: You can copy, delete, append or overwrite pen tables among the selected projects. Pens & Colors: You can modify the color, the RGB components and the line width of the selected pen. Line Types: You can modify the name and the scale factor of the selected line type. Fill Types: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for the various fill categories. Composite Structures: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for different element types. Profiles: You can modify the name of the selected profile as well as its availability for different element types. Materials: You can modify the color, name and texture assignment of the selected material. Zone Categories: You can modify the code, color, name and zone stamp assignment of the selected item. Cities: You can modify the name, latitude and longitude values and time zone settings of the selected location. All: You can display all the attribute types of the current project and sort them by types, numbers and names, or edit the attribute that is selected in the list.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

191

Configuration

Custom Attributes of GDL Objects


Some GDL object scripts include custom attributes. These attributes may be defined either as part of their individual object scripts or defined in the MASTER_GDL script. When you load such objects into a project, their custom attributes are automatically merged into the projects attribute set as follows: If the Attribute definition is contained in the MASTER_GDL script, then once the library containing the MASTER_GDL script is loaded, the attributes are merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes. Attributes with the same names are not replaced. If the Attribute definition is contained in the individual library part scripts, then - Fills and Line types are merged into the ArchiCAD project. - Material and Texture attributes are not merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes.

192

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Libraries
About Libraries Library Manager Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette Library Container File Library Updates Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

193

Configuration

About Libraries
Libraries contain the external or embedded files used by ArchiCAD or referred to by construction elements. View and manage your projects libraries in the Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). When creating a new project, ArchiCAD will load the library contained in the template used for the new project. When opening a project, the projects already added libraries and embedded objects will be listed in the Library Manager. You can use specialized Libraries for different applications (e.g., residential Projects and industrial building design). There are different Libraries corresponding to different national standards. Libraries contain geometric library parts, or Parametric Objects. ArchiCAD is shipped with a standard object library containing hundreds of preconfigured, editable objects (also known as GDL objects or Library parts). For the most part, you will use ArchiCAD tools to place objects from this standard library. In addition to objects, the Library also contains files of different formats that are referred to by ArchiCAD elements: Listing Templates are plain text files that are used to customize the content and the look of quantity calculations. Textures are picture files that can be attached to Materials to provide added realism in rendered views, and in the 3D Window when using the OpenGL engine. Background images are additional picture files used to provide the 3D model with a lifelike environment. Macros, Zone stamps, Property Objects

194

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Library Manager
About Library Manager Add Objects to Embedded Library Manage Embedded Objects Add a Linked Library Add BIM Server Library Remove Library Folder

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

195

Configuration

About Library Manager


Use the File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager command to open this dialog box. This dialog box displays the projects libraries and objects.

The Embedded Library contains all object files that are saved directly into the project. These may be: any object file that you browse for, choose and add to this library, including Web Objects downloaded through GDL Web Control object files you create and save yourself (e.g. Patch, Stair, Custom Object) loaded .txt files that function as macros image files loaded for use as Material textures or other purposes Note: List Schemes (from the Calculation function) will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the Embedded Library. Embedded object files are housed within the project; they are not linked to any outside location. Linked Libraries include the standard ArchiCAD library loaded by default, as well as any other libraries you add. In contrast to the objects of the Embedded Library, these libraries are linked folders, or .lcf or .pla files. BIM Server Libraries are additional linked libraries located on a server. All the files in these libraries are thus available to your project, provided that you are authorized by the BIM Server Manager to access the server. In Teamwork mode, the Linked Libraries category is replaced by BIM Server Libraries; there are no linked libraries. 196

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Add Objects to Embedded Library


From Library Manager:
To add any object file to your Embedded Library, go to Library Manager do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired object file, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) The chosen object file will now appear in the Embedded Library in Library Manager. Click Browse for Embedded Objects from the Add buttons pop-up list.

Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the file into the Embedded Objects folder of Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.

By creating a custom Object:


Most objects created by you (e.g. using Stairmaker, TrussMaker, RoofMaker) will be added to your projects Embedded library automatically: For example, if you create a custom Stair with Stairmaker and click OK to place it, the Save Library Part dialog box appears automatically and prompts you to save the new stair to the Embedded Library:

Similarly, objects saved with the Save Selection as GDL Object will save the resulting files as embedded objects. With custom-created objects drawn by you and saved from the 3D window, you can either save the object to the Embedded library or to a folder of your choice.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

197

Configuration

By loading an object file:


Individual objects not part of the project libraries can be used in your Projects via the Load Other Object commands in the corresponding tool settings dialog boxes (Window, Door, etc.). Such objects are automatically stored as Embedded Objects.

See also Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD.

198

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Manage Embedded Objects


Select any object file from the Embedded Library folder of Library Manager. Use the four icons below to: Duplicate the object. The new object, with a new name and assigned a separate GUID, appears alongside the original object in the Embedded Library folder. Export the object. Browse a folder location on your machine to which to save the object. Add new folder to the Embedded Library folder. Delete the object. Important: Deleting an object from the Embedded Library folder deletes that object file for good; you cannot retrieve it unless you earlier saved it to another location (in that case, you can Add it again to the Embedded Library). Deleting an object from the Embedded Library means that all placed instances of that object file will disappear from your project and be replaced by an orange-colored dot.

The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if an Embedded object is selected, gives you feedback on the file name, the object type and file size. If desired, change the file name by typing into the Name field. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

199

Configuration

Add a Linked Library


To add a linked library to your project, go to Library Manager and do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired library file, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) Click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, to narrow the available files to Library files. Library files include .pla, .ppa, .pca and .lcf, and any folder. Note: If you add a .pla file to your Linked Libraries folder, make sure you add the explicit .pla file itself, not a folder that contains the .pla. Otherwise the parts located within the .pla will not be read. Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the library file into the Linked Libraries folder of Library Manager. The chosen library file or folder will now appear in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if a Linked Library (file or folder) is selected, gives you feedback on items Path and (in case it is a file) its Last Modified date.

200

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Add BIM Server Library


You can access Libraries on BIM Servers even if you are currently working on a solo project. However, you must be authorized by the Server Administrator to gain access to the server and its libraries. Teamwork users must have the appropriate access right in order to add or manage BIM Server libraries. The BIM Server Libraries folder may already list one or more libraries which were added when the Teamwork project was first created. To add an additional library to the BIM Server, click Use BIM Server Library from the Add buttons pop-up list.

The Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box appears. The currently loaded libraries are shown for all available servers by default. To narrow the list of libraries shown here, choose any one server from the server list.

Choose the library you need, then click Add. The chosen library will now appear in the BIM Server Libraries folder of the Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

201

Configuration

Refreshing the Server Library


When you add a library to the BIM Server Libraries folder, a copy of the library will be created on your machine (regardless of whether you are working in solo or Teamwork mode). If you are working in Teamwork mode, this copy is synchronized with the server data every time you Send or Receive changes. If you are working in solo mode, this copy is refreshed every time you click Reload in the Library Manager. Note: The operating system has a limit on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. Consequently, you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM server library, because the library path is too long. For details, see Library Path Too Long. See also Libraries in Teamwork.

202

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Remove Library Folder


Select any Linked Library or BIM Server Library from the Library Manager. Click the Remove button at the center of the Library Manager. You can remove all Linked or BIM Server libraries at once by selecting the top folder name (e.g. Linked Libraries or BIM Server Libraries). If you place objects into the project from a library, and then remove the library, then the placed objects will be listed in the Missing Objects folder of Library Manager, and their location in the project shown by green dots. Removed libraries can be re-linked to your project at any time; then the missing objects will be found.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

203

Configuration

Unavailable Libraries
If you have modified the name of a library folder, or changed its location in the file hierarchy, then the next time you open ArchiCAD, the Library Manager dialog box will be displayed. The library folder is shown as Unavailable. Placed objects from unavailable libraries are listed in the Missing Objects folder; in the project, their location is marked by non-descript green dots.

The solution is to click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, and browse for the library file under its new name or location.

204

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette


Items in the Missing Objects folder of the Library Manager are missing from the project either because they were embedded objects, and have been deleted (you cannot retrieve them, since they no longer exist) or because they were located in libraries that have been deleted from the project or moved to a different location (to retrieve these objects, re-Add these libraries to Library Manager).

Missing Objects are also listed in the Library Loading Report, which appears when you reload the Library Manager, if any items are missing.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

205

Configuration

The Library Loading Report Palette shows you the names of the Library Part files that present problems and the download status of web objects. (To view the palette if it doesnt appear automatically, activate Window > Palettes > Library Loading Report.)

The missing items cannot be displayed on the plan. (The place of missing library parts is indicated by nondescript spots: the place of a deleted Embedded object is an orange dot; the place of an object from a missing linked library is a green dot.) The problem of missing library parts usually occurs when you open the Project on a different computer. To make sure that no files are missing, it is recommended to save Projects in Archive format before moving them to another computer. Another solution - within a single office - is to use a common standard library that is continuously updated on each computer. For more information, see Archive Files.

206

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Library Container File


The extension .lcf identifies a Library Container file. The default ArchiCAD 13 Library is stored in an .lcf, but you can also create your own Library Container file, or extract its contents, using the File > Libraries and Objects > Create/Extract a Container command. Since the Library Container file is a single file, yet contains all the objects used in your project, it lets you keep all the objects used in your projects in one place, while keeping hierarchies intact within the .lcf.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

207

Configuration

Library Updates
GRAPHISOFT updates its standard library parts on a regular basis. To check for the latest library updates, you should enable the Check for Updates option in Options > Work Environment > Network And Update Options. This means you will be notified, upon starting ArchiCAD, if a new library version matching your ArchiCAD language version is available, which you can then choose to download if needed.

208

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts


ArchiCAD uses an internal identifier system to track the evolution (creation, modification, and/or renaming) of each library object. Each object is assigned a Global Unique Identifier (GUID) consisting of two sets of 36 characters each. Every time you load a project containing library parts, the program will search the loaded libraries for an exact match based on the objects GUID. This means that even if two or more library objects of the same name are loaded, if they are actually different objects, ArchiCAD will use the correct one based on its GUID. This way, library parts having identical names but different GUIDs do not conflict. Such objects are listed in the Status Report Dialog as Duplicate Names. Since duplicate names dont cause problems, work on the project can be continued. Library parts having identical GUIDs conflict; these items are actually identical, and are listed under Duplicate Library Parts. To avoid conflicts in the project, you must remove one of the two identical parts from the library. For a more detailed description of how GUID works, see http://www.ArchiCADwiki.com/guid. If you use newer versions of a library, the objects will be matched based on their GUID. Objects placed from libraries of ArchiCAD 7.0 or earlier do not have GUIDs. Consequently, the system will identify library parts based on name only. If the loaded libraries contain two objects with the same name as the placed version, the object to be used will be randomly selected from the two possible locations.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

209

Configuration

Favorites
The Favorites feature allows you to save sets of configured tool settings by name. Load these Favorite settings as the current default for the active tool to recreate a specific element at any time. Favorites are saved with your Project file. A Favorites stored settings include: The elements attributes, including the line type, fill pattern and pen color, as well as surface material choices In the case of Library Parts, the name of the Library Part All of the elements dimensions that can be entered in the settings dialog boxes for the element, e.g., wall thickness and height (but not length) If the Favorites refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, those attributes will be missing. If the Favorites refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project.

Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

210

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Load Favorite Settings as Default


1) Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). The Favorites Palette lists the Favorites for the active tool only, as for the Column tool shown here:

Note: If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. 2) Double-click the Favorite name to load its settings as default tool settings. The Default Settings now shown in the Info Box are those of the Favorite you just loaded. Note: You can opt to exclude certain Favorite parameters from being loaded: see Customize Favorite Parameters.

Favorites Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

211

Configuration

Save Favorite Settings


Save Favorite Settings by using either the Favorites Palette, or the Tool Settings dialog boxes.

Save Favorite Settings using the Favorites Palette:


1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. Use the Info Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. Optionally, place element(s) in the project using these settings. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). Click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.

6) Choose Save Current Default Settings to store these settings as a Favorite. (Alternatively, select the placed element and choose the Save Last Selections command from this pop-up.) 7) Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette.

212

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Save Favorite Settings using the Tool Settings dialog box:


1) Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. 2) Use the Tool Settings Dialog Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. 3) Click the Favorites button, at the top of the Settings dialog box, to open the Apply Favorites dialog box.

4) Click the Save Current Settings as Favorite button. 5) Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette.

Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

213

Configuration

Customize Favorite Parameters


Use the Favorites Preferences dialog box to if you want to ignore certain parameters when loading Favorite Settings. The Favorites Preferences dialog box controls which of the different element types parameters are NOT to be saved with Favorites. 1) Choose Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

2) Use the Parameter Exclusion list (in the bottom half of the dialog box) to check the names of the parameters that you DO NOT want to apply with Favorites.

For example, if you check the Height parameter for Walls in the Parameter Exclusion list, then every time you load a Wall Favorite as the default settings, the saved Height of the Favorite Wall will be disregarded, and the default Wall Height will remain unaffected, even after you load the Favorite Settings.

214

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

215

Configuration

Apply Favorite to Placed Element


To apply Favorite settings to a placed element: 1) Select the element. 2) Open its Settings dialog box. 3) Click the Favorites button to display the Apply Favorites dialog box.

4) Choose the Favorite you need, then click Apply. 5) Click OK to close the Settings dialog box and apply the Favorite settings.

Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Favorites Palette

216

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Favorites Palette
Access this palette from Window > Palettes > Favorites. The Favorites Palette lists the favorites for the active tool only, by default. (If the Arrow or Marquee tool is active, then all favorites are listed.) If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.

Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. Sort Favorites by Name or Type: Click the corresponding caption to sort the list of favorites. To save and manage Favorites, click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.

Delete the selected Favorite (one at a time). Rename the selected Favorite (enter a new name in the appearing Rename Favorite dialog box). Save Current Default Settings: Saves the currently loaded default settings as a Favorite (regardless of the currently selected Favorite in the Favorites Palette). This command is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. Save Last Selection: Stores the settings of the last selected elements current settings as a new Favorite. If nothing is selected, this command is inactive. Redefine with current Default: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the default settings of that tool. This item is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. Redefine with Last Selection: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the settings of the last selected element.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

217

Configuration

Save Favorites: Exports the whole set of Favorites in a separate file. The file will be saved with the *.prf extension. Load Favorites: Load or merge a saved Favorites file. You can either merge it, or replace the current Favorites list.

When merging the two sets, if any Favorites have identical names, you will be prompted to skip or overwrite the original definition. Favorites Preferences. Use this dialog box to define the exclusion of parameters. See Customize Favorite Parameters.

Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Customize Favorite Parameters

218

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

The ArchiCAD User Interface


This section introduces the main customizable palettes and menus in ArchiCAD.

Toolbox Info Box Menus Toolbars Shortcuts Palettes Pet Palettes

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

219

Configuration

Toolbox
The Toolbox shows a variety of tools for selection, 3D construction, 2D drawing and visualization. By default, the Toolbox is divided into Tool Groups -Select, Design, Document and More - to make it easier to locate the tool you need. Besides the standard set of tools, additional tools can appear in the Toolbox depending on the installation and the available Add-Ons.

Display the Toolbox


If the Toolbox is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Toolbox command.

Customizing the Toolbox


Use the Toolbox Customization Dialog Box controls of the Options > Work Environment > Toolbox page to customize the contents and arrangement of your toolbox. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Toolbox context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Toolbox, then click the icon representing the Toolbox customization page.

. Specifically, you can customize your toolbox by organizing the tools into groups. Then store your customized Toolbox settings as part of a Tool Scheme in your Work Environment. (A Tool Scheme includes your work environment settings for the Toolbox, Info Box and Tool Settings dialog boxes.) See Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

How to Open and Close Tool Groups Within the Toolbox


By default, the Toolbox shows all tools in all Tool Groups simultaneously. If the Toolbox becomes too unwieldy, use the open/close arrows at the top of each Tool Group to temporarily open and close these groups as needed. If the open/close arrows are not displayed, go to Options > Work Environment > Toolbox.

220

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Click on Tool Group Options, then uncheck the Always Keep Tool Groups Open option.

Now you will be able to open or close each Tool Group in the Toolbox separately.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

221

Configuration

Info Box
An Info Box is available for each tool in the toolbox. When you activate a tool or select a placed element, its Info Box palette will display current settings for that tool/element. If several elements are selected, the Info Box displays the controls for the last selected element. The Info Box contains a condensed collection of input and parameter controls that are specific to the selected tool/element. While some of these controls are also available in the Tool Settings dialog box, the Info Box is a quicker way to access these controls, because it stays on screen while you work. By default, the Info Box is docked at the top of your workspace in a horizontal position. To show it vertically, dock it at either side of your screen. Let your cursor hover over an Info Box item to provide a Tool Tip if you are not sure what the icon represents.

You can use a scroll-mouse or the scrollbar to scroll through the contents of your Info Box. Selected/Editable: The current Info Box gives you feedback on the number of Selected Elements, as well as how many of those are Editable. Changes made to Info Box settings will affect the Editable elements. On the Floor Plan below, all Walls are selected; four of them have been locked for editing, as reflected in the Info Box:

Default Settings. If there is no selection, the Info Box displays the active tools Default Settings.

Displaying the Info Box


If the Info Box is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Info Box command. The Info Box will show controls specific to the active tool or the selected element.

222

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Customizing the Info Box


You can customize the order and visibility of panels in each Tools Info Box: go to Options > Work Environment and open the Info Box Customization Dialog Box. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Info Box context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Info Box, then click the icon representing the Info Box customization page:

Also available from this Info Box context menu: click a display preference for the Info Box Header location: at the left edge of the palette, or on top.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

223

Configuration

Menus
About Menus Menu Customization Dialog Box

224

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

About Menus
When starting ArchiCAD 13 with default settings, you will load the Standard Profile, which along with other Work Environment settings - defines the default menu structure.

See Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13. However, there are some commands and menus in ArchiCAD 13 which are not displayed as part of this standard profile. Use the settings in the Options > Work Environment > Menus dialog box to customize the content of your menus.

Customizing Menus
Use the Menu Customization Dialog Box dialog box to customize any ArchiCAD menu. Any command or menu can be placed into or removed from any menu; the order of the commands within any menu is entirely customizable. Exception: Context menus are not customizable. You can store your customized menu command settings as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

225

Configuration

Toolbars
About Toolbars Toolbar Customization Dialog Box

226

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

About Toolbars
A toolbar is a collection of commands and/or menus displayed in icon or text form and grouped by topic.

Displaying Toolbars
To display a toolbar, choose its name from Window > Toolbars; or right-click the title bar of any toolbar on screen to display the list of defined toolbars. Click any toolbar in the list to display it.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

227

Configuration

Creating or Customizing Toolbars


Use the Toolbar Customization Dialog Box, accessed from Options > Work Environment > Toolbars, to create a new toolbar, or customize any of the available ones. You can also set whether a given command is represented on a toolbar by its name, its icon, or both. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open any Toolbars context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the Toolbar, then click on Toolbars...:

You can store your customized toolbars as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment. The content of named toolbars are saved as part of a Command Layout Scheme. The on-screen display of toolbars is saved in a Palette Scheme.

228

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Shortcuts
ArchiCAD is shipped with several predefined shortcut schemes. To view or print out a list of the shortcuts of the Work Environment, go to Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts, and click the Show Shortcut List in Browser button at the bottom of the Keyboard Shortcut Preview Panel.

To customize a shortcut command, use the Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts: choose a command from the list on the left, then enter the desired shortcut combination in the field at the right, then click Assign. For details, see Shortcut Customization Dialog Box. Apart from a few non-customizable shortcuts (listed at the bottom of the Show Shortcut list), all shortcuts in any scheme are customizable. Changes to the selected Shortcut scheme are applied when you press OK and close the dialog box. You can store your customized Shortcut settings as part of a Shortcut Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

229

Configuration

Palettes
ArchiCADs palettes help you construct, modify and locate elements. Each palette can be shown or hidden separately using the Window > Palettes command. The main palettes (Toolbox, Info Box, Quick Options and Navigator) can be enabled all at once, using the Window > Palettes > Show Main Palettes Only command. Each of these palettes is described in detail in the ArchiCAD documentation:

Toolbox Info Box Quick Options Palette Navigator Palette Control Box Coordinates Palette
Two of these palettes - the Control Box and Coordinates - may be familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD. They are not displayed by default, because their commands are available from other parts of the interface. To display either of these palettes, go to Window > Palettes and choose the desired palette(s).

Customizing Palette Schemes


To customize your palette scheme (a saved configuration of palettes), set up your palettes manually in the ArchiCAD workspace by doing any or all of the following: Show or hide palettes as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Palettes) Show or hide toolbars as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Toolbars) Change the shape of a palette by choosing a shape option from its context menu. The Info Box, Coordinates Palette and Control Box palettes have shape options - for example, extended or compact - that you can set using the context menu opened by right-clicking the palette on screen.

Change the position and size of a palette by dragging the palettes to a desired position. Dock palettes as needed (Windows only) Use the Palette Schemes Scheme Options page to manage (Store, Rename, Delete, Redefine, Export, Import) and apply Palette Schemes: go to Options > Work Environment > Palette Schemes. 230
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Palette Schemes differ from the rest of the Work Environment schemes: the settings they contain are defined not in the Work Environment dialog box; instead, Palette Schemes settings reflect the way you manually set up your palettes in your workspace. Note: While the show/hide status of a toolbar is saved in a palette scheme, its content is defined as part of a Command Layout Scheme.

Docking Palettes (Windows Only)


Palettes can float over your workspace, and if a floating palette is in the way, you can either close it or drag it away. However, many ArchiCAD palettes can also be docked (in Windows only) at an edge of the workspace. A docked palette is fixed at the edge of your screen, with no workspace underneath it: this way, if you maximize the active window, the entire workspace is visible. A docked palette can be made to float again at any time. To dock a palette, click on its title bar (the drag symbol will appear) and drag it to one side or the top or bottom of the screen until the drag symbol hits either the side or the top/bottom limit.

Release the cursor to dock the palette. Note: When dragging a palette in Windows, its anchor point is the drag symbol (not a palette edge).

How to Un-Dock a Palette


To pop a palette out of its dock and into a free-floating position, just click and drag on its header. Alternatively, double-click the palette; double-click it again to re-dock.

Docking Groups of Palettes


You can dock several palettes at either side of the screen and snap them to each other, forming a palette group. Click and drag to dock the first palette. To insert a second palette above the first, click and drag the second palette onto the title bar of the first. To insert a second palette below the first, click and drag the second palette to the line at the bottom of the first one. You can also place two (or more) palettes side by side, sitting atop a single palette (or vice versa), as part of the same group. If you resize any palette that is part of a palette group, the rest of the palettes in the group will be resized automatically.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

231

Configuration

The width of all palettes in the group are resized simultaneously (by dragging the edge to the right or left).

To set how much of each palette should be visible on screen, drag the splitter bars up or down, for palettes stacked on top of each other, or right/left, for palettes grouped next to each other. (The splitter bars are the lines which divide each palette from the others.)

Limitations on Docking Palettes


Not every palette can be docked to all sides of the screen. The following palettes/dialog boxes cannot be docked: Mark-Up Tools; Selections; Library Loading Report; Pet Palettes; Element Information; Find and Select; Roofmaker; Solid Element Operations; Sign in; Text Formatting; Profile Manager; Quick Layers.

Suspend Docking Function


To suspend the docking function while dragging a palette, press Ctrl (Windows).

Snapping Palettes (MacOS Only)


On a MacOS, you can snap ArchiCAD floating palettes to each other, to the edge of the screen. Palettes will snap to each other if you pull them within a given range of each other. The palette edge (not the cursor) is the docking anchor. If a palette is snapped to the bottom or to the right of another, then both palettes can be dragged as a single object. If a palette is snapped onto the top or to the left of another palette, then they will not stick together when you move them.

Suspend Snapping Function


To suspend the snapping function while dragging a palette, press Cmd (MacOS).

232

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Pet Palettes
A pet palette is a collection of icons (representing commands and relevant options) which pops up during graphical input and editing operations. In some cases, the pet palette appears during input (as when inputting a polyline), but in most cases the pet palette appears after you have placed an element, then selected the element for further editing. To access the pet palette, place your cursor on an editable edge, node, or surface, and left-click. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge, node or surface) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need. Use the shortcuts F and Shift+F (Opt+F) to move to the next/previous icon in the current pet palette.

You cannot customize the contents of a pet palette. You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. The pet palette will either follow your cursor around on screen as you work (like a pet on a leash), or be placed in a preferred spot (and told to stay), depending on which pet palette movement option you specify.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

233

Configuration

To set these preferences, go to Pet Palette Movement at Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes.

You can store these Pet Palette settings as part of a User Preference Scheme in your Work Environment.

234

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Customizing your Work Environment


As you get used to working with ArchiCAD, you will develop personal preferences for using the programs features and arranging the various palettes, toolbars and menus on screen. You will set most of these options using the Options > Work Environment dialog box. For a brief description of every available setting in the Work Environment Dialog Box, see Work Environment Dialog Box.

You can customize any of these settings while you work: just open the Work Environment dialog box, change the setting you need, and press OK. The setting will take effect.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

235

Configuration

Use the splitter bars within each page to display the text as needed.

Work Environment settings are saved not as part of the project, but in a local folder on your computer.

Work Environment Schemes Saving Your Customized Work Environment Profiles How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer

236

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Work Environment Schemes


Work Environment settings (Options > Work Environment) are divided into six self-contained schemes. Each scheme is a thematic collection of settings.

1) User Preference Schemes. These include a wide variety of your preferences for functions such as Guide Line functions, coordinate input, and how certain dialog boxes should appear. 2) Company Standard Schemes. These settings are typically standardized within a firm. See details at: Data Safety Network And Update Options Special Folders See also Creating a Custom Install Package in Getting Started, accessible from ArchiCADs Help menu. 3) Shortcut Schemes For more information, see Shortcuts. 4) Tool Schemes. A tool scheme includes settings for the Toolbox, the Info Box and the Tool Settings dialog boxes. 5) Palette Schemes. These settings are defined outside the Work Environment dialog box; a palette scheme saves the current on-screen status of your Palettes. 6) Command Layout Schemes. Command Layout Schemes include settings for your Toolbars and Menus. Click on the name of the settings you wish to alter (for example, Selection and Element Information).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

237

Configuration

As soon as you make a change to any Work Environment setting, the scheme name at the top of the settings page changes to Custom:

When you finish making changes, press OK to close the dialog box and apply current settings. The latest Custom settings will remain intact even after you close and restart ArchiCAD. However, every new settings change redefines the Custom scheme according to your latest change. If you want to keep your modifications saved on the long term, it is advisable to store the settings of your Custom scheme in a named scheme. For more information, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.

238

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Saving Your Customized Work Environment


If you have customized a number of settings in Options > Work Environment, you may wish to save them for future use in other projects, so that your personalized Work Environment is ready for you when you start to work. Individual settings are organized into six Schemes; saving your settings occurs at the Scheme level. Unlike Project settings, which are saved with the project file, Work Environment Schemes are saved in a local folder on your computer. The Scheme Options screen appears in the Work Environment dialog box if you have selected one of the six scheme sets from the tree structure at the left side of the dialog box. There is one Scheme Options page for each of the six schemes.

You can store any or all of the schemes by name; you can also combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface (Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles), you can export and import Schemes and Profiles: this enables you to transport your favorite settings to other computers, or to keep them after installing a new version of ArchiCAD. See Profiles for more information. It is entirely possible to use ArchiCAD successfully without saving schemes and profiles; you can just adjust settings as you work. However, the option to save settings according to named schemes, and then to combine schemes into profiles, is useful for CAD managers, for offices working in teams, and for individual users who might want to alternate among several different sets of customized settings.

Store a Customized Scheme


To store the settings of a Scheme, choose the scheme set whose settings you want to store, using the left-hand tree structure of the Work Environment Dialog Box. (For example, if you have changed shortcuts and want to save them, click on Shortcut Schemes.) This brings up Scheme Options, where you can store, rename, delete, redefine, export, or import schemes.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

239

Configuration

Apply a Scheme
To apply a stored scheme, choose the desired scheme from the Apply Scheme pop-up at the top of any of Work Environments settings pages.

You can also apply a scheme using the Scheme Options page of Work Environment: choose one of the defined schemes, then either double-click it, or click the Apply Scheme button.

Once you apply the scheme and press OK to close the Work Environment dialog box, your ArchiCAD program will adjust itself to reflect the settings you have stored in that scheme.

Creating an Office-Standard Work Environment


The ability to save and rename any combination of Work Environment Settings can be useful not only for the individual user, but also for encouraging consistency among multiple users on a particular project. CAD managers can create office-standard Work Environment Profiles and install them as defaults when installing the ArchiCAD program at multiple workstations. For more information, see the Getting Started booklet, available from the ArchiCAD Help menu.

240

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

Profiles
If you have customized and saved multiple schemes, you may want to store and apply them together: in this case, combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface, you can export and import Profiles to use on other computers. For details on configuring and applying profiles, see Profile Options. Notes about Profiles: Profiles themselves do not contain settings; they are just a collection of schemes. A profile does not have to contain all six scheme possibilities. Once you start working, you dont have to apply entire profiles at once; you can apply schemes one by one. You can save a Custom scheme as part of a profile, but the Custom scheme will be given a name when the profile is created. Schemes named Custom cannot be exported.

Define and Store a New Profile


To assemble any combination of schemes into a profile, go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page. See Profile Options for details.

Apply a Profile
1) Go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page.

2) From the list of Stored Profiles, choose the desired Profile. Double-click to apply the profile, or click the Apply Schemes of Profile button. 3) Click OK to close the Work Environment dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

241

Configuration

Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13


ArchiCAD 13 is shipped with three default Profiles: Standard, Visualization and Layouting. When you first start ArchiCAD, the default Work Environment Profile is set to Standard. These predefined profiles are designed to get you up and running with ArchiCAD 13. Naturally, you or your office CAD manager can reconfigure these profiles as needed. The Standard profile is designed to reflect the workflow in common architectural practice. Menus, commands, palette layout, and toolbar visibility are optimized to give you easy access to the tools and functions you need to build up your Virtual Building. The Standard toolbar and Mini-Navigator toolbar (for easy switching between windows) are visible, and your Toolbox displays each tool individually. The Layouting Profile places commonly used layouting and publishing commands within reach. The Layout Book menu now appears, the Toolbox is minimized to show only the Documenting tools, and the Navigator/Organizer is located at the left edge of the screen. Two specialized toolbars are now visible: Layouts & Drawings, and Standard for Layouting. The Visualization Profile is useful when you reach the stage of setting up and creating output from 3D images, such as Fly-Throughs and PhotoRenderings. The 3D Visualization menu now appears, so that all commands related to the 3D window, 3D navigation and 3D output are collected in a single menu. The 3D Visualization toolbar provides quick access to many of these same commands. In this profile, the Navigator is not displayed, and the Toolbox displays only Selection and Design tools.

242

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Configuration

How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer


To make your schemes or profiles available to a network or other users, or to transfer them to another computer, you can export them. Use Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles to export and import profiles to/from folders of your choice. In this operation, profiles are .xml files which refer to the schemes (also .xml files) contained within them. For details, see Profile Options. Use Options > Work Environment > Scheme Options to export and import schemes (as .xml files) to/from folders of your choice.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

243

Configuration

244

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Interaction
Navigation Origins Elevation Selection On-Screen Input Aids Editing Elements Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

245

Interaction

Navigation
How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows Zoom Oriented View Fit in Window Pan Navigator Preview (2D) Navigation in the 3D Window Navigator Palette

246

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows


1) The easiest way to switch among the different windows is to use the maps in the Navigator Palette. Just double-click on the item you want to see. 2) The predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar (available from Windows > Toolbars) is another way to quickly switch windows

3) Or use the View > Navigate hierarchical menu.

Navigation Shortcuts
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to navigate among windows: go to Floor Plan Window: F2 go to 3D Window: F3 go to 3D Window (Perspective): Shift+F3 go to 3D Window (Axonometry): Ctrl+F3 go to last Section window: F6 go to last opened Layout: F7

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

247

Interaction

Zoom
In 2D and 3D windows, you can zoom in on details, or use zoom out to display more elements. The Zoom control on the bottom scrollbar gives you feedback on the current zoom.

To return to Actual Size (zoom at 100%), double-click the Zoom button. When you save the current contents of the screen as a view, the current Zoom value is also saved among the View Settings. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) There are several techniques you can use to achieve Zoom effects:

Zoom with Mouse Scroll Button


If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, use it for zooming in on (or out of) the area where the cursor is located. If you dont have a scrolling button on your mouse, you can still emulate its operation: First click the Scroll-Zoom button on the bottom scrollbar.

Then then click anywhere in the window; move the cursor upwards to zoom in, downwards to zoom out. The greater distance you move the cursor, the greater the scope of the zoom. Click again to activate the zoom.

Zoom with Keyboard


You can use numeric keypad shortcuts to achieve the scrolling zoom effect: press the + key for zooming in and the - key for zooming out.

Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons


Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window to activate the corresponding shortcut.

Draw a rectangle around the detail you want to enlarge with the Zoom In cursor. The area enclosed by the rectangle is enlarged to the size of the current window. With Zoom Out, the entire current view is squeezed into the rectangle that you have defined. The operation is optimized so that no distortion will result. To rotate the current view in addition to zooming in/out, click Ctrl + Zoom In or Ctrl + Zoom Out. Draw a rotated rectangle at the desired angle. When you click again to complete the rectangle, the program will not only zoom in/out according to this rectangle, but will also rotate the view to reflect the rectangles rotation angle. See also Oriented View. Note: To double the current magnification or reduction level, double-click the appropriate icon. 248
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Zoom with Menu Commands


Choose View > Zoom > Zoom In or Zoom Out. Note: If these commands are not available in the View menu, you can use Options > Work Environment > Menus to add them. For more information, see Customizing Menus. Zoom to Selection: Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements. Previous/Next Zoom: If you wish to move one step back from your previous Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Home Zoom or Fit in Window operations, you can click its shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window.

Up to 20 previous steps are stored. To go to the next zoom, use the Next Zoom command or shortcut button.

Home Zoom
If you need to return frequently to a part of your project, you can define it as the home zoom by choosing the View > Zoom > Set Home Zoom command. You can return easily to this view by choosing the View > Zoom > Home Zoom command. This home zoom is saved with the project.

Predefined Zooms
Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose one of the predefined zoom values.

The pop-up menu commands allows you to save, access, rename and delete predefined zooms. Home Zooms are not included in the list of saved zooms.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

249

Interaction

Save Zooms
You can save different zooms for future use: Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose Save Current Zoom.

In the appearing dialog box, give the saved zoom a name.

By default, this zoom will be available only for the current story (here, 1. Story). To have this zoom available in all stories, click Across All Stories. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) Custom-saved zooms you name here can be applied to any view, from the Zooming pop-up list in the View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.

250

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Oriented View
Use the Oriented View function to rotate the entire view on your screen to a preferred position. For example, if you are working on the wing of a building that is at an angle to another one, you can orient the view so that the wing you are working on lines up with your screen, rather than at an angle.

Orienting the view does not rotate the project as such; the project coordinates remain unchanged. It just turns the window contents so that they are displayed at a more convenient angle on your monitor. (You get the same effect if you rotate your monitor.)

How to Rotate Window Contents Zoom and Rotate Grids in Oriented View Text in Oriented View Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

251

Interaction

How to Rotate Window Contents


1) Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen.

2) On screen, draw a rotation vector with two clicks.

3) Drag your mouse to rotate the screen contents to the desired angle, or enter a numerical rotation angle into the Tracker. Click a third time to complete.

4) The degree of rotation is shown on the Reset Orientation button at the bottom of your screen, next to the Rotate Orientation control. To reset the rotation degree to zero, click this button.

The pair of arrows in the lower left corner also indicates the rotation.

252

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

In the Navigator Preview, only the frame representing the monitor rotates; the preview itself does not.

Oriented View is available in the Floor Plan, Worksheet, Detail and 3D Document windows. The rotated orientation value is saved as part of the Zoom value of every saved view, and on the published output created from that view.

Zoom and Rotate


To rotate the view and zoom in or out at the same time: 1) Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button from the bottom of your screen. (See also Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons.) 2) Press Ctrl. 3) Using three clicks, draw the zooming rectangle on screen at the desired angle.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

253

Interaction

When you complete the rectangle with the third click, the view will zoom in/out and be rotated simultaneously.

Grids in Oriented View


The on-screen Grid, if it was orthogonal to begin with, remains orthogonal after the rotation. If it was a rotated Grid, that Grid will rotate along with the view, its project coordinates remaining unchanged after the rotation.

Text in Oriented View Text blocks


The way a Text Block behaves in a rotated view is set in Text Tool Settings in the Text Block Formatting Panel (pictured below) or with the corresponding controls in the Text Tool Info Box.

If you place a Text Block at an angle, the Fixed Angle option means that the Text Block will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. The Always Readable option (on by default) means that the program will automatically flip the text to make it legible on screen (as opposed to upside down) regardless of the views orientation. This automatic flip occurs if the text is at an angle between 90 and 270 degrees.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

254

Interaction

Text Labels
The Label Settings Text Panel (for a Text-type Label) also contains the Fixed Angle option:

This means that the Label will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. If Fixed Angle is checked in the Text Label panel, you can also check Optimize Position. This means that ArchiCAD will reposition the Labels arrow if it ends up in an awkward position after the view is rotated: Not optimized Label, after rotation:

Optimized Label, after rotation:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

255

Interaction

Dimension text
Dimension text is automatically adjusted to ensure that it will remain easily legible regardless of the views orientation. (If you set a custom angle for dimension text, however, that angle will prevail.) For dimensions whose text is set to Horizontal in Dimension Tool Settings, the text will remain horizontal with respect to the screen regardless of any rotation of the view.

Fill Area text


Will always be displayed horizontally on screen, regardless of the views orientation. (See Adding Area Text to a Fill.) (If you set a custom angle for fill area text, however, that angle will prevail.)

Text of GDL Objects in Rotated View


GDL Object-type elements may contain text that is affected by a rotated orientation. Many such objects have new parameters. For example, options for Text Orientation on Symbol include: Readable: As the view is rotated, the object text rotates too, but is flipped as necessary to ensure text readability. Align with Symbol: Text rotates together with the symbol, with no other adjustments. Always Horizontal: Text remains fixed in a horizontal position on screen, regardless of the views orientation.

Marker Text in Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet


The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Always Horizontal and Always Vertical values will display text horizontally/vertically on screen, regardless of the views orientation. Align with Section Line will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, and will flip the text if necessary to ensure readability. 256
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Align with Section Line - No Flip will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, without any flip adjustment for readability.

Text of Door/Window Markers


The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Standard: Text is always parallel to the wall, and is automatically readable (that is, flipped if necessary after rotation of the view). Align with Marker Line: Text remains fixed in line with the marker line and is automatically readable. Horizontal/Vertical Width/Height/Sill/Fire Rating/Acoustic Rating texts are automatically readable.

Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position


1) Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen. 2) Move the cursor to the edge of a project element, such as a slab, which you want to rotate to an orthogonal (horizontal or vertical) position on the screen. (The cursor will change to a Mercedes to indicate you have located the edge.) 3) Ctrl+click on the edge. 4) The window contents will rotate so that the clicked edge moves to either at 0 degrees or 90 degrees, whichever is nearer.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

257

Interaction

Fit in Window
You can resize your view to accommodate all elements placed in the project. This provides a good way to check whether you have placed something in the far corners of your window by mistake during numeric input or a multiply operation. Choose the View > Fit in Window command or click the corresponding shortcut button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window.

If the current view has been rotated (see Oriented View), the rotation remains intact. Another shortcut: Double-click the middle mouse button to Fit in Window. If you wish, you can save a windows Fit in Window setting as part of any views View Settings: choose Fit in Window from the Zooming pop-up in the View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.

Listing windows have an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.

258

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Pan
Use the Pan function to scan the project as a whole, usually to see elements that do not currently fit on the screen. Enable the Pan function, then move the cursor to move the view around in the window along with the cursor. With Pan Button: Click the Pan button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window. Click into the active window and pan it by moving the Hand cursor with your mouse. The whole on-screen area will move, while the current zoom level is preserved.

If you have a three-button mouse, you can use it for panning by pressing down the middle button while moving the Hand cursor in the window. With Mouse Scrolling Button: If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, you can use it for panning by pressing the scrolling button continuously while moving the Hand cursor over the window. With the numeric keypad (Windows only): Press the following keys: 4 (left), 2 (downwards), 6 (right), 8 (upwards). (Make sure Numbers Lock is off.) The up/down and left/ right keys achieve the same result. With the Navigator Preview Palette See Navigator Preview (2D).

What to Do if Panning Produces Jumpy Screen Effect


When panning a large and complex project in a 2D window, you may experience fits and starts in model display. To remedy this, try switching among the choices in Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options: Model Display in 2D Navigation.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

259

Interaction

Navigator Preview (2D)


The Navigator Preview Palette makes it easier to locate and zoom in on certain parts of your project, especially when working on larger projects. For details on these controls, see The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls. To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.

For 2D Windows, the Preview Palette displays a miniature copy of the entire contents of the current view. The frame inside the Preview Palette represents the active window at its current zoom. Use this frame to zoom and pan within the Preview Palette; this has the same effect as zooming and panning in the active window, while simultaneously giving you an overview of the entire window contents. If the current zoom of the active window includes a rotated orientation (see Oriented View), the preview shows the project in its original view, but the frame is rotated to match the angle of orientation. (The two heavier arrows of the frame indicate the bottom left corner of the screen.)

When previewing a 2D window in the Navigator Preview, you have the following zooming and panning options: To change the location of the frame, drag its enclosed area with the Hand Cursor (this lets you pan in the active window).

260

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To change the size of the frame, drag its sides or corners (this has the effect of zooming in and out within the active window).

At the bottom of the palette, the plus and minus buttons and a sliding switch are additional zooming techniques: they allow you to zoom the current view in and out. Clicking the buttons increases the zoom level in about 10% increments.

At the bottom right corner, a pop-up menu contains three options for controlling the zooming techniques of the Navigator Preview. The default is Real-time zoom: as you move the cursor, the zoom is adjusted. Auto zoom will adjust the zoom after you finish moving the cursor. Double-click to zoom means you must double-click or press the Go button at top right to execute the chosen zoom.

Use Redraw Preview if you have made changes in the current window that are not yet reflected in the Navigator Preview.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

261

Interaction

Navigation in the 3D Window


Note: For general information on accessing the 3D window, and how to set up Perspective and Axonometric (Parallel) views, see 3D Window. The 3D window can be navigated using most of the basic 2D navigation methods. The keyboard, mouse scroll button, Fit in Window, Pan and command-based Zoom techniques work the same way as in 2D. The 3D window also contains unique navigation possibilities for exploring the model and orbiting around in it. These are described in the following sections.

Accessing 3D Navigation Commands Explore Model (3D Navigation) Orbit (3D Navigation) Navigator Preview (3D) 3Dconnexion Enabler

262

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Accessing 3D Navigation Commands


Special commands for navigating in 3D are displayed in the 3D Visualization and the Simple 3D toolbar, and can be assigned shortcuts. Choose Window > Toolbars > 3D Visualization or Simple 3D to display these toolbars as needed. If the 3D window is active, its bottom scrollbar contains icon shortcuts to 3D Navigation commands.

Note: The 3D Navigation controls familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD can be accessed by choosing Window > Toolbars > Classic 3D Navigation toolbar. The 3D Navigation commands are available only in the 3D Window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

263

Interaction

Explore Model (3D Navigation)


In Perspective views only, you can explore the model either by choosing the View > Explore Model or access the same command from a toolbar, or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.

In Explore mode, use the mouse and the arrow keys of the keyboard for navigation (as when playing a video game on a PC.) When in this mode, you cannot edit the model or use any of the commands. The Fly option and speed slider also appear at the bottom of the screen as long as you are in Explore mode.

To exit Explore mode, click with the left mouse button or use the Esc key. Note: Exploring the model is optimized for the OpenGL engine. When choosing the Explore Model command, an informational dialog box opens to give you a visual prompt on what you can expect from your various actions with the mouse and the keyboard. Note: If you dont need to see this information every time you enter Explore mode, check Do not show this information next time at the bottom of the dialog box. To enable this or any other dialog box you have marked as do not show, use the Enable all informational messages command at Options > Work Environment (bottom of menu).

264

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Rotate camera in Explore mode


Moving the mouse around will rotate the camera in the directions indicated by the arrows next to the camera on the picture above.

Walk forward and backward in Explore mode


Pressing the arrow keys, or the W-A-S-D keys, will walk you forward/backward and laterally in the directions indicated by the arrows in the picture above. Note that the Up arrow brings the model closer to you while the Down arrow moves it further away.

Fly around the model


In Explore mode, click F for Fly mode. Again, use the arrow keys or the W-A-S-D keys to move around, but this time the Fly mode combines the lifting effect with the rotating and lateral movements to simulate a walking movement on a horizontal plane or in space.

Lift the model up and down


Use the PageUp (shortcut: spacebar) and PageDown (shortcut: C) keys to simulate a lifting effect.

Speed Up/Slow Down in Explore Mode


Click the Plus and Minus keys on your numeric keypad to change the speed in which you explore the model. For a temporary speed increase, press Shift, then release it to return to your basic speed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

265

Interaction

Orbit (3D Navigation)


For Orbit mode, choose View > Orbit, or access the same command from a toolbar or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.

Once you enter Orbit mode, press the left button and drag the mouse to turn the model around its centerpoint (axonometry) or target point (perspective). If you are in Orbit mode, you cannot edit the model. Click ESC to exit Orbit mode and return to editing mode.

Temporary Orbit effects while in editing mode


While in editing mode (not in Orbit mode), you can temporarily simulate Orbit mode by pressing Shift together with the mouse scrolling button to orbit the model. Release the keys to stop orbiting. This type of temporary Orbit requires the model to be redrawn and can result in slowed-down navigation.

266

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Preview (3D)


To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.

This palette allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projections, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric) The options of the Navigator Preview depend on whether you are looking at a Perspective or Axonometric view. For Perspective 3D views, edit the camera and target positions directly by clicking them in the Preview window and dragging them to a new location. Note: Make sure that Show from Top is chosen from the pop-up menu in the Previews lower right corner.

In the image below, we turn the building around simply by clicking and dragging the camera represented in the Navigator Preview Window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

267

Interaction

If you choose Show from Side view from the Preview options pop-up, you can easily re-set the camera height relative to the stories of the project: just click in the Navigator Preview and move the camera up or down.

Or you can change the view cone, using the sliding switch or the small icons at its ends, in 5 degree increments For Axonometric (parallel) projections, the 3D Navigator Preview has two pop-up menus at the bottom right. From the left button, choose one of the 12 predefined projections to quickly switch to that view.

(These are the same predefined axonometries available from 3D Projection Settings).

268

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To customize the projection, use the right-side pop-up button, then move the small camera icon inside the Preview window to set up a custom view.

For detailed information, see The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls and 3D Projections.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

269

Interaction

3Dconnexion Enabler
The 3D connexion Enabler is an add-on functionality that allows you to use your 3Dconnexion device for navigating in ArchiCADs 3D window. If you are using a 3Dconnexion device, use one of the two options at View > 3D Navigation Extras > 3Dconnexion: Camera mode: Move the device to navigate in the model by moving the camera position. Object mode: As you move the device, the model is moved accordingly. The camera viewpoint is fixed, while the model moves.

270

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Palette

About the Navigator Palette Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows Project Workflow in the Navigator Organizer Palette Navigator Color Codes Navigator Project Map Navigator View Map Setting up a View Saving a View Modifying View Settings Quick Options Palette
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

271

Interaction

Navigator Layout Book Navigator Publisher External Projects in the Navigator

272

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Navigator Palette


The Navigator Palette (Navigator) is a tree structure that lets you build up the entire logical structure of your project and navigate within it. You can create folders, then copy, drag and drop views and other project items depending on their particular purpose. The Navigator also lets you access views and layouts from external ArchiCAD files and place them into the Layout Book of your current project. Finally, you can configure the outputs for publication using Navigator controls. The Navigator displays the whole projects tree structure in four different maps. The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. The View Map includes all the predefined and custom-created Views of the Project File. The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project. The Publisher Sets map is a tree structure in which you define sets of views for various output purposes (printing, plotting, saving to a local disk or uploading to the internet or an intranet). To switch from one map to another, click among the four buttons at the top of the Navigator. The palettes title bar indicates which map is currently displayed.

The Navigator item currently open in the window is shown in bold. The Navigator has a special double-tree view, called the Organizer, which makes it easier to move items from one map to the other. Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable.

Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls Organizer Palette

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

273

Interaction

How to Display the Navigator


The Navigator is displayed by default.

If it is hidden, choose Window > Palettes > Navigator, or click the Navigator icon from the horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the ArchiCAD screen.

274

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows


Double-click the desired item from any map of the Navigator. By default, ArchiCAD will open the item in existing windows, replacing the previous view in that window. To open a new view in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.

If you would rather open a new window by default each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

275

Interaction

Project Workflow in the Navigator


A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. Viewpoints are listed in the Navigator Project Map of Navigator Palette. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator View Map. The Navigator Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project, and can contain Drawings originating from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. Use the Navigator Publisher to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect, the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout). The following diagram summarizes the project workflow as reflected in the maps of the Navigator:

276

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Organizer Palette
The Organizer is related to the Navigator Palette; it is opened from the Navigator. It houses essentially the same controls, but has a double-tree structure to make it easier to move and copy views and files from one map to the other.

Display Organizer
To display the Organizer, choose Window > Palettes > Organizer, or the Show Organizer command from the Project Chooser at top left of the Navigator.

Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on, you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual, but once you click outside the palette, it will disappear. The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palettes context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette.)

Organizer Modes
Click the desired map icons on both sides of the Organizer to bring up one of the three modes of the Organizer: The Organizers title bar shows the name of the right-side tree structure.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

277

Interaction

View Editor mode (Project Map on the left, View Map on the right): Save views by selecting a viewpoint from the Project Map and clicking Save view , or drag and drop it into the View Map.

Layout Editor mode (Layout Map on the right): Place Drawings onto Layouts in the Layout Book by selecting a view from the Project or View Map (on the left), then clicking Place Drawing, or drag and drop it onto a Layout (on the right). Publisher (Publisher on the Right): To add a view or layout (on the left) to a Publisher set (on the right), select a view or layout and click Add Shortcut. If you select a Subset in the Layout Map, the Add Shortcut button will create a folder in the Publisher Set which corresponds to that Subset: if you change or add items in the original subset, the Publisher Set folder will reflect these changes automatically. However, if you drag and drop a Subset into the Publishing Set, a folder is created, but this folder is not linked to any subsequent modifications to the Subset. Note that the Project Map is available only on the left side. Certain combinations are not possible, and ArchiCAD will always adjust to one of the three possible Organizer modes. (For example, if you choose the Publisher on the right, then the left side will switch from Project Map to View Map, because you cannot place items directly from the Project Map to the Publisher.) It is possible to have the same map open on both sides of the Organizer; this enables you to make copies of items within a single map. When you click any item in the Navigator/Organizer, its preview is displayed in the Navigator Preview palette (if applicable). Double-clicking the item activates the corresponding window.

Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls


278
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Color Codes


A color-coding system makes it easier for you to identify items in the Navigator palette. Items of the Navigator Project Map are colored orange.

Items of the Navigator View Map are colored yellow.

Items of the Navigator Layout Book are colored white.

See also Navigator Icons in the Teamwork Section of ArchiCAD Help.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

279

Interaction

Navigator Project Map


The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. See also Project Map Controls.

. A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. The Project Map Viewpoints are: Stories Sections Elevations Interior Elevations Worksheets Detail Drawings 3D Documents 3D Schedules Project Indexes Lists 280
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Info Help Double-click a viewpoint to open it in the project. Once you save a viewpoints settings, it becomes a view (listed in your View Map) and can then be placed onto a Layout for editing. At the top level of the project map hierarchy, the house icon represents the project and is followed by the project name. (The project gets a name once you save the project file, but if you assign a Project Name in File > Info > Project Info, that is the name that will be shown in the Navigator.) Below, folders store the available viewpoints of the project (one folder named for each type of viewpoint). Project Map folders are a fixed list of item types; you cannot add or delete folders here. You can display the contents of each folder by clicking the plus sign in front of it (in Windows) or the little arrow (in MacOS). In Windows, double-clicking the folder icon or name also opens the folder. The Stories folder contains all the Stories defined for the project. When you first start a new project, your Stories folder contains three items, whose names will vary depending on the local version of ArchiCAD being used. The Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations, Worksheets, Details and 3D Documents folders contain the list of corresponding windows. If there is no plus sign in front of a folder, this means that no such viewpoint has been created yet in the project. See ArchiCAD Model Views for information about each of these viewpoint types. The 3D folder contains five types of elements for the various projection and camera types. By default, two items are present on starting the project: Generic Perspective and Generic Axonometry. When you place Cameras in the Project, their names appear in the 3D folder of the Project Map, grouped under the Path. The Path can be renamed in the Camera/VR Tool Settings, and more Paths can be added. All these additions and changes are updated in the Project Map. Creating a VR Object-type Camera automatically adds its name to the Project Map. All the created VR Object type Cameras are listed one by one. Creating a new VR Scene automatically adds its name to the Project Map. Placed panoramic Cameras names appear below the name of the VR Scene, and more Scenes can be added. All changes are updated in the Project Map. The Schedules folder contains the interactive schedules (Elements and Components) created as part of the project documentation. The Interactive Schedule serves as a basis for ordering doors, windows, and other construction elements from the manufacturers and for checking the consistency of elements based on a set of criteria. The Project Indexes folder contains three sets of table of contents type items. Project indexes include view list indexes, layout sheet indexes and drawing list indexes based on a set of filtering criteria. The Lists folder contains three items: Elements, Components and Zones. When opened, all three show the list of predefined list schemes available for the project. All these items also appear in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. For more information, see Calculation.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

281

Interaction

The Info folder contains two items: Project Notes and Report Window. They represent the corresponding windows also available from the Window menu. If you click an item with the right mouse button, a set of relevant commands appear in a context menu (for example story-related commands for Stories or 3D-related commands for Perspectives).

Double-clicking any of the items of the Project Map activates the corresponding window and shows its contents with its last used zoom and display settings. (These zoom and display settings can be checked in the Quick Options Palette.) Remember, a viewpoints settings change along with edits in the window. When you have set up the viewpoint settings as desired, you can save it as a view. You can make this process automatic - saving Project Map viewpoints as views with specific settings - using the Clone Folder function.

282

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator View Map


With the second button in the Navigator Palette, you will display the Navigator View Map: the list of saved Views available in your project file.

See also View Map Controls. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator Palettes View Map. The Properties section at the bottom of the View Map provides feedback on the settings of the selected view. To modify view settings, select the view and click Settings at the bottom of the View Map to access the View Settings Dialog Box. Views can be created within the active project or imported from other ArchiCAD projects. For more information, see Saving a View. In the View Map, several view folders are predefined; you can rename or delete these, and add new folders as needed. To gain an overview of View Map items or to sort them by criteria, use the Project Indexes function. Even if the project content changes, the settings of your saved views - will remain unchanged unless you expressly modify them. Note: You can create a dynamic connection between project viewpoints and views if you clone a folder.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

283

Interaction

Clone a Folder in the View Map


Cloning a folder means that you recreate a Project Map folder inside the View Map. Consequently, for each new viewpoint you create in the Project Map, a counterpart new view will be created in its cloned folder in the View Map. For example, if you have cloned the Project Maps Stories folder, then the cloned folder in View Map will always show all Stories of the Project, even new ones added after the creation of the clone folder. Moreover, every view in the cloned folder will have identical View Settings - the settings you define when creating the cloned folder.

How to Clone a Folder


Click the Clone Folder at the bottom of the View Map. This opens the Clone a Folder dialog box.

The top of the Clone a Folder dialog box lists all the folders of the Project Map; choose the folder whose clone you want to create in the View Map. 284

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

The rest of the controls are identical to those of the View Settings Dialog Box. The settings you define here will be applied to every view in the cloned folder. Click Clone to create the cloned folder. The resulting cloned folder in the View Map will be identified by a special clone folder icon, rather than a regular folder icon.

Another way to create a clone is to drag the folder from the Project Map to the View Map, using Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Opt+Cmd (MacOS) within the Organizers View Editor. The following two diagrams illustrate the difference between views in regular folders in the View Map (which are not affected by changes in the Project Map structure), and views in cloned folders in the View Map (whose contents change in tandem with changes in the Project Map viewpoints.)

Views in regular View Map folders:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

285

Interaction

Views in Cloned View Map folders:

286

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Setting up a View
To set up a new view, open the project in the appropriate window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/ IE, 3D Document, Detail, Worksheet, 3D, Interactive Schedule, or List) and adjust any or all of its settings as needed. For example, you can change the scale and layer combination to fit your output needs, in one of the following ways: in the active window, using the usual editing commands changing the options of the Quick Options Palette, which always show the settings of the currently active (frontmost) window in the Organizer, using the View Settings and Storing Options at the bottom of the Project Map

View Settings
The View Settings stored with each view are accessible in the View Settings Dialog Box.

Once you save the view, it will store the combination of the following settings: Layer Combinations Scale Partial Structure Display Pen Set Model View Options Combinations Floor Plan Cut Plane See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting).
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

287

Interaction

Dimensions See Dimensioning. Zooming (including the Zoom value, the Pan, and the Oriented View) Image Settings (for 3D Window views): these include 3D projection settings (including zooming), filtered elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D Cutaway and PhotoRendering Settings. Existing selection (3D only)

288

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Saving a View
To save the view, do one of the following: Use the Organizer to drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the View Map. The current settings are saved as view settings. Click the Save Current view button at the bottom of the View Map. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.)

Select the Viewpoint in the Project map, then right-click and execute the Save Current View command. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.) Drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the Layout Book. The current settings are saved as view settings.The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book. Use the Save View and Place on Layout command, available in the active windows context menu, the items context menu in the Navigator/Organizer, and as a command in the Document menu. The current settings are saved as view settings. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

289

Interaction

Modifying View Settings


To change the settings of an already saved view, do one of the following: Open the View Settings Dialog Box and make any changes needed Click Get Current Windows Settings to overwrite the original view settings with the current viewpoint settings (i.e. those of the active window).

If you have opened a saved view from the View Map, and if, while working in the active window, you have changed any of its View Settings, a triangular yellow warning icon will appear at the bottom of the Navigator, next to the changed settings, alerting you that The settings in the frontmost window no longer correspond to the original view settings. For example, the image below indicates that the current windows zoom and layer settings are different than in the saved view.

If you wish, you can save the current window settings as a view: Click Settings to open the View Settings dialog box, then click Get Current Windows Settings.

290

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Quick Options Palette


The Quick Options Palette is displayed by default at the lower right corner of your screen. (You may have to drag the palette to a new position or stretch it to see all six of the Quick Options.) To hide/show this palette, use Windows > Palettes > Quick Options Palette or the corresponding button in the bottom scrollbar of the model window.

The Quick Options Palette displays the current settings of the active (frontmost) window. The current window settings as reflected in Quick Options are the currently effective project settings, but they have not necessarily been saved as part of any view; they merely provide feedback on what you are currently seeing in the active window, and offer a quick way to apply changes among these settings.

. Use these six sets of pop-up controls as a quick way to change the settings of the project or of the currently active (frontmost) window: Layer Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Layer Combination to the whole project. See Layer Combinations. Scale: Changing this setting applies a new scale to the currently active window. See Scale. Partial Structure Display: Changing this setting applies a new Partial Structure Setting to the currently active window. Pen Set: Changing this setting applies a new pen set to the model. (Not available in the Layout window.) See Pens & Colors. Model View Options Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Model View Options Combination to the whole project. See Model View Options Combinations. Dimensions: Changing this setting applies a new Dimensioning standard to the whole project. (Not available in the 3D window) See Dimensions Preferences.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

291

Interaction

Navigator Layout Book


The Layout Book is a tree view of the Layouts defined for the entire project, plus the Drawings on the Layouts. Drawings in the Layout Book can originate from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. You can view the Layout Book in two formats: Tree by Subset or Tree by Master. Click the popup button above the tree to choose a format.

Tree by Subset (the default display) lists layouts according to the Subsets you have created - a freely defined logic. (The primary function of Subsets is to enable you to assign a customized numbering system. ) Tree by Master lists the Layouts in categories according to their Master Layouts. At the bottom of the Layout Book, the Properties section displays the settings of the current Layout, some of which are editable directly. See also The Layout Book and Layout Book Controls. To access the Layout Settings of the selected Layout, or the Drawing Settings of the selected Drawing, click the Settings button at the bottom of the Layout Book. Drawings are accompanied by icons that correspond to their file type. Views imported from ArchiCAD project files retain their icons (for example, floor plan or detail) but are shown in white.

292

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Navigator Publisher
Use this map of the Navigator/Organizer to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Access the Publisher in one of these locations: the Navigator Palette the Organizer Palette the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command.

Publisher Function Publisher Controls

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

293

Interaction

External Projects in the Navigator


By default, the Navigator and the left side of the Organizer display the tree structure of the active ArchiCAD project which you are working on. You may wish to place views or Layouts from another ArchiCAD project into the Layout Book of your active project. To do this, you will use the Project Chooser , accessed by clicking the icon at the top left corner of the Navigator or Organizer.

To place Layouts or views from an external ArchiCAD projects onto a Layout of the active project, do the following: Open the Organizer of the active project. Click the Browse Project or Browse Teamwork Project command in the Project Chooser.

Choose an ArchiCAD project whose content you want to use in the active project. Note: If you choose Browse Teamwork Project, you will be prompted to choose a server on which the Teamwork Project is found. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) Click Open. The external project is now displayed on the left side in the Organizer tree structure, and the active projects Layout Book on the right:

294

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

The external project name is now also listed in the Project Chooser. (If this project is also open, it is shown as Running.)

Drag the desired item into the Layout Book of the active project, shown on the right side of the Organizer. Once your active projects Layout Book contains views/layouts from an external project, the Project Chooser will list this project as linked. Note: You can access external projects the same way by using the Project Chooser with just the Navigator open (without the Organizer). In this case, once you have browsed the desired external project and see its tree structure, add any of its views or layouts to the active project by dragging and dropping it directly onto the Layout in the active window. To open the external project in a separate ArchiCAD, double-click any of its items in the Navigator.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

295

Interaction

Origins
About Origins in ArchiCAD Create a User Origin User Origin in the 3D Window

296

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About Origins in ArchiCAD


In ArchiCAD, as in any coordinate system, all measurements are made in reference to an origin. The location of the origin is always interpreted as (0, 0). ArchiCAD defines three coordinate system origins:

Project Origin
1) The Project Origin is a constant location which remains fixed for the life of your Project. The Project Origin of the coordinate system, marked with an X, is close to the lower left corner of the Floor Plan window, when using the default view of the default template. (The Coordinates Palette shows the coordinates as (0, 0).

User Origin
2) The User Origin is created manually by the user to act as a temporary aid to drafting and measurements. By default, the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. However, the User Origin can be moved to any location, allowing you to reset the zero point to any location. This is often helpful when you need to draw elements with respect to existing walls, slabs or other components. For details, see Create a User Origin.

Edit Origin
3) The Edit Origin is also temporary; it appears only during drafting and editing operations and is used to display the distance and angle of a rubberband line from the starting point of a drawing operation. In Floor Plan and other 2D views, the origin is always marked by a bold X. In 3D Views, the origins and their X, Y and Z axes are displayed with bold black lines. The lines are 1 meter (approx. 3 ft.) long.

Note: When a User or Edit Origin appears, the Project Origin remains visible in the same color as the construction grid.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

297

Interaction

Create a User Origin


There are two ways to create a User Origin: At any construction node by using the keyboard. Hold down both the Alt and Shift keys (MacOS: Opt + Shift) and move the cursor to the construction node where you want the origin located.

At any location by using the User Origin button from the Standard toolbar (or the Coordinates palette, if it is displayed). This method allows you to move the origin where nothing is currently drawn.

Click the User Origin button, then click at any point in the window. The origin is instantly relocated there. To return the User Origin to the Project Origin, double-click the User Origin button in the Standard Toolbar.

298

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

User Origin in the 3D Window


When placing a new element in the 3D window, its elevation is measured from the User Origin. Use the Tool Settings dialog box to enter the desired elevation (or Base Height, in the case of a Wall) for placement.

To redefine the User Origins elevation in 3D: Activate the User Origin button (Standard toolbar) Then click on an element surface (this is only possible in Hidden Line or Shading mode). Creating the User Origin in blank space places it without changing its elevation. Note: If you are using Gravity, a newly placed element will gravitate onto the Roof/Slab/ Mesh below it - and it will be placed at that elevation.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

299

Interaction

Elevation
About Elevation of Elements Elevation Values in the Tracker Reference Levels

300

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About Elevation of Elements


ArchiCAD offers several ways to determine the elevation of elements and to set the height at which new elements should be created. When placing a new element in a 2D model window, its elevation value can be set in the Tool Settings dialog box or the Info Box. This elevation can be measured in several ways: from the level of the current story (Story 0, in the image below):

from the elements Home Story. See Set Home Story. When placing a new element in the 3D window, its elevation, defined in the Tool Settings dialog box, can be measured either from the Home Story, or from the User Origin.

. For more information, see User Origin in the 3D Window. You can reset the User Origin to any elevation, then place a new element whose elevation is measured from this level. Note: The elevation of wall openings is strictly determined by the current values in the Door/ Window Tool Settings dialog boxes.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

301

Interaction

Elevation Values in the Tracker


During input, refer to the Trackers Z field to check the elevation of the newly created element. You must activate Show Z in Tracker from the Trackers drop-down menu in the Standard toolbar. (This command is available during editing/input.).

If you are inputting a Wall, Column, Beam or Object using the Gravity function, the Z value will reflect the elevation of the underlying Slab/Roof/Mesh. If you switch the Show Tracker control to Always in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input, then the Trackers Z field will display elevation values even if input is not yet underway; just move the cursor to get feedback. The Tracker can display elevation values in one of three different forms depending on your choice: from the Project Zero from the current Story (or in 3D, the User Origin) or one of the two optional Reference Levels defined in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. To determine which reference level the Trackers elevation (Z) feedback should use: 1) Open the drop-down menu of the Tracker icon from the Standard toolbar. 2) Go to the Elevation Value Origin sub-menu.

3) Choose the desired reference level.

Elevating Elements Set Home Story by Elevation

302

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Reference Levels
You can define optional Reference Levels that will help you position elements when using the Tracker. (See Elevation Values in the Tracker.) Define Reference Levels at: Levels and Project North Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

303

Interaction

Selection
Selecting Elements Selection Feedback Element Information Highlight Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) The Intelligent Cursor Deselecting Elements Find and Select Elements Edit Selection Set Store and Access Selection Sets Marquee Area

304

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Selecting Elements
With the Arrow tool active: Point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. With any other tool active: Press Shift, then point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. For more information on cursor shapes, see The Intelligent Cursor.

Select All Elements (in Window or in Marquee)


To select all elements on screen (either in the entire window or inside a previously defined Marquee area) with the Arrow or Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All command. Note: Select All will only select elements on the currently displayed story.

Select All Elements of a Single Type


To select all elements of a single type (for example, all Walls, or all Windows), activate the corresponding tool, then use the Ctrl+A shortcut. To learn about additional Arrow tool selection options, see Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon. To learn how to highlight an element before selecting it, see Element Information Highlight.

Select Elements Based on Multiple Criteria


Use the Find and Select Elements function to select elements defined by a wide variety of criteria.

Add/Remove Elements to/from Selection


You can add elements to the selection by shift-clicking them. Shift-clicking an already selected element will deselect it.

Quick Selection of Surface Areas Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon Selection of Overlapping Elements

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

305

Interaction

Quick Selection of Surface Areas


Quick Selection is the easiest way to select single elements which have a surface area (such as slabs and roofs). To activate Quick Selection as the default working mode, turn on the Quick Selection icon in the Arrow tools Info Box.

Now, to use Quick Selection, either the Arrow tool must be active, or you must press the Shift key. Move the cursor over any surface of the element you want to select. You will note that every time the cursor hovers over a selectable element, it will change shape. Click to select.

As shown in this image, you need only move the cursor over any part of the roof area; (if the Arrow tool is not active, press Shift to change to the Quick Select cursor), and click to select the roof.

Quick Selection works on all construction and text elements, fills and objects. To temporarily suspend the Quick Selection method while the icon is activated, press the Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active, or Shift-spacebar if any other tool is active. Quick Selection is active by default, but it can be deactivated in the Arrow tools Info Box by releasing the button. To use Quick Selection on a temporary basis (while the Quick Selection icon is deactivated in the Arrow Tools Info Box), press Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active (or Shift+Spacebar with any other Tool).

Click and Drag with Quick Selection


With the Arrow Tool and Quick Selection active, you can drag any element by clicking on it and holding down the button while you drag it, without having to use the Drag command. (With any other tool active, press Shift, then click and drag.) Note: All selected elements will be dragged simultaneously.

306

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/ Polygon


A useful method for selecting multiple elements is by drawing a selection polygon or rectangle around the items. These will be explicitly selected items, displaying selection dots. To use this method, activate the Arrow tool and a geometry method for the selection rectangle/polygon. Note: To select an area instead of explicitly selecting elements, use the Marquee tool as detailed at Marquee Area. Click on the screen and draw the selection rectangle/polygon.

This will select all the elements inside the area and deselect all other currently selected elements. If you keep the Shift key pressed, enclosed elements will be added to the selection while already selected ones will be subtracted from it. If you want to use a selection rectangle or polygon within a quick-selectable area, press the spacebar to temporarily suspend Quick Selection, then draw the selection polygon - keeping the spacebar pressed.

Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon


The Arrow tools Info Box offers a number of selection methods when using a rectangular or polygonal shape.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

307

Interaction

With the first (default) Selection Method any element that has at least one of its nodes, edges or curves in the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected.

With the second method, only elements that are entirely within the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected.

Area Shape Options for Selection Rectangle/Polygon


In the Arrow tools Info Box, you can choose among three selection area shapes. The options are Polygonal, Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular.

Double-clicking while drawing the polygon automatically closes it if at least two segments have already been defined manually. The double-clicked point becomes the last apex of the polygon.

308

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection of Overlapping Elements


When the nodes of several elements overlap at a single point, the Element Information Highlight indicates which element will be selected, and the Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) shows its type and main properties. Note: The element information highlight pops up if the cursor is over any element (with Arrow Tool active). If any other tool is active, press Shift to see the element information highlight. To cycle the highlight among multiple elements which overlap or join, press Tab until the desired target element is highlighted. When you are satisfied that the appropriate element will be selected, click with the cursor.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

309

Interaction

Selection Feedback
Selection Dots Selection Highlight

310

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection Dots
Explicitly selected elements display selection dots (or reference points). Selection dots represent the points of the element by which you can modify the element. Note: Elements selected by Marquee Area do not display selection dots. The location of the selection dots depends on the type and the geometry of the element.

In the case of GDL Object type elements, the number of selection dots depends on the number of hotspots defined in the object.

Selection Dot Variations


Single elements have small solid selection dots which are black by default.

To change the color of selection dots, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

311

Interaction

Editable selection dots are diamond-shaped and appear on objects whose parameters can be edited using an on-screen parameter palette.

For more information, see Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots. Grouped elements display larger circles, whose color is automatically assigned.

Elements that belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF are shown with hollow squares, whose color is automatically defined.

Locked elements selection dots appear in faded form.

Elements are locked (and display locked selection dots) in four cases: The element is placed on a locked Layer. The element has been explicitly locked with the Edit > Locking > Lock command. The elements belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF. In all cases, locked elements can be selected, but they cannot be edited. (You will be informed of this if you try to edit a locked element.) You can open the settings dialog boxes of these elements, but you cannot edit their parameters.

312

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Selection Highlight
Selected elements will be shown with a distinguishing highlight, in addition to selection dots. Selection highlight color (for both element surfaces and their contours) are configurable in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information, or you can turn off selection highlights altogether.

Even if you leave the Selection Highlight function on, you may want to disable it temporarily - for example, if you want to see the actual display colors of lines and fills. To suspend Selection highlight, use the Ctrl/Alt + spacebar shortcut. Note: Surface highlights in 3D are available only when using the OpenGL 3D engine.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

313

Interaction

Element Information Highlight


ArchiCAD helps you identify elements by highlighting them before you select them (also known as element detection). Just place the cursor on an element node or edge, then press Shift. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the highlight appears on its own, without your having to press Shift.

When working in 3D, you will notice that the informational highlight acts on the entire outline of the element, that is, even hidden lines of its contour are shown. Grouped elements are highlighted individually. Element information highlights can be configured, or even turned off entirely, in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information dialog box. Element Information highlights also work when clicking to dimension an element, and with the Parameter transfer functions (Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands): the information highlight appears along with the eyedropper/syringe cursors right before you complete the parameter transfer. You do not need to press Shift to see the element detection highlight with Parameter Transfer. Note: These highlights (identifying related elements for Parameter Transfer and Dimensioning functions) will appear if the Highlight contours of related element(s) checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. For these highlights, you need not press Shift.

314

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags)


If you move the cursor over an element and press Shift, an element information pop-up appears. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the element information pop-up appears on its own (along with the highlight), without your having to press Shift. The Element Information Pop-up displays the following information:

The elements type The elements basic properties (structural fill for Walls, name for Objects, thickness for Slabs, type for Lines, and so on) The elements elevation (for 3D shapes only) The elements Layer In 3D and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Story the element belongs to. In Teamwork, the reservation status of the element (e.g., Editable, Free for Reservation, Reserved by). Some additional information is displayed in the bottom section of the pop-up: If more than one element has a selectable part at the given location (node, edge, or surface if Quick Selection is active), the caption Multiple Elements (TAB) is shown in the Info Tag to inform you that you can cycle through selected and selectable elements by hitting the TAB key as many times as needed. See also Selection of Overlapping Elements. If the element is selected, the mention (Selected) appears in brackets. Element information highlights, including the time interval before it appears on screen, can be configured in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

315

Interaction

The Intelligent Cursor


The following section describes the various shapes of the intelligent cursor in different locations and situations in the project. The ArchiCAD cursor takes on the following shapes when drafting or editing elements, with any tool except the Arrow tool active: Crosshair in an empty area in the window.

Heavy Checkmark at a wall node on its reference line or a beam node at its reference axis.

Light Checkmark at any other node/hotspot of any element.

Heavy Mercedes on the reference line of a wall or the reference axis of a beam.

Light Mercedes at any other edge of any element.

Intersection at an intersection of edges.

316

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

When you click to start drawing an element whose definition requires more than a single spot, the cursors shape changes to an empty pencil. It then changes its shape again depending on whether it encounters other elements. The possibilities are as follows: White pencil in an empty space or over any element where there is no hotspot or edge

Striped pencil with black top at a walls reference line or a beams reference axis.

Striped pencil at any other edge.

Filled pencil at a node on a walls reference line or on a beams reference axis.

Filled pencil with white top at any other node or hotspot.

Pencil point with intersection at an intersection of edges.

Pencil point with perpendicular sign at a perpendicular edge.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

317

Interaction

Pencil point with tangent sign at a tangential edge.

When using the Arrow tool, the following shapes are available: Arrow at empty area in the window.

Quick Selection (Magnet) appears whenever you move the cursor onto a quick-selectable item.

318

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Arrow with Heavy Checkmark snaps to nodes on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Light Checkmark snaps to Hotspots and nodes other than the ones on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Heavy Mercedes snaps to reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Light Mercedes snaps to edges other than reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.

Arrow with Intersection snaps to an intersection of edges.

Arrow with Perpendicular sign snaps perpendicularly to an edge or arc while dragging an element

Arrow with Tangent sign snaps tangentially to an arc while dragging an element.

Some cursor shapes only appear in special situations: Cloud indicates empty space over the horizon in perspective views.

Magic Wand used for tracing the contours of existing elements for creating new elements with the active tool. It has three different shapes for identifying nodes, edges and empty space (including surfaces).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

319

Interaction

Scissors trims elements (hold down the Ctrl/Cmd key while clicking on an element). The Black Scissors appear on top of element edges, while the White Scissors indicate empty space.

Eyeball defines the direction of Roofs slope, the side that remains selected when splitting elements, the depth of Limited Sections and the orientation of Doors/Windows. It is also used to set the position of curved walls and Curtain Walls placed with the tangential method, when more than one placement possibility exists.

Double Eyeball locates position of edge-placed Door/Window.

Sun appears during Curtain Wall input to define the outside part of the Curtain Wall.

Eyedropper appears when picking up parameters from an element as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.

The Eyedropper is: Full, when snapping to a Reference Line or axis node;

Half full, when snapping to Hotspots, general nodes or selectable area;

Part full, part striped when snapping to a reference line;

Striped, on top of a normal edge;

Empty, when the cursor is in an empty workspace area (visual feedback only).

320

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Syringe appears when transferring parameters of one element to another as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.

Plus when dragging, rotating or mirroring a copy of an element.

Double-Plus when dragging or rotating multiple copies of an element.

Fill Handle prompts you to draw a vector orientation after a fill is placed.

Hammer places Dimension chains, Angular Dimensions, the Elevation Dimension array, Zone Stamps and Fill areas; it also appears when closing polygons.

Trident moves Marquee area or the Clipboard contents after pasting.

During a dimensioning operation: Magnet plus dimension-line icon: In a 3D Document, after clicking the points to be dimensioned, this cursor allows you to choose the plane in which to dimension the clicked elements.

Mercedes plus parallel dimension icon: During a linear dimensioning operation using Any Direction, allows you to choose a line or edge. The dimension will be created parallel to this clicked line/edge.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

321

Interaction

Deselecting Elements
To deselect one or more selected elements, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with any tool (including the Arrow) on an empty part of the project to deselect all the selected elements at once. Click a selected element while holding down the Shift key. With the Arrow tool active, hold down the Shift key, and click or draw a selection rectangle around the elements you want to deselect.

322

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Find and Select Elements


Use the Find & Select Palette to select and deselect elements based on defined criteria. Open this palette from Edit > Find & Select; or click the Find & Select shortcut from the Standard Toolbar:

The Find & Select palette can remain open as long as you wish on top of all windows. Elements will be selected on the visible layers of the currently active window. The Selected and Editable values at bottom left give you feedback on the currently selected elements in the project. To find and select elements by criteria, follow these steps: 1) In the Criteria list, the first line is always Element Type, since the Find & Select function finds only elements.

2) Select this first line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose a value for this criterion from the pop-up (that is, the element type you want to find).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

323

Interaction

3) Click Add to define additional elements (such as Columns) to search for simultaneously.

4) Click the Plus button to find and select all elements that fit your defined criteria. Note: The two Criteria (Element is Wall, Element is Column) are joined as an or statement, so that when you click the Plus sign, ArchiCAD will Find and Select every element that is either a Wall or a Column.

Add Additional Criteria


To narrow the scope of your search, add more criteria. 1) Click the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.

2) Select the new line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose the desired value from the pop-up.

3) Click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. Note: Different criteria types (e.g. Element Type, Layer) are joined to each other by and statements.

324

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Deselect Elements
Click the Minus button to deselect all the elements that fit the current criteria in the Find & Select Palette.

Use Predefined Criteria Sets


The Find & Select Palette (Edit > Find & Select) has several built-in Criteria Sets.

If you choose one of these, you dont have to define any criteria yourself. Just choose the desired Criteria Set from the Criteria Set Name pop-up list, then click the Plus button. Predefined Criteria Sets cannot be modified.

Define and Store Your Own Criteria Sets


In many cases, you will define simple Find & Select criteria for one-time use. However, it is possible to store these criteria sets for later use, if you will need to select the same set of elements repeatedly, or in other projects. Note: Your stored Criteria Sets can be made available in Teamwork projects, both to Find & Select elements and to reserve elements by criteria. (See Define Reservation Criteria in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) To store a Criteria Set: 1) Set up the criteria as desired. The Criteria Set name is now Custom. 2) Next to the Criteria Set Name field, click the pop-up button to access the relevant commands. Click Store as.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

325

Interaction

3) In the appearing dialog box, give a name to the Criteria Set and click Store.

Your customized Criteria Sets are now stored in the Criteria Set pop-up, under My Criteria Sets.

Use the commands from the pop-up to manage your Criteria Sets: Rename, Delete, Export or Import them (as .xml files).

Pick Up Settings from Selected Elements


Use this feature if you have added a number of criteria (e.g. Element Type, Layer, Material) in the Find and Select dialog box and want to define their values based on an existing element. This is a quick way to define a Find & Select criteria set. 1) In the Find & Select dialog box, define the criteria you want to search by (e.g. Element Type, Layer). 326
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

2) Click the Pick up Settings button to activate it.

3) In the project, Alt+click an element whose settings you want to load. 4) The Element Type and Layer values of the clicked element are now loaded in the Find & Select dialog box.

Copy Settings
If any elements are selected, the second button - Copy Settings - becomes active. Click the button to load the settings of the last selected element into the Find & Select dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

327

Interaction

Edit Selection Set


The Edit Selection Set dialog box from Edit > Element Settings > Edit Selection Set makes it possible to edit specific attributes (layers and pencolors) for a collection of dissimilar element types simultaneously without affecting any other settings of these elements. Every element in ArchiCAD shares two basic attributes with all others: a Layer assignment and one or several Pencolors. If you explicitly change either or both of these attributes in the Edit Selection Set dialog box, all the selected elements will take on the new values.

Modify Associated Window & Door Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Window and Doors contained in any selected Walls. Note: If not checked, the openings will retain their individual Pencolors/Penweights. Modify Auto-Labels Layer & Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Auto-Labels (i.e. associative labels assigned in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box Listing & Labeling Panel) assigned to any selected elements. For information on associative labels, see Listing and Labeling Panels. Note: If not checked, the labels will retain their individual attributes. The pencolors of GDL Object-type elements can only be changed if the object is not set to be displayed with its own Symbol Pens (defined in the 2D symbol of the GDL Object). When editing the object, the standard Pen Color radio button will be preset to the edited Pen Color. All components of composite elements, such as Walls, Dimension chains or Markers made up of lines, Arrowheads and Text, are modified together. Selected/Editable: This area displays the number of elements of each type currently selected on the Floor Plan and in 3D. The bottom of the dialog box shows the type of selected elements and whether they are currently editable (that is, not locked).

328

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Store and Access Selection Sets


Use the Window > Palettes > Selections palette to recall previously saved, frequently accessed sets of selections that are stored with the Project. The controls of the Selections Palette allow you to save any selection made on the Floor Plan, in a Section/Elevation/IE window, or a Detail/Worksheet drawing. You can delete a selection or sort saved selections by name or by window of origin, using the pop-up menu at top right of the dialog box.

Use the commands in the pop-out menu at top right to manage sets of selected items. If you have selected items in the project, use Add Selection to save this selection (you will be prompted to name it.) The same pop-up contains commands to let you Rename or Delete any of these saved Selection Sets. Sort by Name: Choose this option to sort the items by their name. Sort by Original Window: Choose this option to sort the items by the windows they originate in The bottom part of the palette displays the contents of the selection set, broken down by element type. The three operation signs (x, -, +) affect the current, on-screen selection status of the stored selection set you have highlighted in the Palette (e.g., in the image below, NW Living):

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

329

Interaction

The X function means that only the highlighted selection set will be selected on screen. Any other element which is not part of this selection set is deselected. The - function means that the elements of the highlighted selection set will be deselected. The + function will select all the elements of the highlighted selection set. The operation is always performed on the currently active window.

330

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Marquee Area
About Marquee Areas Marquee Area Definition Options View Marquee Area in 3D Removing a Marquee Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool Stretching with the Marquee Tool Other Editing Operations within the Marquee

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

331

Interaction

About Marquee Areas


The Marquee tool is used to define areas for selection, editing and visualization purposes.

The capabilities of the Marquee tool complement those of the Arrow tool, and are particularly useful in selecting and moving groups of ArchiCAD elements. A Marquee area does not display selection dots on the included elements; the marqueed area is shown by a dashed line of marching ants. The color of the Marquee is the same as that of Selection dots: set this color at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information > Selection Dots and Marquee color.

. Marquee selection is often used when: You wish to define a smaller area in which to select all of the elements of a given type. You want to visualize a particular part of the design in 3D. You need to move or resize a number of elements of different types at the same time: for example, you can stretch all polygonal and linear elements of a building simultaneously. The Marquee tool is available in the Floor Plan, the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation windows, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, Layout windows, and the 2D Symbol window of GDL Objects. In image-type windows (PhotoRendering or picture windows) or the GDL Objects 3D view, the only operation available for a marquee selection is Copy. To use the Marquee tool for selection and editing, you must first define a rectangular or polygonal Marquee area. All construction aids are available.

If you inadvertently start to draw the Marquee area at an unintended point, press Esc (or the Cancel button in the Control Box). If you click a node or an edge inside the Marquee area, with the Marquee tool active, the cursor will assume the Checkmark or Mercedes shape. If you then move the cursor, the Marquee area will be moved with all the nodes or edges included in it.

332

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

All polygonal or linear elements with a node included in the Marquee area can be stretched simultaneously. For a detailed description, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. If you click inside the Marquee area without touching a node or an edge, the cursor will assume the Trident shape.

In this case, moving the cursor will only move the marquee, leaving all enclosed elements unchanged.

Select All Elements in a Marquee


To select all elements inside a previously defined Marquee area with the Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All in Marquee command.

Use Marquee in Find&Select


If you have placed a Marquee, then the Find & Select includes the Marquee criterion automatically. You can then opt to search either inside or outside the Marquee. See Find and Select Elements.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

333

Interaction

Marquee Area Definition Options


The Marquee tool has two definition methods available in the Info Box.

With the thin dashed line contour representing the Single Floor method, you can select elements on the current Story.

With the thick dashed line contour representing the All Floors method, you can select elements on all the Stories of the Project.

Note: These controls are dimmed when not viewing the Floor Plan. To draw a Marquee, select the Marquee tool from the Toolbox. Choose one of the Geometry Methods from the Info Box. (If you are working in the 3D Window, four options are available; otherwise there are three options).

The Polygonal method defines a Marquee area consisting of any number of segments. Completing a segment automatically begins the next one. Close the Marquee by doubleclicking the last endpoint, by clicking OK in the context menu to close the polygon, or by drawing the last endpoint on top of the first one and clicking when the Hammer cursor appears. At least two segments must be defined manually, since the area must have a minimum of three sides. Only straight segments are possible.

334

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

The Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle at right angles to the window. After the first click, a rubberband line rectangle will follow the cursor, allowing you to see the area. After the second click at the diagonally opposed corner, the Marquee rectangle will appear. The Rotated Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle placed at any angle. You first draw one side of the rectangle with two clicks, and then, with a third click, you define the length of the perpendicular sides.

The first three methods available in the 3D Window are extensions of the Polygonal, Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle methods. First the base of the marquee area is defined with the same steps as on the Floor Plan. (In perspective view, the marquee base must be underneath the horizon.) Then you define the height of the selected space. The coordinate axes are continuously present on screen to help you.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

335

Interaction

The fourth option (3D window only) allows you to draw a 2D marquee in order to copy elements from the 3D Window in the form of pictures.

For more information, see Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window.

336

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

View Marquee Area in 3D


You can use the Marquee to view a selected area of your project in the 3D window. Define the Marquee area, then use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command; or select the same command from the context menu. Any part of an element that falls inside the Marquee area will be included in the 3D view, even if there is no selection node or hotspot on this part of the element. Note: If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. To further define how Marqueed elements are shown in 3D, use the Marquee Effects controls of the View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. For more information, see Show Marquee Area in 3D.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

337

Interaction

Removing a Marquee
To remove a drawn Marquee area, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with the right mouse button or Ctrl-click (MacOS), and choose the Remove Marquee command in the appearing context menu. Begin drawing a new Marquee. Double-click in the window outside the marquee area with the Marquee tool selected. If you have explicitly selected further elements within the Marquee, pressing Esc will deselect these elements in reverse order, and finally remove the Marquee. If you choose another tool, the Marquee area will not be removed, in order to save the recent Marquee area for further use.

338

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window


You can use the Marquee tool to copy and paste an area of the 3D Window, a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, or a Model Picture Window. 1) Generate the view you need. 2) Use the Marquee tool to select the area you wish to copy (if you are selecting from the 3D window, make sure that the 2D Marquee option is active).

3) Choose Edit > Copy. If you are copying from the 3D window using the OpenGL engine, all images will be pasted in pixel format. If you are copying from the 3D window using the Internal Engine, a dialog box appears during the Copy operation giving you options for how the image will be displayed on the screen.

For more information, see Copy Dialog Box. Note: If you are copy-pasting construction elements, they will be placed as 2D elements (points, lines and fills.) You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. 4) Move to the Floor Plan and choose Edit > Paste. Note: You can paste into other 2D model windows, but the pasted elements will behave as 2D drawing elements only, not model elements. 5) Position the image on your Floor Plan using the Trident cursor.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

339

Interaction

6) Click outside the selection rectangle to complete the operation. - Elevations are pasted to the Floor Plan as full-sized 2D elements. - Parts of Model Pictures are pasted as screenshots.

340

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool


You can insert a cropped part of any image file into your ArchiCAD plan. With your ArchiCAD project file open, open any image format file. Click and drag (only the Marquee tool is available) to select the desired image area, then copy it to the clipboard. Close the image file, then paste the clipboard contents into the open project. You can modify it like any other figure. For more information, see Figures.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

341

Interaction

Other Editing Operations within the Marquee


If you wish to Cut, Copy, Clear, Drag, Mirror, Rotate, Elevate or Duplicate elements, they must have at least one node inside the Marquee area in order to be selected. The edit operations will act on the whole element. To use Edit commands on a placed Drawing, include at least one node of the Drawing (i.e. one of the Drawings corners) inside the Marquee. Note: In Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, some editing commands are available only for 2D drawing elements.

Stretching with the Marquee Tool

342

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

On-Screen Input Aids


Tracker Ruler Measure Tool Grid System Grid Snap Function Guide Lines Gravity Mouse Constraints Coordinate Constraints Relative Construction Methods Snapping to Existing Elements Special Snap Points Cursor Snap Range

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

343

Interaction

Tracker
About the Tracker Parameters Shown in Tracker Defining Tracker Coordinates Coordinate Input in Tracker Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options

344

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Tracker


Coordinate values are displayed in the Tracker, which follows your mouse movements and is available in any editable window type. Note: This section describes coordinate input using the Tracker function. If you prefer to use the Coordinates box familiar from older versions of ArchiCAD, consult Coordinates Palette. The Tracker gives you a dynamic and constant feedback on such values as edited lengths, angles, and hotspot values for GDL Object editing. To use the Tracker, you must activate the Tracker toggle button on the Standard toolbar

or activate the Show Tracker checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.

By default, the Tracker only appears On -demand: that is, during coordinate input and editing operations. Another way to show the Tracker if you have not yet begun element input: use the n shortcut. The Tracker will pop up and display the cursor position. Alternatively, choose the Always option to display the Tracker continuously. This means that the Tracker will follow your cursor even if you are not inputting anything, providing feedback on the cursor position. To deactivate the Tracker, deselect the Tracker toggle icon on the Standard toolbar, or hit the n shortcut. Tracker options (including colors, contents and behavior) can be set in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Some Tracker options are commands accessible from the pop-up arrow next to the Standard toolbars Tracker toggle.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

345

Interaction

Parameters Shown in Tracker


The parameters appearing in the Tracker vary depending on the type of editing action that is underway. For example, if you select a straight segment and choose the Curve edge command from the pet palette, then the Tracker shows the Arc Radius parameter.

The Tracker always shows one of its parameters in bold; this is the default parameter. Depending on your choices in the Tracker pop-up menu in the Standard Toolbar, the Tracker will display only the XY or the DA (distance/angle) coordinate pair (switch from one to the other by clicking Prefer XY Coordinates/Prefer Polar Coordinates during editing/input), and will show or hide the names of the coordinates (Show/Hide Parameter Tags).

Hint: To switch between DA and XY coordinates on the fly, use the / (slash character) shortcut. As a rule, the parameters in the Tracker will be listed in order of relevance, with D/A coordinates followed by X, Y and Z coordinates. By default, the coordinate values are Relative values. (If you prefer Absolute values, deselect the Relative Coordinates in Tracker toggle command; this command is enabled by default, except during editing/input.) If you have activated the Expand Tracker Automatically option from the drop-down Tracker menu, then all the parameters will be shown as soon as you enter the Tracker (by entering a value or by pressing Tab). Note: The same option, Expand Tracker automatically during numeric input, is also available as a checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Otherwise, if you want to expand the Tracker, enter the Tracker by pressing Tab, then click the arrow at the bottom of the Tracker to expand it.

346

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Defining Tracker Coordinates


You can enter numeric coordinates directly from the keyboard or use a combination of mouse and keyboard. The horizontal and vertical values correspond to the X and Y coordinates (also called Cartesian coordinates), while the radial and angular values are called polar coordinates. Coordinates can take on absolute and relative values. By default, they are shown as relative values in the Tracker. Use the Tracker menu from the Standard Toolbar to toggle the Relative Coordinates in Tracker preference on or off.

Relative values are measured from the Edit Origin, that is, they display horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the last edited point in the window.

Absolute values are measured from the User Origin (see Origins). This means that they always display the horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the User Origin. A temporary dashed line is drawn between the origin and the cursor to indicate that you are using absolute coordinates.

For information on Elevation values, see Elevation Values in the Tracker.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

347

Interaction

Coordinate Input in Tracker


As long as the Tracker is shown during input, just type a number for the default parameter (the one shown in bold.) The cursor will automatically jump to the Tracker and enter the value. Note: This input method works if the Enable direct input into Tracker fields box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. Another way to enter the Tracker is to press Tab. The cursor jumps to the default field of the Tracker (the one shown in bold). Click Tab as many times as needed to activate the required Tracker field. Type in the desired number.

You can also activate fields by clicking them or typing the shortcut of the corresponding field. If the Tracker is displayed in its compact form, typing the shortcut for a hidden parameter will display it. To enter numeric coordinates, type the shortcut of the desired coordinate (X, Y, Z or D/R or A) immediately followed by the value you intend to assign to it, for example X3 or Y-4. The + prefix is optional for positive values. You can type coordinate values in any order. Note: This input method works if the Coordinate Shortcuts prefer Tracker box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. The other way to enter coordinates is through the Coordinates Box (enable it using Window > Palettes > Coordinates). The selected value is highlighted. At this point, you have several options: To enter another coordinate value, type another shortcut for the desired coordinate, then enter a value. To complete the element you are drawing, press Enter or click the checkmark icon in the Tracker. To fix the value of a coordinate, click the crosshair icon in the Tracker. The edited element will then jump into this position and, if Guide Lines are active, this will also display Guide Lines of the currently available type at this location to help you continue the input. To cancel the last operation, press Esc. Return to graphic input by typing the name of the edited coordinate again or by mouseclicking anywhere in the window. You can also perform additions or subtractions from the current value by typing a + or sign after the value. For example, typing x3+ will add 3 to the x value shown in the Tracker box. Notes for users of U.S. dimensions: Two dashes are required for subtraction of whole feet because the first dash is interpreted as an indication that inches are to follow. 348
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

When 3 is entered, ArchiCAD assumes you mean three feet. Typing 36, 36", or 3-6 will enter three feet, six inches. Coordinates can be copied and pasted using the clipboard. The Cut, Copy and Paste menu items are inactive during numeric input, so you must use the standard shortcuts or the context menu. It is possible to enter a whole series of coordinates one after the other in the Tracker when drawing chains of elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, etc.). As soon as you have finished drawing the first element, the Edit Origin is immediately transferred to this endpoint, which becomes the starting point of the second element and is therefore given the x=0, y=0 value when working with relative coordinates.

You can combine coordinate input by fixing the value of a field and then editing the value of another one.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

349

Interaction

Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options


Special Tracker options are available to let you further customize the Tracker function, using the Coordinate Input Logic checkboxes in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.

Show X-Y Coordinates relative to User origin in Tracker: If you check this box, the XY coordinates will always be shown as Absolute cartesian values, even if you have activated the Relative Coordinates toggle button. This means that X-Y coordinates are shown as absolute values, and the RA or DA values are shown as relative values. Use relative angle measures: If you check this box, angle measures in the Tracker will be shown either: relative to the previous input segment, in case of polygon input, or relative to the grid, with the horizontal grid line as the zero value, and angle values shown relative to this line, up to 180 degrees. If this box is unchecked, angle values are shown from 0 to 360 degrees. Use angle relative to the active Guide Line: If you check this box, angle values in the Tracker will be shown relative to the active Guide Line. (You must first activate a Guide Line for this to work.) For information on all these options, see Tracker and Coordinate Input.

350

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Ruler
The Ruler is an editing aid available at the top and left side of the screen in every ArchiCAD window, except the 3D Window and Schedules. Use the Ruler as an aid in navigation: it lets you know where you are in the project, at the current zoom. To show/hide the Ruler, use the View > Ruler toggle command. You can also hide a ruler by right-clicking it and clicking the Ruler toggle. As you move the cursor on screen, feedback on the ruler shows you the vertical and horizontal position of the cursor relative to the User Origin (or, if no User Origin has been created, relative to the Project Origin). See Origins. Every time you create a new User Origin, the measurements shown on the Ruler change accordingly. The measurement units are the Model Units you set in Options > Preferences > Working Units.

Place Orthogonal Guide Line Parallel to Ruler


At any time, click on the Ruler, then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler will be created. See Guide Lines.

Ruler Commands
The Rulers context menu (right-click anywhere on the Ruler) gives you a quick way to access related commands:

Click the Ruler toggle to hide the Ruler Click Cursor Projection toggle to include projection lines from the Ruler to the cursor position. (This will also turn on Cursor Projection in the 3D window.) Click Working Units to access this dialog box, where the Model Unit option determines the Rulers measurement units.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

351

Interaction

Measure Tool
The Measure tool, located in the Standard toolbar, allows you to measure distances and areas in the project.

It is a temporary, on-screen function for quick feedback. To use the Measure Tool, activate its icon in the Standard Toolbar, or use the M shortcut. Click on a starting point (the top left corner of the rectangular wall, in the image below) and start to trace the wall. The Tracker displays the horizontal, vertical and radial distance measured from the starting point, as well as the angle.

You can Measure any number of segments in sequence: each click represents a new starting-point from which the next distance will be measured. After two or more clicks, the Tracker also shows a cumulative distance and the area (shown by a temporary gray area on screen). The image below shows the Measure tool feedback after three clicks, as you approach the last corner of the rectangular wall.

You can also use the Measure tool while creating elements. When you start drawing a Wall, for example, you can activate the Measure tool on the fly, measure (or even edit) a value with the fields it displays and then hit Enter to transfer this value into the appropriate field of the Tracker.

352

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Grid System
Two grid systems are provided to help you make drafting easier: the Construction Grid and the Snap Grid. You can set these up in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. For more information, see Grids & Background Dialog Box. As a shortcut, many of these controls are available in the Standard toolbar and the Coordinates palette. Grids can be defined separately for the Floor Plan and any individual Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, or Layout window. Note that, in Floor Plan window, the same Grid settings will be used for all Stories. Grids are not available in the 3D Window. Note: You can also create, place and use custom local structural grids of different sizes and shapes using The Grid Tool. The Construction Grid is used to reflect any characteristic spacing of your Project. The Construction Grid can also be used to define the foundation footings or the column grid of a building. Like the printed grids on traditional graph paper, the Construction Grid adds a visual orientation and sense of scale to the Floor Plan and the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/ Worksheet windows. The Construction Grid is normally visible on the Floor Plan, but you can turn it off with the Grid Display toggle command in the View > Grid Options hierarchical menu or in the Standard Toolbars Grid pop-up menu.

Depending on your projects layout, a rotated version of the construction grid may be more helpful than the default orthogonal one. Define the Rotation Angle in the View > Grid Options > Grids and Background dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

353

Interaction

You can also define a rotated grid by hand: first, choose Set Rotated Grid from the Standard Toolbar, then draw a vector on screen or click on an existing straight segment: this vector will represent the rotated grid angle relative to the horizontal axis.

To display the rotated version of your Construction Grid, click the Rotated Grid button in the Standard Toolbar grid menu or the Coordinates Palette. The Construction Grid can be optionally enhanced with an Auxiliary Grid, which is also visible on the screen and is defined in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. The Auxiliary Grid is often used to indicate the thickness of concrete walls or foundation footings, and can be used to create periodic or stepped grids.

The Snap Grid is an invisible grid - if you enable the Grid Snap Function, you can make the cursor snap to the nodes of this Snap Grid. When defining your Snap Grid in the Grids and Background dialog box, you will usually enter the smallest unit of measurement relevant to your Project. You can set different horizontal and vertical Snap Grid increments, allowing you to reflect the unique geometry of your Project. The Snap increments you define here can also be used for the Nudge shortcut - to easily move any element by a small defined factor, using a keyboard shortcut. See Nudging Elements. If the Grid Snap Function is enabled, the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid, depending on what you set as your preferred option.

354

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Grid Snap Function


The Grid Snap function allows precise graphic alignment of elements at consistent lengths and distances. When the Grid Snap function is active, you can only draw from one grid intersection to another; the grid pulls the cursor and makes it snap to the grid nodes. This allows you to position the cursor accurately, even at low zoom levels. When grid snap is active, it restricts the movement of the cursor to either Construction or Snap Grid nodes. A small dot jumping from grid-point to grid-point indicates the current cursor position. To disable this feature (for example, to position a piece of furniture at a non-grid location), you can suspend or activate the grid snap feature by pressing the S key. To activate the Grid Snap function, do one of the following: Use the S Shortcut. Use the View > Grid Snap menu command. The Snap function will use the last grid type used, either Construction or Snap grid. Select the Snap Grid or Construction Grid from the grid menu in the Standard Toolbar, or from the Coordinates Box.

Select Snap Grid or Construction Grid from View > Grid Snap Options. Select one of the Snap On buttons (either Construction Grid or Snap Grid) in the Grids and Background dialog box. To deactivate the Grid Snap function: Use the S shortcut key Use the View > Grid Snap menu command (deactivate the toggle).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

355

Interaction

Guide Lines
About Guide Lines Turn Guide Lines on or off Types of Guide Lines Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines Placing Guide Lines During Input Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler Removing Guide Lines Examples for Using Guide Lines

356

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About Guide Lines


Guide Lines are 2D drafting aids which help the user find special points and projections while editing and drafting elements, using the geometry constraints of existing elements. The cursor can snap to Guide Lines, and special snap points can be placed on them. Some Guide Lines are extended from existing element edges/arcs; others pop up temporarily while you move the cursor. In some cases, multiple Guide Lines are offered, allowing you to choose your preferred Guide Line and have it remain on screen. Guide Lines are available in all 2D windows (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Layout, GDL Object 2D Symbol). Guide Lines are available with any tool. If a selection tool is active, they only appear when you start editing elements (Arrow) or when you are placing or moving elements (Marquee).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

357

Interaction

Turn Guide Lines on or off


Use the Q key as a shortcut (toggle Guide Lines on and off) Use the toggle button in the Standard toolbar

Use the View > Guide Lines toggle command Guide Lines options are available at: Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines

and from the Guide Lines toggle command in the Standard Toolbar.

358

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Types of Guide Lines


Instant (temporary) guide lines appear during an input operation and disappear automatically after input is completed. They appear and disappear depending on the location of the cursor, and their geometry depends on which Guide Line settings you have switched on in Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines (including Main Direction, Relative Direction and Incremental Guide Lines). You can snap to these instant Guide Lines, but you cannot make them remain on screen. To constrain the cursor to the nearest instant Guide Line, press Shift during input (first, make sure that the Nearest Instant Guide Line box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.) Note: Context menu commands do provide a way to convert instant guide lines into lasting segments. See Placing Guide Lines During Input. Lasting guide lines are visible on the screen until the given editing operation is terminated (completed, cancelled or interrupted by a different type of operation such as the activation of another window) or until you choose to remove them. See Removing Guide Lines. To make Lasting guide lines appear (the temporary blue Guide Lines become orange in color), do one of the following: 1) Place the cursor on an edge or arc either before or during element input. (The cursor takes on the Mercedes shape.) Edge-extension guide lines will be projected. In the case of arcs, they will be extended to a full circle. If you have not yet begun the editing operation, you must move the cursor onto the Guide Line to make it a lasting Guide Line. To constrain the cursor to the nearest lasting Guide Line, make sure that the Lasting Guide Lines box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.

To make a guide line active, place the cursor on it and wait until it becomes thicker. Only one Guide Line is active (shown in bold) at a time. Relative Guide Lines will be calculated relative to the active Guide Line.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

359

Interaction

2) Place the cursor on a node (either before or during output). Multi-choice guide lines appear when several choices make sense in a given situation, for example the horizontal-vertical lines appearing at element nodes (as in the image below). You can choose to make any of these lines a lasting guide line by moving the cursor onto the chosen line.

At an element node, the multi-choice Guide Lines appear in fixed directions (Main Direction and Relative Direction) as defined in the Guide Lines panel of the Work Environment dialog box. Relative direction guide lines can be parallel, perpendicular or tangential to the active guide line or intersect guide lines. The relative guide lines are always relative to the active guide line.

The following image shows multi-choice relative Guide Lines that are parallel to and perpendicular to the active Guide Line (shown in bold). Note the parallel and perpendicular signs on the Guide Lines. To make either of these multi-choice Guide Lines remain on screen as an editing aid (i.e., to turn them into lasting Guide Lines), just move the cursor over it.

360

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines


On this Guide Lines tab page (Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines, you can define and activate/deactivate three categories of Guide Lines: Main Direction Guide Lines: Their direction/angle is determined based on the drawing environment (e.g. horizontal/vertical direction, rotated grid, etc.) If you check the Input Vector and Length box in this section, the direction and radius of the last input vector will also be offered as a Guide Line. Relative-direction Guide Lines: These are created relative to the active Guide Line. Incremental Guide Lines: These are displayed, during input only, at every increment of the specified angle (relative to the orthogonal coordinate system and originating from the current Edit Origin.) If you check the Relative to active Guide Line check box, these incremental Guide Lines, too, will always be displayed relative to the currently active Guide Line if any. Incremental Guide Lines are temporary (instant) only. Any of these Guide Line groups can also be activated/deactivated using the toggle commands from the Standard toolbar or from View > Guide Line Options.

You can also use Coordinate Constraints, with Guide Lines active, to display Guide Lines which constrain the cursor to particular directions. You can set default Guide Line colors for Multi-Choice Guide Lines and other Guide Lines separately (again, in the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines tab page). For more information, see Guide Lines Settings.

Time-Based Guide Line Appearance


For each category of Guide Lines (Main-Direction, Relative-Direction), you can set a time interval after which the Guide Lines will appear, so long as you keep the cursor still at an edge or node. Enter preferred time intervals in seconds on the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines tab page. However, you can override these wait-time intervals at any time using the Force Guide Line Display command (shortcut: ). This shortcut is useful if you are at a node with several sets of multi-choice Guide Lines available, and you want to see a different set without waiting the specified interval.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

361

Interaction

Placing Guide Lines During Input


Independent of your default Guide Line definitions, you can place a Guide Line (or Guide Circle) at any time during input using the Place Guide Line/Guide Circle command from the context menu. After clicking on screen to begin input, choose the Place Guide Line (Circle) command from the context menu. A lasting Guide Line (circle) will appear. Similarly, you can use the Convert to Guide Line Segment command from the context menu. The current vector will be transformed into a Guide Line. In this case, the length of the Guide Line is limited to the length of the vector you drew and will not run across the whole screen.

362

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Place an Orthogonal Guide Line


At any time, click on the Ruler at the top or left edge of the screen, and then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler is created.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

363

Interaction

Removing Guide Lines


Guide Lines are removed when you finish the editing action, or when you press Esc in succession (the first Esc will cancel the operation in progress; the next will remove all Guide Lines). To manually remove a guide line, place the cursor on it, activate the context menu and choose the Remove guide line command. To remove all guide lines manually, right-click anywhere in the window to activate the context menu and choose the Remove all guide lines command.

364

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Examples for Using Guide Lines


Guide Lines make it easy to create parallel walls. Before you start, make sure that the Grid Snap Function is disabled and that Guide Lines are enabled. Check that the Parallel to the active Guide line option is active in the Relative direction Guide lines section of Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines. For more information, see Guide Lines Settings.

Draw a simple straight wall in the Floor Plan, then place the cursor on its edge (the cursor will assume the Mercedes shape). The edge-extension Guide Line appears. Move the cursor over this Guide Line to make it a lasting Guide Line.

Now click to the point where you wish to start drawing the parallel wall. Start drawing a wall that is roughly parallel to the original wall. You will see a second Guide Line appear which is exactly parallel to the active Guide Line of original wall.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

365

Interaction

Draw your new wall along the line that is parallel to the active guide line and click to finish. Note: You can also use the Relative Construction Methods provided by the Control Box to draw parallel, perpendicular, angle bisector and tangential elements. Let us now see a more complex example. Grid Snap still inactive, Guide Lines enabled, make sure that the following settings are active in the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines dialog box:

For more information, see Guide Lines Settings. These settings will enable you to use Guide Lines to place a wall that is at a 30-degree angle from the perpendicular of the first wall. First, draw a simple straight wall and place the cursor on it until the guide line extending it appears. Move the cursor over the Guide Line to make it active. Then place the cursor at the end of the wall and wait until a new guide line appears, perpendicular to the active one.

366

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Move the cursor along this guide line and click at the point where you wish to start a new wall. Move the cursor at a roughly 30 degree angle from the permanent guide line. You will see a new guide line appear at exactly 30 degrees. Start drawing a new wall along that line and click to finish.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

367

Interaction

Gravity
When placing a new Wall, Column, Beam or Object-type element, the Gravity function lets you place it directly on top of an existing Slab, Roof or Mesh, thus taking on the elevation of the element it is placed on. If Gravity is on (activate Gravity icon), newly created elements will be placed on top of (i.e., gravitate to) the Roof, Slab or Mesh beneath them, depending on which Gravity option you choose. Level Dimensions placed with Gravity On on top of Slabs, Roofs or Meshes are associated to them. To choose an option, use the Gravity controls in the Standard toolbar or the icons of the Coordinates palette.

Note: Gravity only affects newly created elements and cannot be used for editing existing ones. If you are using Gravity to place a Wall, Column, Beam or any Object-type element onto a slab, roof or mesh surface, you can monitor the changes in elevation (Z) values in the Tracker (or the Coordinates Palette). When several slabs, roofs or meshes overlap, the highest elevation value is displayed. In this image, a wall (with Gravity on) is being placed on top of a slab whose elevation is 400; the walls Z-coordinate in the Tracker, accordingly, is shown as 400.

If the Gravity function is on (activate Gravity icon) while you are placing a new element, but there is no underlying Slab, Roof, or Mesh, then the new element will be placed at the current storys zero level.

368

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Mouse Constraints
ArchiCADs Mouse Constraints are like having a computerized T-square and triangle available while drafting in the Floor Plan. They are editing aids that can be used as an alternative to Guide Lines, although most users will prefer to use Guide Lines in 2D windows. The angle pairs they define can be used to lock the cursor at a particular drawing angle, by pressing Shift during input. The mechanism can only be engaged while drawing or editing an element, as indicated by the thick rubberband line shown in the Floor Plan or the ghosted element contour shown in the 3D Window. It temporarily locks the cursors polar angle value in the Coordinates Palette using one of the angle pairs defined in the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box. Three orthogonal angles/angle pairs can be specified: The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the main grid The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the rotated grid The fixed angle set The fixed angle set can be set relative to the rotated grid or the main grid. A practical use for the fixed angle orthogonal set would be aligning multiple elements with a roadway. In addition, you can check one or both Guide Line constraint options: Nearest Instant Guide Line Lasting Guide Lines

Using Mouse Constraints Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

369

Interaction

Using Mouse Constraints


Constraining the drawing direction helps you precisely align or connect new elements. To use the orthogonal direction sets for drawing a new element: 1) Make sure the Grid Snap Function is disabled. 2) Click to start drawing an element.

3) Move the cursor from this starting point and hold down the Shift key. ArchiCAD will search for the closest enabled constraint direction.

370

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

4) If the constrained direction is not what you had in mind, release the Shift key and move the cursor to a position closer to the desired direction, then hold down the Shift key.

5) When you have chosen the appropriate constraint direction, click the cursor again to place the endpoint of the element. Since the direction remains locked, you can align this endpoint with other elements using the projection mode of the cursor.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

371

Interaction

Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints


When the drawing direction is constrained by pressing Shift, a dotted line connects the unfinished element with the location of the cursor.

In the Control Box, you can vary the display of this dotted line among three possible settings (Cursor Snap Variants): Perpendicular to the constrained direction Horizontal from the constrained direction Vertical from the constrained direction These options allow you to best align the element under construction with other already existing elements. To switch among these options: 1) Display the Control Box. (Window > Palettes > Control Box) 2) Draw an input vector on screen. 3) Press Shift to enable a constraint. The Cursor Snap Variants pop-up is now active in the Control Box. Move your cursor to this popup and choose the cursor snap variant you need.

372

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Coordinate Constraints
You can lock a cursor coordinate and thereby restrict the movement of the cursor by pressing Alt (Windows) or Opt (MacOS) and either X, Y, A, or R/D on the keyboard. If Guide Lines are active: Alt/Opt + X produces a vertical Guide Line.

Alt/Opt + Y produces a horizontal Guide Line. Alt/Opt + A (having defined the Angle value numerically or drawing in a sample direction) produces a corresponding Guide Line. Alt/Opt + R produces a Guide Circle whose radius is determined numerically or graphically. To unlock the constraint, just press the same key combination (e.g. Alt/Opt + X) again. If Guide Lines are inactive, the locking function works the same way, but you will not see the Guide Lines. Another way to lock a coordinate during input is to choose the Lock to Guide Line command from the context menu, if you have already snapped to a Guide Line.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

373

Interaction

Relative Construction Methods


In addition to the Guide Lines feature, the relative construction methods also constrain the element construction direction to a constant angle. They are accessed from the third button of the Control Box.

Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. These Relative Construction Methods are described below. Exception: The Special Snap Vector method is described at: Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector.

Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints Angle Bisector Constraint Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods) Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D

374

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints


The first two Relative Construction methods are Perpendicular and Parallel constraints.

1) Make sure that the Grid Snap Function is inactive. 2) Choose the Perpendicular or Parallel icon and click it to make it active. 3) Select a line or an element edge as a reference by clicking it, or draw a temporary reference line using the cursor. (The reference edge/line will not be shown as selected; a newly drawn reference line will not remain visible on-screen.) 4) Draw the new element. The new element you draw will be perpendicular or parallel to the reference line (depending on the method selected).

Note: You can also select the Perpendicular or Parallel method after you have started drawing an element. In this case, the drawing operation is frozen until you have either drawn or selected a reference line or edge.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

375

Interaction

Angle Bisector Constraint


Using the Angle Bisector relative construction method, you can draw elements bisecting the angle formed by other elements or temporary reference vectors.

You can either start drawing the new element before activating the Angle Bisector method and defining the reference vectors, or the other way round. Before using Angle Bisector constraint, make sure that Grid Snap is disabled.

Click the Angle Bisector icon, then define the reference vectors by either clicking on two existing element edges or lines, or drawing two temporary lines. (The reference edges/lines will not be shown as selected; the temporary lines will not remain visible on-screen.) The mouse is constrained to the bisecting angle between the two reference lines. Before you actually draw the element, the cursor is already constrained, and you can see a small black dot move along the line that would be drawn at that angle.

As for any other constraint, you can use remote cursor snap to define the other endpoint of the drawn line.

376

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods)


The Offset and Multiple Offset methods help you create lines or polylines with a given offset to a drawn segment or polygon. These methods have no effect on elements defined by a single click. Either relative construction method can be activated from the Control Box.

To draw an offset segment or polygonal element: 1) Choose or activate the Offset method. (The active tool must support polygon shapes.)

2) Draw a line or an open or closed polyline. (You can, if you wish, create this polyline using the Magic Wand.) 3) The base polyline can be completed by a double-click. When it is completed, a rubberband outline will appear, starting from the endpoint of the polyline and running perpendicular to its last entered segment.

4) Click once to place the element. When using the Multiple Offset method, the same steps can be used, except that the process is not completed when placing the element with a click. You can continue placing offset copies until you choose to terminate input.

With a double-click, you terminate input by drawing a last offset element. When hitting the Cancel button in the Control Box, you terminate input by omitting the offset element you are just drawing.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

377

Interaction

Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D


The Align to Surface relative construction method is only active when working in the 3D Window. It enables you to fit elements onto non-horizontal planes when working in 3D views.

This method automatically identifies the intersection of a selected plane and the working plane of the cursor. The working plane is often horizontal. However, in special cases, for example when moving a hole in a roof plane, the cursors working plane is angled. It is also possible to align to curved surfaces, for example when fitting an object to a curved wall. The limitation here is that if the cursor is moving in an angled plane, it is not possible to fit to a curved surface, only the tangential plane of the surface.

Using the Constraint when Creating New Elements


1) 2) 3) 4) To use the constraint, first activate the 3D Window. Choose the tool for the element you wish to add. Adjust your User Origin if necessary. Choose and activate the Align to Surface Relative Construction method in the Control Box.

5) Click on any surface in the 3D view you want to align your new element to. 6) A black dot will appear on the selected plane at the height of the current User Origin. The dot will follow the cursor constrained to the intersection line of your reference plane and the User Origin plane.

378

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

7) Click where you want to start drawing your new element. The element will be constrained to the intersection line. Finish drawing the element in the usual way.

Using Align to Surface with Existing Elements


1) Activate the 3D Window. 2) Adjust the User Origin if necessary. For more information, see Origins. 3) Select the element you wish to edit. 4) Choose the Edit command you wish to execute, e.g., stretch an edge of a slab to the intersection of a roof and the User Origin. 5) Click a reference point or edge to start editing. 6) Select the Align to Surface modifier icon in the Control box and activate the constraint as described above. 7) Choose your reference plane. 8) Finish editing the element.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

379

Interaction

Snapping to Existing Elements


In addition to the methods offered to create elements at a specified point relative to existing elements, or at specific points of your project, ArchiCAD also helps you to move or reshape elements by snapping them to existing ones as part of a move operation. The Element Snap function can be enabled and disabled using the Options > Element Snap toggle command. (This command is also available on the Standard Toolbar.)

Element Snap only works on selected elements and can be toggled on and off while you work using the E shortcut. Note: Element Snap can only be used when Grid Snap is disabled. If you select an element and then start moving it with Element Snap active, you will see that its special points change to small squares.

These special points include: The selection dot points of the element including anchor points The division points of the element (if Special Snap Points are enabled.) The tip of the cursor When one of these selection dots encounters a node, anchor point or edge of another element where the cursor changes its shape to indicate a special relation, that selection dot becomes larger showing that the element is attracted to the sensitive point. You can then click to join the two elements without having to place the cursor at the actual joining point.

380

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

If more than one snapping point touches an eligible point on the other element, you will see that these turn black. You can use the spacebar to cycle through possible points. Click when the one you need is displayed with the larger empty square.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

381

Interaction

Special Snap Points


Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector
Special Snap Points help you start drawing new elements from a specific point located on an edge of another element or to edit existing elements with reference to these specific points. Activating special snap points will place temporary nodes at the division points based on the current Special Snap Point commands in the Standard toolbar.

These controls are also available as commands in the Control Box. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. Special Snap Points can be defined either on the entire length of a linear or circular element or element edge, or on a segment closed by two intersections.

The temporary nodes behave as hotspots. The cursor will change to a Checkmark when held above them. Special points only appear temporarily and will disappear by default after about 5 seconds. You can start drawing new elements from these points or use them for editing other elements in relation to them. Note: Although Special Snap Points (if enabled) will disappear on their own after a set interval by default, you can opt to have the snap points remain visible until you either place an element or change to another view or story: disable the Autohide Special Snap points checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

382

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Snap Points include: Halving points Division points (up to 20, set manually) Points located at a given distance from an endpoint or at a specific percentage of the distance between two endpoints (entered manually) To define division points and custom distances, use the Set Special Snap Values command from the menu in the Standard Toolbar.

Distances and percentages are always calculated from the endpoint that is closest. The toggle commands in the Standard Toolbars Special Snap Points menu allow you to disable the feature or to enable it along the entire element, or between intersection points (Icons in the Control Box serve the same function.)

Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

383

Interaction

Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector


In addition, you can display Special Snap Points on a temporary vector used while drawing elements. The method can be activated with the Special Snap icon among the relative construction icons in the Control Box.

In the following example, you will draw a Wall that starts at one- fourth of the gap between two endpoints of two other Walls. 1) Start by choosing the Divisions option in Special Snap Point Settings, then type 4 as the number of Divisions.

2) Make sure that Grid Snap is inactive. Activate the Wall tool, then choose and activate the Special Snap Point icon in the Control Box.

3) Start drawing the reference vector from the endpoint of one of the Walls.

4) A dashed line is drawn indicating the reference vector, with small black dots at the locations of the special snap points. Click the endpoint of the other Wall to terminate the definition of the reference vector.

384

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

The Edit Origin is relocated to the place of the generated special snap point.

You can start drawing the new Wall.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

385

Interaction

Cursor Snap Range


To help locate hotspots on the screen, the cursor gravitates toward edges and nodes. The attraction of the cursor by elements is defined in pixels in the bottom section of the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods dialog box.

Cursor Snap Range can be set between 1 and 9 pixels. 3-4 pixels is a comfortable setting, but at small zoom levels you may hit hotspots that you did not wish to snap to. If you have good pointing skills, use 1 pixel and you will not be forced to zoom in. Cursor Snap Range will also help you to automatically snap to special points including the section points of existing lines or edges, perpendicular projections from the Edit Origin to existing lines or edges, and tangential points of the rubberband line along existing arcs, splines, curved edges, etc. The cursors shape informs you about the type of special point ArchiCAD has found.

386

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Editing Elements
Basic Editing Operations Cancel Operations Pet Palettes Move Elements Align Elements Distribute Elements Modify Element Sizes Explode into Current View Create Element Duplicates Drag & Drop Parameter Transfer Group Elements Lock/Unlock Elements Display Order Magic Wand Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

387

Interaction

Basic Editing Operations


Cut
The Edit > Cut command removes selected elements from a Project and places them on the Clipboard for future use via the Paste command. It can also be used for dialog box or Coordinates Palette numeric field contents. Note: The Cut command is not available in the 3D Window. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. If you cut a construction element from a Model-type Section/Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, the element is also cut from the Floor Plan. In Text type windows, you can use the Cut command as in any word processor.

Copy
The Edit > Copy command puts the selected construction or text elements on the Clipboard, but the selected elements are not removed from the original document. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using Copy/Paste. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy command to move a Door/ Window, in a model-type Section window.) In the 3D window, the Copy command is only available with the Marquee tool. See Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool.

Paste
Use Edit > Paste command to insert the contents of the Clipboard onto the current Project or a text Window. When pasting cut elements into a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window, the elements are pasted as drawing primitives (points, lines and fills). You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using either Cut/Paste or Copy/Paste. The Paste command is not available in the 3D window. When you are pasting with a multiple story marquee, an alert appears asking you to identify the copied story to merge to the current one.

388

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

If you Cut/Copy and then Paste a selection between stories at the same zoom level with no Panning operations in between, the contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the same position they were originally cut or copied from. If there are several possible options for locating the pasted Clipboard contents, the Paste Options Dialog Box appears. (The dialog box appears if the pasted elements cannot appear in their entirety in the Window at the current zoom level, or if it is possible to locate the pasted elements relative to either the Active view or a Reference view.)

Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories


The Story Settings Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story.

Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects


When pasting elements to another project, remember that element attributes are identified by name. If the pasted elements refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, the necessary attributes will be appended. If the elements refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project. The Clipboard can be used not only to hold ArchiCAD elements for pasting, but also to import bitmap graphics and other types of information. You can paste multi-line texts from wordprocessing applications into ArchiCAD. If you have copied items from an external application, you have several options - depending on the type of copied item - for pasting them into ArchiCAD. For more information, see Pasting Dialog Box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

389

Interaction

Delete
The Edit > Delete command removes selected items from Project or text Windows. The deleted elements are not preserved on the Clipboard. They are easily retrieved by Undo. The keyboard equivalent of Delete is hitting the Backspace or Delete key. Deleting construction elements in any model window (Floor Plan, 3D, model-type Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document) will also clear these elements from all the other windows. Note: Deleting any additional (i.e. manually added) elements from a model-type Section/ Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, or any elements from a drawing-type Section/ Elevation/IE window will leave all other windows unchanged.

Undo/Redo
The Undo and Redo commands allow you to undo (revert to a previous step) and redo a large number of construction operations. The name of the command to be undone is displayed in the menu along with the Undo or Redo command. This capability also allows you to test tentative solutions by trying them out until you arrive at the desired result. The number of steps that can be undone and redone (from 1 to 99) is set using in the Options > Work Environment > Data Safety dialog box (Undo Limit). The default value is 20. After redoing a series of steps, Undo will only be available when you complete a new undoable action. All model and drafting operations can be undone step by step, chronologically, regardless of the model or drawing view they were performed in. In text type windows, only the last editing step can be undone/redone. (Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function, GDL script windows, Project Notes, and Report windows.) Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable. Note: Each time you save the Project, your previously available Undo steps will be cleared. In case of a crash, Autosave will save your Project. Autosave does not clear the undoable steps.

390

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Cancel Operations
By successively pressing the Esc key, you will achieve the following actions: 1) Cancel current operation entirely (during input) 2) If nothing is selected: Remove Guide Lines, if any 3) Deselect selected item(s), if any 4) Remove Marquee selection, if any 5) If nothing is selected: Switch to Arrow tool During input, pressing the Backspace key will cancel the operation. Warning: Pressing Backspace with any items selected will delete those items!

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

391

Interaction

Pet Palettes
A pet palette with relevant commands appears with most on-screen editing operations. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following factors: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge or node) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need.

You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation with a second mouse click. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. For more information on customizing pet palette functions, see Dialog Boxes and Palettes.

392

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Move Elements
You can move elements individually or collectively. You can nudge them in increments; you can drag, rotate or mirror them along a horizontal plane and through vertical displacement, that is, by changing their elevation values. To move elements, you can: Select them and choose the corresponding menu command from the Edit > Move menu (with any tool active in the Toolbox) or the Move commands in the context menu of a selected element- as with the selected column in this image:

With any tool active, click on a node and then choose the desired shortcut in the appearing pet palette.

Nudging Elements Dragging Elements Rotating Elements Mirroring Elements Elevating Elements

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

393

Interaction

Nudging Elements
A quick way to move elements on the screen is to use the Nudge feature: select one or more elements, then use Shift + an arrow key to move the element left, right, up or down. The Nudge factor - the increment by which you will move the element - is the same as the distance entered for your Snap Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background. See Grid System.

In the 3D window, Nudge will move the element left, right, forward or backward on a horizontal plane. To Nudge a selected element in larger increments, use Shift + Alt/Opt + an arrow key. This will move the selected elements by the distance entered for your Construction Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background.

394

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Dragging Elements
To drag an element, do one of the following: With Quick Selection: click on the elements surface and drag it to its new position. See Quick Selection of Surface Areas. Select the Element; select the Edit > Move > Drag command, and draw a temporary vector anywhere in the active window: the element will be dragged to its new location according to this vectors length and direction. Select the element, select the Drag icon from the pet palette, then drag the element.

Select the element, then access the drag command with the context menu or using the Drag command shortcut (Ctrl+D). To move a wall, select it, then take hold of it anywhere on its surface and drag it with the cursor to its new location. (The accompanying pet palette shows the Drag command activated.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

395

Interaction

All selected elements are moved to a new location. Single elements are accompanied by a ghost outline or boundary as you move them. Selections containing grouped elements appear as a greyed bounding box as you move them.

These functions will also work when several elements have been simultaneously selected. All of the selected elements will be dragged along the same vector. In the image below, we select a wall, table and chair, and drag them all at the same time to their new position.

Note: In 3D, dragging can also change the elevation of the selected elements. To constrain the movement of the elements to the horizontal plane, activate the horizontal-vertical angle pair in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box, make sure the Drag Horizontally icon is active in the appearing pet palette, and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the elements.

396

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Rotating Elements
To rotate an element: Select the Element.

Select the Edit > Move > Rotate command (or Move > Rotate from the selected elements context menu). Alternatively, click again on a node or edge of the selected element to bring up the pet palette, then choose the Rotate command.

Or use the Ctrl (Cmd) + E shortcut. Click to define the center of rotation of the selected elements. Click to define the starting point of the rotation arc and its radius.

Move the cursor and click to complete the rotation arc.

You can rotate selected elements in the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window, and drawing elements only in Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/Worksheet windows. Even in the 3D Window, rotation is always performed across a horizontal plane.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

397

Interaction

Mirroring Elements
Mirroring creates a mirror image of selected elements on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. To Mirror an element: Select the Element(s) you want to mirror. Here, we want to place the table and chairs in the facing direction, at the other side of the room.

Select the Edit > Move > Mirror command, or choose the Mirror command from the context menu or the pet palette.

Define the mirroring axis with two clicks, as if you were drawing a Line.

The mirrored elements will be placed after the second click.

398

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Notes: Any number of Doors and Windows can be mirrored at a time. The mirrored Door/Window will always be in line with the wall that contains the original. Select the Door/Window; click once. This click is the axis of the mirroring action. Text, Line arrowheads and Dimensions will not be mirrored, only their bounding box. Mirrored Text blocks, Labels, Dimensions and Fill polygon area labels are always readable from the bottom and the left side of the drawing. Zone stamps cannot be mirrored.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

399

Interaction

Elevating Elements
The Elevate command allows you to move selected elements vertically along the Z axis. Use Edit > Move > Elevate. To elevate an element in the Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE windows: Select the element. Choose the Edit > Move > Elevate command, or the Elevate command from the pet palette.

This brings up the Elevate dialog box.

Type the value by which you wish to raise or lower all selected elements To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, check Set Home Story by Elevation; or choose By Elevation in the Tracker. Click OK. This command is well-suited to changing the elevations of large numbers of similar elements (i.e., walls, landscaping objects, floor tiles, and lighting fixtures). It is the best way to preserve the vertical relationships between objects while moving them. Note: In the Section/Elevation/IE window, you can also elevate elements simply by clicking and dragging. In the 3D Window, click an element node (Arrow tool active) and choose the Elevate icon from the appearing pet palette, and then graphically move the selected elements up and down.

400

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, choose By Elevation in the Tracker. Alternatively, use the Tracker controls to lock the elements Home Story. (See Set Home Story by Elevation.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

401

Interaction

Align Elements
About the Align function How to Align Elements Special Align

402

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About the Align function


Use this menu (Edit > Align) to align selected elements with each other, or to a custom-drawn target line, using a variety of criteria: Align elements right or left; Align elements to the top or bottom; Center elements vertically or horizontally; Special-align elements to any point on an existing element, or to a temporary line/arc drawn by you. The Align commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. When using the Align commands, the expression right refers to the rightmost element on the xaxis in the window you are looking at (e.g. Floor Plan, Section, 3D). The expression left refers to the lefthand direction on the x-axis. Similarly, top means the element with the highest y-coordinate in the current window, and bottom is the element with the lowest y-coordinate. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to align the following Corner Table object with other furniture:

ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):

Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are aligning, use the Special Align options (Edit > Align > Special Align).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

403

Interaction

How to Align Elements


1) Select the elements you wish to align. 2) Go to Edit > Align and choose one of the following operations:

Left: If you choose Edit > Align > Left, all selected elements will be aligned to the leftmost bounding-box point of the element that is located farthest to the left. In this example, we want to align the three windows shown in Section view.

404

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Select all three windows and use Edit > Align Left.

Right: If you choose Edit > Align > Right, all selected elements will be aligned to the rightmost bounding-box point of the element located farthest to the right. In the illustration below, the arc wall is the rightmost element; the rest of the walls (their rightmost points) are aligned to the rightmost point on the arc walls bounding box.

Top/Bottom: If you choose Edit > Align > Top or Bottom, all selected elements will be aligned to the topmost (or bottommost) point on the element that is the top (or bottom) element of the selected group. In the example below, we want to move up the window on the left, so that it lines up with other two windows.

To achieve this, we select all the windows, then use Edit > Align > Top to obtain the desired result.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

405

Interaction

Center Horizontally: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Horizontally, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements top and bottom y-coordinates, and then align all the elements horizontally (using each elements centerpoint), along a horizontal line halfway between the top and bottom elements. Center Vertically: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Vertically, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements leftmost and rightmost x-coordinates, and then align all the elements vertically, along a vertical line halfway between them. For example, in the following Floor Plan, we will center the selected furniture vertically.

406

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Align
The options in Edit > Align > Special Align give you great flexibility in lining up selected elements. You can choose which point to align, and you can choose what to align the elements to: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.

In this example, we wish to align the selected tree objects to the edge of the garden path.

Go to Edit > Align > Special Align and choose the Nearest Point option: each tree will line up along the path using each trees bounding box point that falls closest to the path. Choose the Click an existing line or element edge option. Click OK to close the dialog box, then click the edge of the path (here, the edge of the mesh). The trees line up along the path.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

407

Interaction

Distribute Elements
Use this menu (Edit > Distribute) to evenly distribute selected elements using a variety of criteria:

The Distribute commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to distribute elements that include the following Corner Table object:

ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):

Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are distributing, use the Special Distribute options (Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute). Along X: The two selected elements at either end will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you have three windows distributed evenly along a wall.

As a result of a design change, the wall is lengthened and you add two more windows.

408

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To ensure they are all distributed evenly, select all the windows and use Edit > Distribute > Along X.

Along Y: The two selected elements at either end (vertically) will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you want to distribute chairs evenly against the back wall of the room. Select them, then use Edit > Distribute > Along Y.

Along XY: The two selected elements at either end (at top left and bottom right) will remain in place, and the rest will be distributed evenly along an XY diagonal. For example, you have nine desks in the classroom placed roughly in a V formation.

To distribute the desks precisely, select a group of 5 desks and use Edit > Distribute > Along XY.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

409

Interaction

First group:

Repeat with a second group of five chairs. Final result:

410

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Special Distribute
The options in Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute let you choose which point to distribute and along what to distribute the elements: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.

Suppose you want to distribute potted plants in a circle around a hexagonal soil holder object:

Use Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute. Choose the Draw a line or arc option, then click OK to close the dialog box. Click to start drawing and choose the Arc by centerpoint pet palette option. You will create a temporary circle around the hexagonal object. As you complete the circle, the potted plants will be distributed around it.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

411

Interaction

Modify Element Sizes


Overview of Modifying Element Size Stretching Walls Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns Modifying Beams Modifying Complex Profile Elements Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements Stretching with the Marquee Tool Stretch Height Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements Splitting Elements Adjusting Elements Intersect Two Elements Create a Fillet or Chamfer Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Adding Element Nodes Move Nodes Curve/Straighten Element Edge

412

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Overview of Modifying Element Size


Different element types have different characteristic dimensions: length, width, height, thickness, opening angle, etc. Some of these are easiest to modify numerically, by selecting the given element, opening its settings dialog box and adjusting the relevant values. Some dimensions, however, cannot be modified numerically (for example, the length of linear elements or edges), while some others need to be fitted exactly to other elements (walls to roofs, for example) which may make numeric adjustment a tedious calculation task. You may also need to change the overall dimensions of several elements at the same time while keeping their relative proportions. In such cases, ArchiCAD allows you to modify element sizes using splitting, stretching and trimming operations. Most of the operations can be performed in three ways: Edit menu command Keyboard Shortcuts Commands from Pet Palettes In some cases, only the pet palette is available. Some general considerations: You cannot stretch Hotspots, Cameras or Detail Markers. Some GDL Object type elements are programmed to allow only specific sizes, or include smart editing hotspots to edit their shape graphically. Stretch is available for most types of selected elements in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. Only drawing elements can be stretched in the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Stretch command cannot be used on polygonal elements, but you can stretch their edges or displace any of their nodes graphically.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

413

Interaction

Stretching Walls
To stretch/shrink the length of straight Walls with the menu command: 1) Select a wall. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch menu command, or the Stretch command from the pet palette. 3) Click the reference line endpoint and move it. 4) Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The wall is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. Note: Multiple Walls, Lines and Arcs with overlapping endpoints can all be stretched at the same time with the Stretch menu command, or by using the Marquee. For more information, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. When using the pet palette: 1) Select a wall. 2) Click one of the walls reference line endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the stretch icon.

Click to define the new endpoint. You can stretch a curved wall by using a special angular or radial stretch commands. See Stretching Curves.

414

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To stretch a Trapezoid wall, you can use the special Stretch Trapezoid Wall command from the pet palette: this will increase/decrease the width of the wall proportionally as you stretch it from either end.

See also Stretching or Shrinking Lines; Stretching Objects.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

415

Interaction

Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns


Slanted walls and columns can be stretched and/or their slant angle can be modified with pet palette commands in 3D and Section views. (Columns can also be modified in Floor Plan views.) In 3D, you can: Slant a wall/column or change the inclination angle of a slanted wall/column by selecting a corner point (for a wall) or the center of the top plane of the column, and dragging it along the horizontal plane. (Use Modify Angle in the pet palette) Note: You cannot slant a wall whose reference line is centered. Stretch a slanted wall/column by moving its top or bottom edge up or down along the wall plane (Use Stretch slanted height for walls, or Stretch height with fixed angle for columns, in the pet palette.) Stretch a slanted wall/column vertically. (Use Stretch height in the pet palette.) As you change the wall height, the wall thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly.

In Section view, you can use the same functions. (Modify Slant Angle is possible only if the walls reference line is perpendicular to the section line.) In Section view, the Trackers Distance field provides a way to edit the wall inclination using its offset (e.g. Distance) value.)

In addition, you can edit double slanted walls: If you elevate the top or bottom surface of the double slanted wall, the angles of both lateral surfaces will change 416
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

If you elevate the height of one side of the wall, both lateral surface angles remain unchanged (and the top surface may be reduced to zero thickness)

The next two methods work on double-slanted walls in Section view only if the Section line is perpendicular to the wall. If you move the top surface horizontally, both lateral surface angles will change while the top thickness remains constant If you move one of the top nodes of the double slanted wall horizontally, the angle of the surface on that side of the wall will change as will the top thickness, while the opposite surface angle will remain unchanged.

You can modify the slant angle of Columns graphically on the Floor Plan as well as in 3D.

Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Slanted Column

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

417

Interaction

Modifying Beams
To stretch/shrink Beams using the pet palette: 1) Select a beam on the Floor Plan or in 3D. Note: Beams can also be stretched/shrunk in Section view, if the Beam reference line is perpendicular to the Section line. 2) Click one of the beams endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the appropriate stretch (or stretch length) icon:

Click to define the new endpoint. To stretch/shrink beams with the menu command: 1) Select a beam. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command. 3) Click the reference line endpoint of the beam and move it. 4) Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The beam is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. To modify the inclination (slant) angle of an inclined beam, select it on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. Choose the Modify Angle command from the Pet Palette. Drag the beam graphically to the desired inclination angle.

418

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Modifying Complex Profile Elements


Profile Walls, Columns and Beams have special stretch and rotate commands in the pet palette.

Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

419

Interaction

Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements


Move Polygon Node
To move a node of a selected polygon (including a polygonal wall), click the node and use the pet palettes Move node option.

The two neighboring edges will follow the stretching movement and the shape of the polygon will change accordingly.

Offset Polygon Edge


To apply an offset on a whole side of a selected polygon, click an edge and use the pet palettes Offset edge option. This will stretch the neighboring edges. This offset feature is available for chained elements as well as polygons. Selected elements will be treated temporarily as a polygon, and all polygon reshaping pet palette options will be available.

In the example below, the chained Wall on the right needs to be moved a bit further away while keeping its connection to the two horizontal Walls. Select all three Walls, click anywhere on the edge of the Wall on the right and choose the appropriate icon from the pet palette. Click when you are satisfied with the new distance.

420

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

When you offset a segment of a polygon perpendicularly, new segments are correspondingly created. This can be useful, for example, when tracing a terrace.

Offset All Polygon Edges


For polygonal and chained elements only, there is a graphic offset option available in the pet palette.

Select the polygon, and click a node (or reference line endpoint). Choose the offset option in the pet palette.

A ghost contour of the proportionally increased or reduced polygon follows the movements of the cursor. Click when you are satisfied with the new polygon size.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

421

Interaction

Adding and Subtracting Polygonal Shapes


You can use the pet palette to add to the shape of a polygonal element, or subtract new polygons from it. To add a new polygon to the existing one: Select the polygon and click it either on an edge or a node. From the pet palette, choose the icon with the + sign (Add to Polygon).

Draw the new polygon shape. It must intersect with the selected one or at least they should have a common edge.

Click to finish drawing the new shape, which will be automatically added to the original one.

422

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

The process is the same for subtracting a shape from a polygon, but you will choose the icon with the - sign (Subtract from Polygon).

You can also use the Magic Wand for adding/subtracting a polygon shape. See Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

423

Interaction

Stretching with the Marquee Tool


You can stretch multiple polygons or linear elements along a particular vector by using the Marquee tool. To stretch elements inside a Marquee area: Draw a Marquee so that the nodes or endpoints you want to stretch fall inside the Marquee. Any nodes you want to keep intact should be outside the Marquee. Define a stretch vector: with the Marquee tool active, click on a node or endpoint inside the Marquee area, then click on a second point. Alternatively, choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command, and then define the stretch vector by clicking any two different points. The shape of all linear elements that have one of their endpoints inside the Marquee area, and polygonal elements that have nodes inside the marquee area, will be stretched along this vector. Note: If you dont want to stretch an element whose node is inside the Marquee, lock the element (select it, then use Edit > Locking > Lock; or lock the elements layer.).

If all the nodes of a polygon are inside the Marquee area, the polygon will be dragged instead of stretched. Stretching nodes in a Marquee area is not available in the 3D Window. Columns, Objects and Lamps cannot be stretched with the Marquee. If any of their hotspots fall inside the Marquee area, the whole object/column will be dragged along when the Marquee area is repositioned. When stretching Arcs or curved Walls with the Marquee, their central angle (i.e. the arc/ chord ratio) will remain unchanged.

424

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Stretch Height
In the 3D, Section/Elevation and IE windows, you can modify the height of selected elements graphically with Stretch height command of the pet palette.

Click a node of a selected element and choose the vertical stretch icon in the pet palette. A ghost contour of the element follows the cursor. Click to set the new height of the element.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

425

Interaction

Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements


The Edit > Reshape > Resize command lets you enlarge or reduce selected elements using numeric or graphical input. This feature is available only in the Floor Plan and 3D windows, and - for 2D drawing elements only - in the Section/Elevation, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Resize dialog box offers additional options for resizing the thickness of Walls/Columns, GDL Objects, text elements, arrowheads and markers. 1) Select the elements you wish to transform and choose Resize.

2) In the appearing dialog box, enter a value into any one of the resize ratio fields. (Make sure the Define graphically checkbox is unchecked.)

Resize ratio: Use any one of the three ways to define the resize ratio you want. (If you enter a value in one field, the other two will be filled in automatically.) Resize wall, column thickness: For walls, columns and beams, the thickness will be resized as well as the length/height. Resize library parts: Any selected library parts will be resized. Resize all text entities: All texts and labels are resized. Resize all arrows and markers: The size of all arrows/markers are modified. 3) Click OK.

426

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

4) Click in the window to define which point or edge of the elements should remain in its original location. The transformation will be executed.

To perform the operation graphically: 1) Open the Resize dialog box. 2) Check the Define Graphically checkbox. 3) Draw a transformation vector to define both the resizing ratio and the location of the resized elements. Note: Resizing does not affect grouped elements. To resize grouped elements, ungroup them first or choose Suspend Groups. (See Group Elements for more information.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

427

Interaction

Splitting Elements
You can split many selected elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, Slabs, Roofs, Meshes, Fill and Zone Polygons, Lines, Arcs, Polylines and Splines) along a line segment, arc or element edge. The Split command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. Note: You cannot split a polygon - such as a Roof element - with an arc. Note: You can split a Curtain Wall with another Curtain Wall, but you must use the Split Curtain Wall command. See Split Intersecting Curtain Walls. 1) Select the elements you wish to split. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Split command.

3) Draw a temporary splitting line, or click on an existing Line, Arc, Wall or polygon edge. 4) Click on either side of the splitting line/arc/edge with the Eyeball cursor. Note: When splitting walls, the split takes place at the point where the splitting line intersects with the reference line(s) of the selected elements. 5) Elements on the clicked side will remain selected, while elements on the other side will be deselected. The selected group of elements can be edited in the usual ways. If the selected element is intersected by an element in several locations, the Split command will split the selected element at every intersection point.

428

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Splitting is also available in the 3D Window. You can split the selected element with a vertical plane into two segments. This feature works the same way as on the Floor Plan. The splitting line is drawn in the plane of the User Origin. Note: When no elements are selected, the Split command will let you split a wall at the clicked location along any of its sides or reference line.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

429

Interaction

Adjusting Elements
Use the Adjust command to extend or trim the endpoints of selected Walls, Beams, Arcs and Lines to a Line, Arc segment or element edge. 1) Select the elements you wish to adjust. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Adjust command. 3) Draw a line segment, or click an existing line, wall, polygon edge or arc/circle. The endpoints of the selected walls and lines will be adjusted (lengthened or shortened) to meet the drawn or clicked line or curve. Only those elements will be affected that intersect (or would intersect) with the chosen line/arc/edge.

The Adjust command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. In 3D view, you can adjust the selected Wall or Beam to a vertical plane.

Split and Adjust Shortcut


A simple shortcut lets you adjust short elements and split long ones by the same edge. 1) Select all the elements that you wish to split or adjust. The active tool must be one of those that created the selected elements.

2) Press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key and click the edge you wish to use for splitting/adjusting.

3) The operation is immediately performed. All transformed elements will remain selected.

430

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Intersect Two Elements


You can intersect two selected Lines, Walls or circular or elliptic Arcs with each other by having them meet at their endpoints nearest point. 1) Select the two elements (they must be of the same element type). 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Intersect command.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

431

Interaction

Create a Fillet or Chamfer


Use the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command to fillet or chamfer the intersection of two straight lines or walls, or the corner(s) of a polygon element. To open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box: Select the two lines, or the polygon element. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, or if the selected element is a polygon, choose the Fillet/Chamfer icon from the pet palette.

Choose either Fillet or Chamfer: Fillet joins the endpoints of two straight segments endpoints with an Arc. Chamfer joins the endpoints of two straight segments with a straight segment, cutting off corners.

Enter a radius for the fillet/chamfer. (The chamfer does not have a radius, but it will be drawn as the chord of arcs of the specified radius.) Note: If filleting the arc with the current radius would extend any of the neighboring vertices, the radius will be limited automatically so that the filleting arc contains the closer neighboring vertex. Click OK. Note: The Fillet, Chamfer and Intersect commands are not effective on grouped elements, unless Suspend Groups is on (See Suspend Groups.) Lines are adjusted depending on whether or not they intersect; if they do not, a new length is determined in order to make an intersection or to meet the fillet or chamfer.

432

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Apply to All Corners


To apply the Fillet or Chamfer to all corners of the selected polygon, check the Apply to All Corners checkbox. Note: This checkbox is applicable only if the selected element is a polygon. It is not available if you have selected two separate elements. If you have selected a polygon and then the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, the checkbox is selected by default and uneditable; the fillet/chamfer will apply to all nodes. To apply the Fillet/Chamfer to a single node of the polygon, click on that node and use the pet palette command to open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

433

Interaction

Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s)


You can trim an element by simply removing the part extending beyond its intersection point with another element, or even cut out a part of the element between two intersection points. Trimmable elements are: Walls, Beams, Lines, Circles, Arcs, Polyline and Splines. Note: Trimming elements to a roof is a separate function in ArchiCAD. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof. To trim an element take the following steps: Choose the Edit > Reshape > Trim command, or press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key. The Scissors cursor appears. Move it to a trimmable element and click the segment you want to trim. Note: In the 3D window, you can also click on a Wall or Beam surface for trimming. The clicked part of the element between the two nearest intersection points will be deleted. For example, here we will trim part of the beam - the part that falls between the first two walls on the left.

434

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Adding Element Nodes


You can add new nodes to elements using the pet palette. Adding a node to a straight linear element creates an additional element. Adding a node to a polygon-type element increases the number of its edges. In the 3D Window, you can add nodes only to polygonal elements. To add a node to an element: 1) Select the element. 2) Click an edge of the element to bring up the pet palette. 3) Choose the Insert new node icon.

4) Click to define the location of the new node.

To insert a new node without moving it, double-click on a polygon edge. (The Insert node option must be active in the pet palette.) Note: You cannot add a new node to a curved element or segment; if you click Insert new node on a curved element, the curved element will be straightened out.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

435

Interaction

Move Nodes
With the Move node icon of the pet palette, you can reposition the node of a polygon type element.

The connected edges will follow. You can eliminate a node by merging it into one of its neighbors.

If you merge a node to a remote node (that is, not a neighboring one), the smaller part of the polygon will be deleted.

If repositioning a node eliminates one of the connecting edges, the other node of that edge will also be deleted, together with the corresponding part of its own other connecting edge.

436

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

If you reposition a node so that the polygon edges intersect each other (but no connecting edge is eliminated), the polygon will be split.

When repositioning a bent edges endpoint, the arc segment will be stretched in a way that its central angle (the arc-chord ratio) remains the same.

With the Fillet function (use the Fillet/Chamfer pet palette icon), you can replace a polygon node by a tangential arc whose radius can be set in the Fillet/Chamfer Radius dialog box.

For a detailed description, see Create a Fillet or Chamfer.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

437

Interaction

Curve/Straighten Element Edge


With the pet palettes Curve edge function, you can curve a segment of a straight element - such as a wall - by dragging its edge or reference line.

The resulting arc will cross the two endpoints of the clicked edge and the point that has been dragged.

Note: If the bent segment of a polygon intersects any of the other polygon edges, ArchiCAD will regularize the polygons shape, which may result in cutting the polygon into several parts.

To straighten a curved element edge, select the curved element, then select the Insert New Node command from the pet palette.

438

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Explode into Current View


Choosing Edit > Reshape > Explode into Current View will turn selected elements (Floor Plan and other 2D windows only) into basic elements (Lines without arrowheads, Circles, Arcs, Elliptic arcs, Splines, unframed Fills, single-line Texts). You have the option to delete or retain the original elements.

Note: If Autogroup is On, the exploded elements will be created in grouped mode. Note that exploding a construction element with the first option (Keep drawing primitives only) means that it no longer exists as a construction element. Consequently, it will disappear from other model views (model-type Sections, Elevations, IEs, 3D Documents). A third option appears if the exploded Drawing contains layers (that is, if it is a DWG file or if it is derived from an ArchiCAD view):

Keep Drawing primitives on elements original layers (Original layers are the same layer as the Drawings layer). If you uncheck this box, you may avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. After an Explode function, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. Some examples: Slabs, Roofs and Meshes are decomposed into lines Walls and Columns are decomposed into Lines and Fills (Doors and Windows inserted into Walls are also exploded). Doors and Windows (if selected without the Wall they are placed into) are decomposed like GDL Objects into 2D elements and are replaced by empty hole type openings.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

439

Interaction

Dimensions are decomposed into Lines, Texts and the basic elements of arrowheads (Lines, Circles, Arcs, Fills). Polylines are decomposed into Lines and Arcs. GDL Objects are decomposed into basic 2D drawing elements. Explode has no effect in the following cases: In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, cut construction elements cannot be exploded Section/Elevation/IE lines and Cameras Basic 2D elements.

440

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Create Element Duplicates


You will often need to create exact duplicates of a particular element. Often, the simplest way to duplicate is to use Copy/Paste. See Basic Editing Operations.

Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories


The Story Settings Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story. It is also easy to use graphical editing to drag, rotate, or mirror one or more copies of a selected element, or to use the multiply function. These are described in the following sections:

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies Multiply Elements

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

441

Interaction

Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies


You can also create exact duplicates of an element inside the same project by dragging one or several copies of the selected element. The selection can be made with either the Arrow tool or the Marquee tool. To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror one copy of an element, select the element and choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu.

Another way is to choose the plain Drag/Rotate/Mirror command from the pet palette, then press Ctrl (Windows) or Alt/Opt (MacOS). (This adds a small + sign to the cursor; press Ctrl again to undo the Copy feature). A copy of the selected element will be dragged, rotated or mirrored. Click to place the copy, which will now be selected instead of the original.

442

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To Drag or Rotate multiple copies of an element, select the element, choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu (or use Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Cmd + Opt/Alt (MacOS) as a shortcut). You will see a ++ sign appear. Click the element to drag or rotate its copy to its new position. You can place any number of copies. Double-click to finish placing copies.

Note: When rotating copies, they will all be placed along the same rotation axis. This feature works in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. In Section/Elevation/IE windows, the feature works on added drawing elements and Doors and Windows (dragging only). In Detail Drawings, you can use it on any drawing elements. In the 3D Window, Drag/Rotate/Mirror is available only for added Drawing elements.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

443

Interaction

Multiply Elements
If you need to create a number of identical elements inside the same project following a definite pattern, for example at equal distances from each other, use the Edit > Move > Multiply command, or the Multiply command from the pet palette. (In Section-type windows, you cannot create new construction elements, so the Multiply command is available only for 2D elements such as lines.) Multiply creates any number of exact copies of selected elements on the current story, using one the following methods: Drag multiplies the copies along a straight path defined by the reference line. Rotate multiplies the copies along an arc, using the angle specified in the reference arc. Elevate stacks the copies with a vertical displacement. Note that this option is grayed when working in a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. Matrix will place the copies of the selected element(s) to a matrix defined by two perpendicular reference lines. When choosing the Matrix option, you need to define the number of copies for both the first and the second stroke of the matrix. Two parameters for the vertical displacement can also be set.

In the lower half of the dialog box, set the following options: Number of copies: Enter the number of copies in the multiply operation.

444

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Vertical displacement: If you are multiplying an element in a 2D window, use this field to enter a value (if any) that is added to the elevation of each subsequent copy of the multiplied object, even during dragging, rotating or arraying the copies. If you want such a vertical displacement when multiplying the element(s) in the 3D window, click the Vertical Displacement: On radio button.

When you close the Multiply dialog box and then carry out the Multiply operation, you will define the vertical displacement vector graphically, as shown with this multiplied and rotated wall:

If you are using a vertical displacement (in either a 2D or 3D window) as part of the Multiply operation, the Set Home Story by Elevation checkbox appears: if you check it, newly created elements will be assigned a Home Story based on their respective story locations. See Set Home Story by Elevation. If you uncheck it, new elements will have the same Home Story as the original element you are multiplying.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

445

Interaction

Increment spaces the copies by an incremental distance equal to the length of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute spaces the copies evenly between the start and endpoints of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute-1 will also space the copies evenly between the starting point and the endpoint of the reference line or arc, but the distance is divided by the Number of copies + 1 and no copy will be placed at the endpoint. Spread will place the copies of the multiplied element to equal distance from each other along the reference line or arc all the way until the reference is drawn. In this case, instead of defining the number of copies, you set the spacing in length or in degrees between two neighboring copies. When you have defined your choices, click OK in the Multiply dialog box and perform the operation by dragging the cursor to the desired location.

446

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Drag & Drop


The Drag & Drop technique is familiar to both MacOS and Windows users as a shortcut for opening files or for copying and pasting elements of different types into Windows of the same application or between applications. Since ArchiCAD has many different Window types, the smart implementation of Drag & Drop allows you to copy elements from Windows by pasting data in the receiving Window. You can also drag & drop GDL Objects (Library Parts) from GDL Object Web Plug-in enabled web pages directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or to the Embedded Objects list of the Library Manager dialog box. Data can only be dropped into a Window if the receiving Window can accommodate the dragged data type.

Dragging and Dropping Text


The following possibilities exist for transferring text: From any ArchiCAD Text Window or from a Text Window of any other Drag & Drop-capable application to any other ArchiCAD Text Window From any Text Window to any 2D Window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Library Part 2D Symbol) with the default parameters Moving or copying text within the same Text Window Creating text type clipping files in the File Manager Pasting clipping files into a text type Window Dropping plain text files into a text type Window (with some restrictions)

Dragging and Dropping Drawings


The easiest way to add a Drawing from an external ArchiCAD file is to open the external project structure in the Navigator, select a View or Drawing in the Navigator, and drag it onto the Layout in the Layout Window of the current project. For more information, see Placing Drawings Onto the Layout.

Dragging and Dropping Pictures


The following possibilities exist for transferring picture type data: Dropping a picture file into a GDL Object Preview Window Dropping a picture file into the Floor Plan to paste it as a Figure Creating picture type clipping files in the MacOS Finder Pasting clipping files into the GDL Object Preview Window

Dragging and Dropping GDL Object Files


You can drag and drop GDL Object files from the MacOS Finder or the file manager directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or the Embedded Objects folder of the Library Manager.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

447

Interaction

Dropping an Object into the Floor Plan activates the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and the newly placed element becomes the default element for the given Object type. It is possible to place several GDL Objects at the same time using Drag & Drop. Windows and Doors can only be dropped into a Wall.

Dragging and Dropping Floor Plan Elements


If there is a selection on the Floor Plan defined either with a marquee area or through individual selection with the Arrow, pressing the mouse button and dragging the cursor out of the ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window will initiate a Drag & Drop operation. The following can be copied: Floor Plan elements (in module format) Selected elements on the Floor Plan in picture format (for example, into the Project Preview Window) The 2D and/or the 3D script of the selected elements in text format 3D GDL script is only generated if the drop is made into the 3D Script window. The 2D script of the selected element can be dropped into any other text type window.

Dragging and Dropping DWG/DXF Objects


Drag & Drop is available as a way to download DWG/DXF objects from the web. A special idrop technique is also available for Windows only. For more information, see Opening with i-Drop (Windows Only).

448

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Parameter Transfer
Use Parameter Transfer to: Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default Inject Default Settings to Placed Element Parameter Transfer is available: on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Document and 3D windows for most element types In Section/Elevation/IE and Detail/Worksheet windows, for drawing elements only You can also use a form of Parameter transfer between two library parts of the same type. See Parameter Transfer Between Objects.

Parameter Transfer Commands


Use the parameter transfer shortcuts: Pick Up Parameters: Alt Inject Parameters: Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS) Parameter Transfer commands are also available in the Standard Toolbar and at Edit > Element Settings > Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters.

Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another


Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to transfer. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 5) Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. Note: It makes no difference whether the eyedropper icon is full or half-full, as long as it is not empty.

6) Click the element. 7) Now move your cursor to the element to which you want to transfer these parameters.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

449

Interaction

8) Press Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) cursor.

9) Click to transfer the parameters.

Notes: The transferred attributes will also be loaded into the Find & Select Palettes corresponding fields, provided that the Find & Select Palette is open during the parameter transfer. (See Find and Select Elements.) The transferred parameters will be the default choices when opening any of the corresponding Attributes dialog boxes (Line Types, Pens & Colors, Fill Types, Materials, Composites, Zone Categories).

Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default


1) Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to pick up. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 2) Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. The clicked elements parameters are now the Tools default settings. The next such element you place will use these settings.

Inject Default Settings to Placed Element


1) Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to change to the default settings. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 2) Press CTRL+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) icon.

450

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

3) Click the element. Its parameters now change to the elements Default Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

451

Interaction

Group Elements
To create a Group, select elements and do one of the following: Use the Edit > Grouping > Group command Use the shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd + G Click the Group command from the Arrange Elements toolbar.

Several groups can, in turn, be grouped together into a single higher-level group. Grouped elements can then be selected and modified as a group, (unless you temporarily suspend the group to allow editing of individual elements - see Suspend Groups). Grouped elements are distinguished by their large, empty selection dots. If you select several groups simultaneously, each groups selection dots will have a different color.

The following element types cannot be grouped: any of the Dimension types, Zones, Labels, Section/Elevation/IE lines, Cameras. Doors and Windows can only be grouped along with the Wall they are placed into.

Suspend Groups
You may need to perform only a single operation on a particular element in the group. In this case, ungrouping altogether is burdensome, since you will have to select all the elements again to recreate the group after you have finished the operation. The solution is to temporarily suspend groups by choosing the Suspend Group toggle icon in the Standard Toolbar, or at Edit > Grouping > Suspend Groups (shortcut: Alt/Opt+G).

(The Suspend Groups icon is also available in the Control Box.) By activating Suspend Groups, you can select and modify grouped elements separately. Activating Suspend Groups means that ALL groups are temporarily rendered inactive: single elements can be selected and edited individually, even if they are part of a complex group hierarchy.

452

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

To re-activate the Group function, just toggle Suspend Groups to OFF again. Note: To change the settings of a single element in a group without using Suspend Groups, use Parameter Transfer (see Inject Default Settings to Placed Element). This parameter transfer will affect only the clicked element, and not the rest of the elements in the group.

Ungroup
To make all elements constituting a group independent again, choose Edit > Grouping > Ungroup (shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd+Shift+G). Ungroup is also available from the Arrange Elements toolbar.) Clicking Ungroup with Suspend Groups ON will detach any selected elements from their groups and break down all groups into single independent elements, no matter how complex the nested grouping is. Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle OFF, for a selection consisting of lowerlevel groups, the selected group will first be divided into the sub-groups it comprises. Thus, you may need to repeat the Edit > Grouping> Ungroup command several times before an element can be selected and edited individually.

Autogroup
Edit > Grouping > Autogroup, a toggle command (shortcut: Alt+G), lets you group elements at the same time you create them (instead of creating elements first and then grouping them). The Autogroup toggle command is also available in the Standard Toolbar and in the Arrange Elements toolbar. If the Autogroup command is on, chained polygonal and rectangular elements (such as PolyWalls, PolyRoofs, etc.) will automatically be created as a group. Components of exploded elements will also be grouped. Autogroup is activated by default.

Operations on Grouped Elements


The following operations can be performed simultaneously on all the elements constituting the group: Selection The following Edit menu functions: Drag, Rotate, Mirror, Multiply Other operations (such as Unify and Fillet/Chamfer) can be performed on individual elements only, after the elements are ungrouped or the group is suspended.

Groups and Layers


Grouping elements does not change their attribute assignments, which means that each element remains on its own Layer. If some elements of a Group are in an invisible Layer: Elements on the hidden Layer will be invisible. When editing the group (by drag, rotate, mirror, multiply) elements on hidden layers will also change their position along with the rest of the group.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

453

Interaction

If some elements of a Group are in a locked Layer (see Lock/Unlock Elements): Elements on the locked Layer will be visible on the Floor Plan, but they will cause the entire group to be locked. The group will not be affected by drag, rotate, mirror and multiply. When selecting the group, all of its elements will be selected, but with grey dots. Use the Suspend Groups command to edit those grouped items that are not in a locked layer.

454

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Lock/Unlock Elements
The Edit > Locking > Lock command locks the selected items to prevent them from being accidentally modified. Locked elements can still be selected and used for relative construction; Guide Lines are still available; and you can pick up their settings through parameter transfer (see Parameter Transfer Between Objects). Note: Locking a layer will have the same effect - it locks all elements which are located on that layer. The Edit > Locking > Unlock command unlocks the selected item(s). With the Unlock All command, you can unlock all locked elements, even if they are not selected. You can also use the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar for these actions.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

455

Interaction

Display Order
When drawing a Project with ArchiCAD, overlapping elements will be drawn according to a specified stacking order. By default, elements are stacked in an order typically used in architectural drawings. By default, stacking order is determined by element classes, of which there are six. Regardless of the sequence in which elements are placed, those in the first class will be placed in the foreground, second class in the level behind it, and so on.

The element classes are in descending order of class: 1) Annotation (Text, Labels, all Dimension types, Zone Stamps) 2) 2D artwork (Lines, Circles, Splines, Hotspots) 3) Library Parts (Objects, Lamps, Stairs) 4) 3D structures (Walls, Beams, Slabs, Doors, Windows, Columns, Roofs, Meshes) 5) 2D polygons (Fills, Zone Polygons) 6) Figures

Display Order of Overlapping Elements


Overlapping within the same class depends on the order in which you place the elements, although walls with the same fills will display clean intersections. When selecting overlapping elements within the same class, you can select them in sequence using Tab. See Selection of Overlapping Elements.

Custom Stacking Order


ArchiCADs default stacking order is appropriate in most cases, but you may wish to place elements in a different overlapping position. For instance, for a Fill to overlap a 2D element or an Object, a set of commands in Edit > Display Order hierarchical menu or the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar let you override the default stacking order element by element.

456

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

On newly placed elements, the commands work as follows: Bring Forward: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all the unchanged elements of their own and any lower classes, but will still stay below the elements of higher classes. Bring to Front: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all other existing elements. Send Backward: On this command, selected element(s) will be overlapped by (sent behind) all the unchanged elements of their own and higher classes, but will overlap the elements of lower classes. Send to Back: On this command, selected element(s) will become overlapped by all other existing elements. Reset Default Order: This command restores the default overlapping order described previously.

Mechanism of the Stacking Order


Both the default stacking order and the customization commands are based on two ordering mechanisms: classes and stack levels. ArchiCAD places elements in 14 stack levels. Each level can contain any of the element types. The final stacking order you see on screen and on printouts is based on stack level and element class. All elements on a level will overlap elements on lower stack levels, regardless of class. New elements are always placed into the preferred stack level of their own class. Stack level preference is as follows: 1-4: Void by default 5: Annotation 6: 2D Artwork 7: Library Parts 8: 3D Structures 9: 2D Polygons 10: Figures 11-14: Void by default By default, the upper and lower 4 stack levels are empty. You can bring or send elements of any type into these stack levels with the Edit > Display Order commands detailed above. For example, bringing a Fill forward from level 9 to level 8, which is the default level of structures, means that the Fill will overlap all the unchanged fills remaining on level 9, but will still be overlapped by all the unchanged structures on level 8.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

457

Interaction

If you bring it forward again, it will overlap all the remaining structures. However, it will still stay below all of the unchanged Library Parts on level 7. This way, you can move it forward until it overlaps the higher levels.

Of course you can bring other elements forward as well, which will again overlap the changed Fill.

The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands move the selected elements until they overlap (or are overlapped by) all of the existing elements. This is not necessarily the 1st or the 14th level, which means that in most cases it will still be possible to place other elements above or below them. Text or Dimensions brought up to the top stack level cannot be overlapped. For example, if you want a Fill to overlap them, you will have to send the Text one level backwards. If you attempt to move elements forward that are already placed on the top level, or to move elements backward from the bottom of the stack, you will be alerted. When moving several elements placed at different stack levels forward or backward, each element will only move one level. When bringing to front or sending to back elements of different types, they will overlap (or be overlapped by) all existing elements, and will retain their stacking order in relation to each other. Zones and Fills are compound elements consisting of components of two different classes (Zone Polygons and Zone Stamps, Fills and their area texts). These two components always keep their order according to their classes, for instance area texts always overlap their fills. Although you can change their overlapping order separately, Fills and Zone Fills can never overlap their own area texts and zone stamps and vice versa, forcing the other component to move with them if necessary. The stacking order will be preserved on printer or raster plotter output. In DXF/DWG output, all elements will be transparent, meaning that hidden or partially overlapped elements will be entirely visible.

458

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Magic Wand
About the Magic Wand How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

459

Interaction

About the Magic Wand


The Magic Wand saves you work by finding and tracing a linear or polygon shape from among existing elements, and then generating a new element based on the polygon. The Magic Wand lets you create special shapes that are not available for that particular tool type or would be tedious to construct segment by segment. Since it creates polygonal shapes by nature, the Magic Wand will ignore geometry method settings (such as Rotated Rectangle) for the current tool. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. The Magic Wand works in both the 2D and 3D Windows and recognizes the following element types: Wall, Beam, Slab, Roof, Curtain Wall, Fill, Mesh, Line, Arc, Polyline, and Spline. (In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Magic Wand recognizes only 2D drawingtype elements). The Magic Wand recognizes elements that are locked, displayed from remote stories or a Trace Reference, reserved by others or outside your workspace.

How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings

460

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand


1) From the Toolbox, select the new type of element you want to create. 2) Activate the Magic Wand. Press the Spacebar, or click the Magic Wand icon in the Control Box to make it appear. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. The Magic Wand has three different shapes for identifying: nodes

edges

empty space and surfaces

3) Click the Magic Wand to find and trace a polygon shape. If you click on an edge or node, the Magic Wand creates a polygon by tracing that element and/or finding an element chain: it runs along that edge and traces the element chains whose endpoints fall within that edge.

If you click in empty space or on a surface, the Magic Wand searches for and traces the closed geometric area formed by the nearest elements (whether chained together or merely intersecting), and generates the resulting polygon.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

461

Interaction

You can refine the Magic Wand function by selecting one or more elements. In this case, the Magic Wand will only take the selected elements into account when searching for chained elements or a bounded area.

4)

The new elements are generated. The new elements are not linked to the originals and can be manipulated independently. If the original shapes are superfluous, you can delete them. If Offset or Multi-Offset has been activated, you can complete the offset function after the Magic Wand has created the new polygon. If you are creating a single Roof, you must first draw a pivot line and define the slope before creating the polygon with the Magic Wand. If you are creating a Fill with a custom origin, you will first generate the polygon with the Magic Wand, then draw the fill orientation vector. All of the characteristics of the new elements are determined by the current default settings of the corresponding tool. You should always check that these are correct either before or after using the Magic Wand, especially if the elements are intended to have a specific relationship to each other, such as a roof resting on a Wall.

462

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Using the Magic Wand in 3D


In 3D, the Magic Wand feature works as in the Floor Plan, but instead of using only the top view of the elements, each element is considered the way it lies in space. When searching for the contours of the new element, ArchiCAD will only look at the elements that are actually intersected by the clicked plane. The clicked plane is always the horizontal plane through the clicked surface point or through the User Origin (e.g., when clicking inside polygon walls or beams into space).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

463

Interaction

Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes


Instead of defining a new polygon, you can use the Magic Wand tool to add or subtract the shape of an existing polygon (of the same or a different element type). 1) Select the polygon from which you wish to subtract another shape. In this example we want to subtract a complex polygonal shape from a slab. 2) Choose the Subtract from Polygon icon in the pet palette. 3) Move the cursor onto the polygon that you want to subtract and activate the Magic Wand (press the spacebar). 4) Click to complete.

Verify that the operation has been performed by deleting or dragging away the other polygon or viewing the shape in 3D. Or select the polygon and note the contour around its hole.

Note: Drawing a polygon hole by clicking inside the selected elements boundary with its tool active is similar to subtraction, but it lets you temporarily create a self-intersecting shape. Subtraction always creates a valid shape. For more information, see Magic Wand Settings.

464

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Magic Wand Settings


Use the Options > Magic Wand Settings command to open this dialog box. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. With the two radio buttons on the right, you can choose between two tracing methods. Best Match: Curved segments (when applicable) will follow as best as possible the natural form of Circles, Arcs and Splines. Prefer Linear Segments: Only linear segments are used. The four radio buttons on the left allow you to choose from a set of options to approximate curves with linear segments. Deviation from Curves: Enter a value to define the maximum deviation of the polygon from the original curved element. Segments Along Arcs: Define the number of segments along an Arc. Segments Along Circles: Define the number of segments along a Circle. In this case, arcs will be transformed into a number of segments corresponding to the part of the circle they represent. Segment Length: Enter a value to define the segment length for transformations resulting in segments of uniform length. Note: If you choose the Best Match method and real curves cannot be created, ArchiCAD will try to approximate curves in the hierarchical order represented in this dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

465

Interaction

Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings
About Trace References Access Trace Reference Commands Show/Hide Trace Reference Choosing a Trace Reference Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference Move Reference Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying Rebuild Trace Reference Compare Reference with Active Trace & Reference Palette

466

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

About Trace References


In ArchiCAD, you can opt to display two different views concurrently in any model or layout window: the Active Content - the actual model or drawing you are currently working on (Active) the Trace Reference (Reference), optionally placed alongside, on top of or underneath the currently Active content. This acts as a kind of underlay, making it easy to compare multiple model views/drawings on the same screen. Any viewpoint, view or Layout can be a Reference beneath any active Model or Layout window: Typically, in Model Windows, you will use any of the following as a Reference: Floor Plan Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document Detail, Worksheet And in the Layout Window: Layout, Master Layout For example, you can draw a roof detail in a Detail window (the Active Content) while seeing the relevant wall section as a Reference. A Section shown as a Reference next to another Section:

A Floor Plan shown as a Reference beneath a Detail:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

467

Interaction

Any given window can display only one Reference at a time. However, as you navigate among your project windows, you can display a different Reference in each: The Floor Plan window has a single current Reference for all stories Each Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet, Detail, Layout and Master Layout can have its own unique Reference. Reference settings are saved along with the window (for example, each Section in your project can have a Reference of a different color and filter different elements). References are also saved with the project file. The Trace Reference is essentially a temporary editing aid that is tied to the currently active window. When using the Print command to output a model window or a Layout, you can opt to print the currently visible Reference as well. However, when you place a Drawing onto a Layout, the Drawing content will not include the Reference. The user can offset and rotate the Reference as needed, though logical default Reference settings for each combination of Active/Reference views will usually align them correctly for the particular context. On-Screen View Options affect the Reference just as they affect the Active. The cursor is sensitive to elements in the Reference. Consequently: You can use the Pick Up Parameters command (Alt +C) on Reference elements, then transfer the parameters to an element in the Active. You can use the Trim command, the Magic Wand, and snap points with elements in the Reference to edit Active elements.

468

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Access Trace Reference Commands


Reference-related commands are easily accessible from several points in the interface. The Standard Toolbar contains the Trace toggle icon, plus a pop-up list of related commands.

Right-click any eligible item in the Navigator and choose Show as Trace Reference to show that item (e.g. viewpoint, view, Drawing or Layout) as the Reference for the current window.

Use the Trace & Reference Palette (Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference) to keep the Trace commands on screen if you use these commands often, or if you use several of the commands in sequence. Use the View > Trace Options command.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

469

Interaction

Many Trace Reference-related commands are available from the context menu of an ArchiCAD window that shows a Reference: just right-click in empty space in the window, provided that no elements are currently selected.

470

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Show/Hide Trace Reference


The Trace button is a toggle command available in the Standard Toolbar. Click the button to show or hide the Trace Reference in the current window.

Click the sticky pop-up control of the Trace toggle icon to access Trace Reference-related commands.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

471

Interaction

Choosing a Trace Reference


Three item types can be chosen as a Reference: 1) Viewpoints. Any item in the Navigator's Project Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference Viewpoint will always reflect the current settings of the active window. 2) Views. Any view in the Navigator's View Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference's view settings are independent of the active window. For example, if you change the layer combination in the active window, the Reference wont change. If a view is deleted from the view map, its Reference is no longer available. 3) Layouts (and their drawings). To choose a Reference to display, do one of the following: Select the item from the Navigator and right-click to bring up its context menu. Choose Show as Trace Reference.

or Choose an item from the Choose Reference list. The Choose Reference list is accessible from: - the Standard Toolbars Reference commands

472

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

- the windows context menu Reference commands

- the Trace & Reference Palette

The Choose Reference list is dynamic - the appearing choices depend on the content of the active window, and the most recent/most logical Reference choices will appear in the list. Recent References are listed at the top Other relevant References, if any, follow. If the active window is: - Floor Plan: the Choose Reference list includes three possibilities that are relative to the current story, so that the Reference will change as you navigate among stories: Above or Below Current Story will always show the story above (or below) the current story as a Reference. Previous Story will always show the last story you were on as a Reference. - Model-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). - Drawing-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the relevant Model Section/Elevation. - Interior Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes all viewpoints of the IE group (if any), plus the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). - Detail or Worksheet: the Choose Reference list includes their source viewpoints. Note: Independent viewpoints (e.g. an independent Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet) have no model source; their Choose Ghost list shows the viewpoint itself. - Layout: the Choose Reference list includes the source view (if available) of the placed Drawings. Entire Structure Display: This option will display the current view/viewpoint as a Trace Reference in Entire Structure Display form.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

473

Interaction

Next in the Choose Ghost list: any Layouts containing drawings that originated with the current viewpoint. The chosen Reference appears in a predefined default position (appropriate to the type of the Active Content and the Reference item). You can move the Reference at any time. See Move Reference. If you choose a recent Reference, it will include any manual transformations (drag, rotate) which the user applied the last time he showed this Reference. All user-defined Reference-related parameters, such as the list of recent References and recently chosen Reference colors, are saved together with the project file.

474

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference


To set the color of the Reference and the visibility of elements on the Reference, first open the Trace & Reference Palette. (Use Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference, or choose Trace & Reference from the list of Trace Reference commands.)

Use the controls in the top half of this palette to set the References color and element visibility options. Change you make here apply to the Reference of the current window only. However, to apply the settings in this pop-up to all References in the project, click the Apply Settings to All References button.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

475

Interaction

Move Reference
These commands are accessible from the list of Reference commands; or from the Trace & Reference palette. Use this icon to drag the Reference to another location.

Use this icon to rotate the Reference.

Use this icon if you want to reset the Reference to its original default position after you have moved it.

Note: The same commands are available from the context menu by right-clicking into any window showing a Reference; and from the Standard Toolbars pop-up list of Reference commands. In the image below, a Section viewpoint is displayed as a Reference and rotated alongside the Floor Plan that contains the Section marker:

Drag/Rotate commands applied to the Reference will be reflected in the Tracker's coordinate data (coordinate data are calculated according to the Active's coordinate system, not the Reference's.)

476

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying
Elements on the Reference cannot be selected or edited. However, by switching the Reference and Active views temporarily, you can select and edit elements in the Reference. For example, you can use the Switch Reference with Active command if you need to paste certain Reference elements into the Active view: 1) First, use the Switch Reference with Active command (from the list of Trace Reference commands, or the Trace & Reference palette.)

This changes the Reference into the Active (now you can edit its elements), and the Active into a Reference. Note: This command is not available if a Drawing Section is active and its own Model-based Section is the Reference. 2) Select, edit and/or copy the required elements. 3) Once again, use the Switch Reference with Active command and return to the original Active content. 4) If you copied elements to the clipboard, now you can paste these into the Active. This workflow can be used, for example, if you are working in a Worksheet window, while the Floor Plan model has changed. To update your Worksheet, display the Floor Plan as the Reference, identify the differences, switch Reference with Active, copy the updated parts you need, switch Reference and Active (again), and paste into the Worksheet window. Note: When pasting into a drawing-type window (such as a Worksheet), construction elements will be exploded into their 2D components.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

477

Interaction

Rebuild Trace Reference


Use the Rebuild command (available from the Trace & Reference Palette or from the list of Trace Reference commands) to rebuild the Reference to reflect any changes in the source view.

The Reference will be rebuilt automatically as a result of certain other user actions, such as navigating to another window and panning inside a window. However, editing a model view will not automatically rebuild the Reference; you must use the Rebuild Reference button. Note the following: If the References source is a manual-rebuild model, then the Reference is rebuilt only when that model Section/Elevation/IE is manually rebuilt. Similarly, References containing manual-update drawings will be rebuilt along with the drawing. If the Reference is an Auto-Rebuild Model, it is possible that you make changes in the Active, yet these are not reflected in the Reference, even after you navigate or pan, because to avoid slowing down the program - you have unchecked Update Autorebuild Model Viewpoints continuously in Options > Work Environment > More Options. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed. If the Reference contains an Auto-update Drawing, such a Reference will not be continuously rebuilt, to avoid slowing down the program. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed.

478

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Compare Reference with Active


ArchiCAD provides several functions to help you identify and understand differences between the Reference and the Active content, especially when the Reference is on top of the Active content, or vice versa, and you need additional help to see the differences clearly. The best way to compare the two will depend on your particular task. You can use several of these functions at the same time to get the most accurate information. All the Compare functions can be used on the fly while editing your Active content. They are on-screen only functions, with no effect on output. To access these functions, open Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference.

For details on each control, see Trace & Reference Palette. Each of the techniques below can be useful in visually comparing the Reference with the Active. Try them out to see which works best.

Tip 1: Use Separate Colors for Active and Reference


You can set separate display colors for the Reference and the Active content: a custom color for each, or else retain the original colors. You may want to set two sharply different, custom colors for each of the views - say, red and blue - to make it easy to distinguish one from the other. To set the colors, use the pop-up icons (one each for Reference and Active) in the middle of the Palette.

Note: Even if youve set separate colors, the background fills of one view may obscure the underlying elements in the other view.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

479

Interaction

Tip 2: Make Fills and Zones Transparent


Note the Make Fills and Zones Transparent toggle at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette: activate this to make fills and zones transparent in both the Reference and Active views. This way you will uncover information that otherwise might have been covered up by a fill in the top view. This switch has only a temporary effect and does not affect the settings of the model elements.

Tip 3: Reverse Display Order of Reference and Active


When comparing the Reference to the Active, it may help to switch their display order. Click the Reference on Top button at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette.

If your Reference was previously underneath the Active, this command will change them around, placing the Reference on top of the Active.

480

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Tip 4: Optimize Intensity of Reference vs. Active


A simple way to make an initial visual comparison is to use the Intensity sliders of the Reference and Active. Note: This method works best if the Active is shown in its original colors, and the Reference in a different color.

Pull the Reference intensity slider back and forth. On screen, the effect will be to flash the Reference on and off, allowing you to identify places on screen where there are differences from the Active View. Then you can zoom in on these locations and analyze the differences.

Tip 5: Use the Splitter Bar to Turn the Page


This function is useful for identifying differences between the Reference and Active when they overlap. You will drag a Splitter bar across the window, with the Reference on one side and the Active on the other. The effect is like turning the page of an overlay to see what is beneath. To activate the Splitter function, click the Splitter icon from the Trace & Reference Palette.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

481

Interaction

Four splitter handles appear, one on each edge of the screen. Choose any one of them and move it in a perpendicular direction, to create either a horizontal or vertical splitter bar.

As you drag it, the content on either side of the splitter changes dynamically.

Once you let go of the mouse button, the splitter bar returns to its original position.

Tip 6: Move the Reference Over Temporarily (Displace Reference)


Use this function when you have zoomed in to an area where the two views are different, and you want to quickly check what is on the view underneath. Click the Temporarily Displace Reference button in the Trace & Reference Palette.

482

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Click in the window. The cursor changes to the familiar hand shape, allowing the user to nudge the Reference temporarily (i.e. to move it out of the way). Click again, and the Reference jumps back to its original position.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

483

Interaction

Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows


Why Consolidate? Linework Consolidation Fill Consolidation

484

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Why Consolidate?
Several ArchiCAD features involve the creation of exploded elements. Model-based Details, Worksheets and Drawing Sections create 2D elements (lines, fills) out of the model construction elements. Also, imported DWG drawings appear in ArchiCAD in 2D form, as a large collection of lines and fills. In these Drawing-type windows, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. Line and Fill Consolidation are separate functions and are executed independently of each other. Select the elements, then execute either the Linework Consolidation or the Fill Consolidation command. (Edit > Reshape > Linework/Fill Consolidation).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

485

Interaction

Linework Consolidation
In the window, select at least two line-type elements you wish to include in the Linework Consolidation process. Line-type elements are straight-lines, polylines, arcs and circles. Note: Linework Consolidation does not affect any line-type element having an arrowhead. The Linework Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation) brings up the Linework Consolidation Wizard. This command is also available from the Edit Elements toolbar.

Now page through the wizard (click Next at the bottom of every screen) and check the boxes of every Line Consolidation option that you wish to execute as part of the consolidation process. For details, see Linework Consolidation Settings. On the last screen, click Consolidate to execute Linework Consolidation. Following the linework consolidation, a report appears, listing the number of elements (if any) that have been deleted or merged for each type of line consolidation. At the bottom of this page, a checkbox gives you the option of using the simplified Linework Consolidations Settings (rather than the Wizard) the next time you issue the command.

486

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction

Linework Consolidation Settings contains the same options as the Wizard, but all options are accessible in a single dialog box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

487

Interaction

Fill Consolidation
In the current window, select at least two fills that you wish to include in the Fill Consolidation process. The Fill Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Fill Consolidation) brings up Fill Consolidation Settings. Check the options you wish to execute as part of Fill Consolidation.

488

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Virtual Building
ArchiCAD Model Views Construction Elements Parametric Objects Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs Custom Stairs with StairMaker Element Extras Model View Options On-Screen View Options Partial Structure Display

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

489

Virtual Building

ArchiCAD Model Views


About Model Views in ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window Stories Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan 3D Window Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) 3D Document Details Worksheets Managing Markers in ArchiCAD Interactive Schedule Project Indexes

490

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Model Views in ArchiCAD


You can approach the Virtual Building model from several different model views. Model views have two main uses. First, you will work in model views to modify the Virtual Building. Second, saved model views are the basis for creating architectural drawings (placed onto Layouts) for the final documentation of the Virtual Building. As you will see, each model view shows a very different aspect of the same Virtual Building. In 3D perspective, you see the Virtual Building as it will look when actually constructed. In Floor Plan, the Virtual Building is shown as a two-dimensional blueprint. In the Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation (IE) windows, elements are generated from the 3D model; you cannot create new model elements here, but you can view and modify them. The 3D Document window is generated from the 3D window, but is a a 2D-type document that allows for annotations and dimensions, and can display the sections of composite elements in their 3D aspect. In the model window known as the Interactive Schedule, the Virtual Building is expressed in lists and figures - here, too, your input will modify the Virtual Building and can be output as documentation. When you work on each of these aspects of the model, you are working on a viewpoint. You can navigate among them, and save them as views. For more information, see Project Workflow in the Navigator. The available commands and functions vary depending on the window that is active. Every time you activate a window, its contents are rebuilt to reflect any modifications you made to the plan. The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

491

Virtual Building

You can have only one Floor Plan and one 3D window open at a time. While it is possible to keep several windows open for other types of viewpoints(e.g. several Section/Elevation/IE windows), by default ArchiCAD will open subsequent viewpoints in existing windows, replacing the previous one. To open a new viewpoint in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.

If you would rather open a new window each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options:

You can pan and zoom the window within the full drawing space to obtain the best view of the work you are currently doing, by using the shortcut icons next to the bottom scrollbar or the commands of the View > Zoom menu. For more information, see Navigation. To maximize working space, use the Window > Full Screen command to have your active window, including palettes, occupy the entire workspace on your monitor. The Window > Full Screen & Hide All Palettes does the same, without showing any palettes.

492

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Floor Plan Window


The Floor Plan Window is the basic construction area where most editing operations take place. It shows a representation of the current project as a traditional architectural drawing. When you start ArchiCAD, the first window you see is the Floor Plan. Each story of the Virtual Building has its own Floor Plan. ArchiCAD gives you the freedom to replicate 3D-like aspects of construction elements in the Floor Plan window, using Cut Plane settings and element-level display and projection options. These options let you visualize parts of multi-story elements that are located on a different floor plan, or to project parts of the element that are above or below the cut plane. See the sections below for how these options work. Note, however, that these Floor Plan projections are not true 3D projections, but rather symbolic depictions. Consequently, the display and, especially, automatic intersection of complex or multi-story elements (on the Floor Plan only) may have some limitations in replicating the true model. The visibility and accessibility of elements on the Floor Plan depends on: chosen options in the elements Tool Settings dialog box, including multi-story display and projection settings;

the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting); Layers. The elements Layer Settings (elements on invisible layers will not be displayed; elements on locked layers cannot be edited). Modifications to the model in the Floor Plan window will be updated accordingly in the 3D, Detail/Worksheet and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. The converse is also true: changes made in other windows are automatically displayed on the Floor Plan when activated. The updates can take place either manually or automatically depending on the Detail or Section/Elevation/IE update settings you choose. For more information, see Updating Sections and Updating the Detail Window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

493

Virtual Building

Stories
About Stories Set Home Story Show On Stories Navigate Among Stories Defining Story Display in 3D Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE Create or Delete Stories Story Settings Dialog Box Story Level Lines

494

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Stories
Stories in ArchiCAD, just as in real buildings, serve to divide space vertically and replicate the story structure of your real building. Stories are typically used for drawing each Floor Plan of multistory structures separately. Each story in the project is displayed, by name and number, in the Navigators Project Map. Double-click on the story name to display it in the Floor Plan window. The current Story name appears in the title bar of the Floor Plan Window.

The elevation (or relative base height) of construction elements placed in 2D windows are calculated relative to a chosen Story: either the elements defined Home Story, or the current story. (See the Base Height setting in the Settings dialog box of construction elements, as in the following image.)

For more information, see Set Home Story.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

495

Virtual Building

Navigate Among Stories


To navigate among stories, do one of the following: In the Navigator Project Map, double-click the Story you wish to open. Activate a story from the Story Settings Dialog Box at Design > Story Settings: click on its name, then click OK to close the dialog box and display the selected story on the Floor Plan. Use predefined keyboard shortcuts to jump among stories Use the Mini-Navigator (see below)

Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator


Use the story shortcuts located in the predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar.

Go Up a Story activates the Story above the current one on the Floor Plan. Go Down a Story takes you to the Story below the current one. If you attempt to go to a story that does not exist, the Create New Story dialog box appears.

The Go To Story command in the Mini-Navigator toolbar opens a dialog box allowing you to jump directly to an existing Story and provides you with a range indicator of how many Stories currently exist. If you enter a Story number outside the existing range, the field will revert to the top or bottom Story of the valid range.

496

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Defining Story Display in 3D


In the 3D window, all Stories are projected by default, but you can limit the projection using the Stories to Show in 3D controls at View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D. Choose the range of stories you wish to display in 3D.

The 3D Window always displays the range of Stories defined in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D, and there is no visual clue as to which elements belong to which story. The Trim Elements to Story checkbox (in the same dialog box) means that the model will be clipped at the story range boundaries. If this box is not checked, the model will not be clipped, and all elements that fall at least partially inside the story range will be displayed. The story display in the 3D window, as set in the Filter Elements dialog box, will naturally affect the 3D Documents that are created from this 3D source. For more information, see Filter Elements in 3D.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

497

Virtual Building

Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE


In Section/Elevation/IE views, you define a vertical range that can include entire Stories or only parts of them. Also, Story Level Lines can be optionally displayed in these views.

Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE

498

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create or Delete Stories


Use the Design > Story Settings Dialog Box to create and delete stories. Story Settings and story-related commands are also available: from the context menu if you have selected a Story in the Navigators Project Map or View Map.

from the Mini-Navigator. See Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator.

Create a New Story


1) Go to the Design > Story Settings Dialog Box.

2) Click Insert Above or Insert Below to insert a new story above or below the story name selected in the dialog box list. Alternatively: 1) Select a Story in the Navigators Project Map. 2) Use the context menus Create New Story command.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

499

Virtual Building

3) In the appearing dialog box, type a name for the new story. 4) Click an option for where the new story should be placed in the project structure: Insert Above: The story will be inserted above the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). Insert Below: The story will be inserted below the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). 5) Click OK. The new story appears above or below the selected story. The numbering is automatically updated. There is no limit to the number of stories.

Create New Story from the Mini-Navigator Toolbar


If you choose the Mini-Navigator toolbars Go up a Story/Go Down a Story command, and that story does not exist, the Create New Story Dialog Box appears, where you can add Name, Elevation and Height to Next values for the new story.

Copy/Move Elements Between Stories


When creating a new Story, you may wish to copy elements onto it which already exist on another Story. Go to Design > Edit Elements by Stories, or right-click a Story in the Navigator Project Map. (If this command is not available, use the Work Environment Menu Customization Dialog Box to add it to any menu.) In the appearing dialog box, use the commands to Cut, Copy, and/or Paste all elements or selected element types from one story to another.

For more information, see Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box.

500

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Story Level Lines


Story Level Lines indicate the vertical location of stories in Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. Story Levels can be set to appear in Section/Elevation/IE views. In this case, each story level line included in the Section/Elevation/IE range will appear in the window. The story line markers are library parts. The Story Marker parameters and position can be edited in Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see Section Story Levels Panel

Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE


For each individual Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, you can hide, show and/or output Story Level Lines. To set these options, open the Section/Elevation/IE Settings Dialog box, go to the Story Levels panel, and use the Show Story Levels pop-up.

Note: It is possible to turn off story level line display on a story-by-story basis. Go to Design > Story Settings, and for any selected story, uncheck the Story Level Line box. This storys level line will henceforth not appear in any model window in the project.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

501

Virtual Building

Edit Story Levels

You can edit the elevation of any given story or set of stories using Story Editing Mode: 1) Choose the Design > Edit Story Levels command, or the same command from the context menu that appears by right-clicking inside the Section window. 2) The Story Editing Mode palette appears. As long as the palette remains open on screen, you are in Story Editing mode and can move the story level lines.

502

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3) 4)

Choose a mode from this palette by clicking one of the four buttons: Adjust only the selected story Adjust the selected story and all stories below Adjust the selected story and all stories above Adjust all stories Move the cursor onto the Story Level Line you wish to move. The cursor will assume the Mercedes shape. (Make sure you move the cursor onto the line itself, not the markers at either end.) Click and drag the story level line to edit its elevation. 5) Click OK to apply changes and exit Story Editing Mode. The elements that are on the given stories will retain their elevation respective to their home story, as you will see when the view is updated after you click OK.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

503

Virtual Building

Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting)


3D construction elements on the Floor Plan (Walls, Curtain Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs) are displayed as if they were cut horizontally along a theoretical plane; this is the Floor Plan Cut Plane. The default height of the Cut Plane, measured from the base of the current story, depends on local architectural conventions, but you can set any Floor Plan Cut Plane for the current window using the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box. To set the Cut Plane, use Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane to open the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box.

Note: The Cut Plane does not affect the display of Mesh, Slab or Object elements, including Stairs. However, Stairs and other GDL Objects can be programmed to display themselves according to the Floor Plan Cut Plan Settings. Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to Current Story. If you wish to display all construction elements in their entirety, on all stories (the default settings for construction elements), the rest of the settings in the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box are not relevant. The Relative Floor Plan Range and Absolute Display Limit - the other Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings - are only relevant if any of your construction elements are defined as having a limited projection. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are global; the current settings apply to all the stories of the project. Once you set the global Floor Plan Cut Plane, you can further fine-tune the Floor Plan display of individual construction elements (Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs only) in their element Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.

504

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Set Separate Floor Plan Cut Planes in Different Views


For every view, you can define a unique Floor Plan Cut Plane, if required, using the Floor Plan Cut Plane controls accessible from View Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

505

Virtual Building

How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan


While the current Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are applied globally to the whole project, you can set a separate display preference for each individual construction element. The settings described below (Home Story, Show on, Floor Plan Display and Show Projection) are found in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box.

Set Home Story Show On Stories Define Elements Floor Plan Display Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings

506

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Set Home Story


Each construction element and object-type element has a Home Story. In the Geometry and Positioning Panel of the elements Tool Settings, or the Info Box, you can define its Home Story. Once you place the element, it will be linked to this home story. Most often, an elements Home Story is the story on which it is located. An element is located on a story if its reference line, reference plane or other characteristic point is located on that story, as follows: Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Roof: pivot line Curtain Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Beam: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Column: lowest point of its axis Slab: top surface of the slab Object/Stair: vertical location of its insertion point Mesh: location of its Mesh Reference Plane. (See Mesh Geometry and Positioning Panel.) The Home Story setting acts as a point of reference for: defining which parts of an element will be displayed (as defined in the Show On Stories control) defining listing criteria expressing an elements Relative Base Height (in the Relative Base Height field in Tool Settings) For example, you may have placed the base of a multistory wall on the subfloor, slightly below the current story level. Yet you want to measure its elevation from the current story, not the subfloor. In this case, you can define the current story to be the Home Story of this wall, rather than the story on which the walls reference line is located.

Home Story Controls


In each elements Tool Default Settings dialog box, or its Info Box, choose a home story setting for elements placed with this tool.

Current: The placed elements Home Story will be the current Story.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

507

Virtual Building

Select Story: Use this option if you want to tie the element to a particular story. Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project.

Choose a home story to which to link the element when you place it. The Home Story dialog always shows the home story defined in terms of the Current story, as in the image below.

Note: The Current story in a tools Default Settings will vary, of course, depending on the story you are currently working on. Note: In some instances, a new elements home story doesnt exist in the project. For example, you define the default home story as Current + 2 in a 3-story project; then you go up a story before input. Now, the Current + 2 story doesnt exist. In this case, ArchiCAD redefines the elements home story as the topmost story.

Set Home Story by Elevation


If you change a placed elements elevation so that it is now located on a different story, controls in the Tracker allow you to either lock it to a particular home story regardless of the elements elevation (as in the first image below)...

508

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

... or else let the home story change to match the elements new elevation, by setting the Trackers Home Story control to By Elevation, as in this image:

Similarly, you can automatically reset an elements Home Story as its elevation changes if you use the Elevate command, by checking the Set Home Story by Elevation box:

See also Elevating Elements. If you leave the box unchecked, the elements Home Story as set in the Tool Settings (Info Box) will remain in effect regardless of the elevation change.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

509

Virtual Building

Show On Stories
Use the Show on Stories pop-up in the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Tool Settings to control the display of construction elements by story. Choose whether to show the element on every story it intersects, or only on selected stories. The available Show on Stories options differ depending on the construction element, as discussed below. For a Wall, Curtain Wall or Column, you have the following options:

All Relevant Stories: The element will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. When available, this will be your preferred option most of the time. Home Story Only: The element will be shown only on its home story. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its home story, then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut, Outlines only, Overhead all.) For a Roof:

Home Story Only: The roof will be shown only on its home story. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its home story, then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut, Outlines only, Overhead all.) Home & One Story Up and/or Down: The roof will be shown on its Home Story, plus one story up and/or down. All Stories: The roofs outline - regardless of its actual location - will be shown on every story of the project. All Relevant Stories: The roof will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the roofs outline and fill. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the roofs outline and its fill. (Once you set these Custom Settings, use the Edit Custom option to edit them.)
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

510

Virtual Building

For a Slab or Mesh, the same options are available as for the Roof, except for All Relevant Stories (since there are no multi-story versions of these elements):

See also Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories. For Beams, the same options are available as for the Roof, except for Custom settings:

Objects and Stairs have a unique display option: One Story up and One Story Down. This way, you can opt to not display these elements on their Home Story at all.

Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories


For Slabs, Meshes, certain Library Parts and Stairs: The elements outline on remote stories will be displayed using the line type chosen in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

511

Virtual Building

Define Elements Floor Plan Display


Use the Floor Plan Display pop-up to display Walls, Curtain Walls, Beams, Columns and Roofs in one of several representations. This pop-up control is located on the Floor Plan & Section panel of the elements Tool Settings dialog box.

1) Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (e.g., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Note: Projected with Overhead is the default display setting for slanted or complex columns and walls, and for all roofs and beams. 2) Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. If you choose either of these projected options (Projected with Overhead or Projected), you can then further define the extent of the projection, using the Show Projection options. For more information, see Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection). 3) Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Some additional abstract display options are available: 4) Symbolic Cut: (Available only for non-slanted and non-complex walls and for vertical or complex columns.) The whole floor plan projection of non-slanted, non-complex walls or vertical (simple or complex) columns will be displayed as cut, using their cut line and cut fill attributes, regardless of the elements vertical position. This option is available only for simple straight walls or columns, or for complex columns, and only if the Show on Story control is set to Home Story only. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of these elements. 5) Symbolic with Overhead: This display option is available for Curtain Walls only. See Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel

512

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

6) Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. (Uncut attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.)

7) Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. (Overhead attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.) Note: When opening projects from an earlier format of ArchiCAD, the Floor Plan display of construction elements will automatically be set to predefined Floor Plan Display settings which correspond to traditional architectural standards for these elements. You can reset any elements Floor Plan Display setting as needed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

513

Virtual Building

Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection)


The Show Projection pop-up provides options for setting the range within which a multi-story element (Wall, Curtain Wall, Column, Beam, Roof) should be displayed. This control is therefore only available if the elements Floor Plan Display is set (using the Floor Plan Display pop-up) to either Projected or Projected with Overhead.

Entire Element (default setting): The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. However, you may prefer not to show the entire element. In this case, you have two other ways to set its display in the Show Projection pop-up: 1) by Relative Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it, and an optional offset.) If you choose this option, this element will be shown on the stories defined as the Relative Floor Plan Range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane. In certain situations, the current Floor Plan Cut Plane and Relative Floor Plan Range settings may conflict: The Cut Plane level may be outside the current Floor Plan Range (e.g. an extremely small story height as compared to the default Cut Plane level). In this case, the Cut Plane will be automatically relocated to the upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (or to its lower limit, if the Cut Plane would fall below the lower limit). The lower Floor Plan Range limit may be higher than the upper limit. In this case, the lower limit will be considered as both the lower and upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (which will also equals the Cut Plane level, as described in (1) above.)

514

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2) by Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. If you choose this option, then the Absolute Display Limit set in the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box determines this elements lower display limit.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

515

Virtual Building

Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings


Suppose your settings are as follows: Show on Story: Automatic This means that each multi-story construction element will be displayed on each relevant story of the Floor Plan. Floor Plan Display: Projected with Overhead This means that each construction element will be displayed in its entirety, its cut portion, its overhead portion, and its uncut portion, with the line types and pen colors you set in the dialog box for each of these parameters Show Projection: Entire Element This means that the displayed projection is not limited by either an absolute display limit or by a defined vertical range. Consider the following building with slanted walls:

516

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

As you view the building on its various stories, its Floor Plan appearance changes accordingly: although the entire wall is indicated on every story, the cut and overhead segments are different on every story.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

517

Virtual Building

518

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Non-Standard Projections for Construction Elements


In the example below, the structure is shown on 3 stories: the Curtain Wall is set to Projected with Overhead and Entire Element the mullions - made of columns - are Cut Only the round structural columns are set to Projected with Overhead and Floor Plan Range (on each story, only their relevant section is displayed)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

519

Virtual Building

3D Window
The 3D window displays your model in real perspective or axonometry: this gives the best overall view of what the final building will really look like, inside and out. In the 3D window, you can directly edit your model, and create new construction elements, in either perspective or parallel view, using any of the construction tools. The 3D window is directly linked to the Floor Plan and to the Section/Elevation/IE windows: any changes made on the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation/IE window will be visible in the 3D window and vice versa. All 3D Documents are derived from a 3D Window source. If you change the projection, the cutting planes, the zoom level or the selected/marqueed/filtered items of the 3D source window, you can redefine the 3D Document accordingly. Special navigation techniques in the 3D Window let you explore the model much more freely than in other windows. For more information, see Navigation in the 3D Window. The 3D display of individual construction elements is controlled by the options of the Model panel in their Settings Dialog box. General settings affecting the parameters for displaying the 3D window are in 3D Window Settings. The commands that affect the set of elements displayed in 3D are in the View > Elements in 3D View and the View > 3D View Mode hierarchical menus. These commands are also accessible in the 3D Visualization toolbar.

Open the 3D Window


To open or activate the 3D window, do one of the following: press the F3 key use the Window > 3D Window command press the 3D window control on the 3D Visualization toolbar or the Mini-Navigator toolbar.

520

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

use context menu commands from right-clicking on blank space in the current window:

The following sections provide details on working with the 3D window.

Show All in 3D Show Selection in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Default Display in 3D Filter Elements in 3D Save Contents of 3D Window as a View 3D Engines 3D View Mode 3D Projections 3D Navigation Extras 3D Cutaway Sections

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

521

Virtual Building

Show All in 3D
To show the entire model in 3D, regardless of any current selection, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show All option. This commands shortcut is Ctrl + F5.

The full model display resulting from the Show All command may be limited by filtering criteria as set in the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box.

522

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show Selection in 3D
For a 3D display of only the explicitly selected items, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command from any type of editable window. (Or use the 3D Visualization toolbar control for this command.)

If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. Show Selection/Marquee in 3D also works if you are already in the 3D Window and make an explicit selection there, then execute the Show Selection command. The caption of the 3D Window will include the Selection mention and the name of the home story of the selected element(s). If the 3D Windows content is based on explicit selection and you add elements to it, these will be preserved in the 3D Window as long as you continue to work in it.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

523

Virtual Building

Show Stored Selection in 3D


This command, also in the View > Elements in 3D View submenu, will display the last 3D view generated by the Show Selection/Marquee command.

524

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show Marquee Area in 3D


To show only the marqueed element(s) in 3D, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command. The caption of the 3D Window will include the Marquee mention. For more information on defining a marquee area, see Marquee Area. If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements.

Marquee Effect: By default, the elements inside the Marquee will be displayed and they will be cropped to the marquee area. However, you can adjust the Marquee effect to show the elements outside the marquee instead of those inside: use the Marquee Effect controls in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D, and choose the Outside Marquee radio button.

See Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box. To show the entirety of elements that fall partly inside the marquee - without cropping them uncheck the Trim Elements to Marquee checkbox (also under Marquee Effect, in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D).

Elements in a Marqueed 3D Window


If you create an element in the 3D Window which is delimited by a marquee, the new element will only appear in the 3D Window if you draw it inside the marquee area.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

525

Virtual Building

If you place a new element outside the boundaries of a Marquee-based 3D view, or drag an existing element outside the Marquee boundaries, that element will disappear immediately from the 3D Window. When you go to the Floor Plan, however, you will see the elements. Change your marquee area (or remove it) and return to the 3D Window to check it. If you select one or more elements in a trimmed 3D view, resulting from either a Marquee area or a 3D Cutaway, some elements will be only partially visible, but selection dots of the whole element will be displayed and all the nodes and edges can be found with the cursor.

If edited, a temporary ghosted image of the whole element will be visible.

526

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Default Display in 3D
If you simply switch to the 3D window, without using any specific 3D display command, the 3D window will display the contents last shown in the 3D window, irrespective of what might be selected in any other window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

527

Virtual Building

Filter Elements in 3D
Use the Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box command, then activating or deactivating the checkboxes of the different types. Only those elements whose checkbox is active will be displayed in the 3D window. If you are displaying a Marquee area in 3D, the Marquee Effect part of this dialog box provides options on what to include in the 3D window. The Stories to Show in 3D part of this dialog box lets you define a range of stories for display.

528

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode, and all other elements types in wireframe mode. To achieve this effect (a default setting in previous ArchiCAD versions), apply the predefined Show 3D Zones as Solid Layer Combination.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

529

Virtual Building

Save Contents of 3D Window as a View


If you save the contents of your 3D window as a view (see Saving a View), the 3D Only panel of its View Settings dialog box will provide feedback on whether that view is a result of a filter or a marquee selection. 3D view settings include: 3D projection settings (including zooming), filter elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D cutaway and photo rendering settings. You can redefine a 3D view by changing these settings in the 3D window, then use the View Settings 3D Only Panel to redefine the view accordingly.

530

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Engines
3D Engines are built-in configurations which control the generation of the 3D model in ArchiCAD. By default, two engines are offered: Internal 3D Engine OpenGL Engine To choose an engine, go to: View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings and use the 3D Engine pop-up, or use the Engine commands at the bottom of the View > 3D View Mode menu. 1) Internal 3D engine The internal 3D engine is most useful for working in the 3D window: views generated by the internal engine show vectorial patterns and are easy to print. It produces a simple, clean, navigable 3D view, without textures. The internal engine is optimized for simple, nonphotorealistic architectural representation, and for direct output from the 3D window without using photorendering. The internal engine features more visualization effects than OpenGL, but usually results in slower navigation and access to the model on most machines.

2) OpenGL engine The OpenGL engine for 3D is recommended if you have a high-performance OpenGL display card. Some effects, such as sun shadows, vectorial 3D hatching and saving the contents of the 3D window as a vectorial 2D drawing, are not available with OpenGL. Additional options for OpenGL can be accessed by clicking the Options button of 3D Window Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

531

Virtual Building

OpenGL is a bitmap-based technology. Consequently, 3D views created using the OpenGL engine will be placed as image files.

Important: Open GL is optimized for fast, smooth navigation during model development. It displays textures correctly, but features fewer model effects; it can be considered an interactive preview of the rendering. OpenGLs output capability is more limited than that of the internal engine, since it is based on bitmap technology. OpenGL will produce significantly faster on-screen navigation on most machines, provided that the supporting hardware is available. For more information, see Open GL Options.

532

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The following image uses OpenGL with the Transparency effect enabled in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

533

Virtual Building

3D View Mode
When using ArchiCADs Internal 3D engine, three 3D viewing modes are offered: Wireframe, Hidden Line, and Shading. They can be chosen from the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings dialog box or using the commands of the View > 3D View Mode menu. Note: When using the OpenGL engine, only the Wireframe and Shading modes are available. The icons of the 3D Modes are also accessible if you display the predefined Window > Toolbars > Simple 3D toolbar.

Choosing Wireframe mode creates a view showing all the edges and lines of your Project. Note that if you have many elements one behind the other, this type of view can be hard to interpret. In Hidden Line mode, those lines which are blocked from view by solid objects are removed. This type of view is the best choice for easy interpretation, if you do not want a shaded view. It is also suitable for hard copy output on a printer. Hidden Lines can be saved in many file formats, either as 2D or 3D files. Choosing the Shading method causes your 3D model to appear with all of its visible surfaces shaded according to the light direction set in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. The colors of the surfaces are determined by the material attributes of the construction elements (regardless of the color of light set in the Sun dialog box). Shading is recommended for: Fast on-screen feedback Easy checking of surface colors Any presentation for which photorealistic quality is not a requirement

3D Projection Settings Materials

534

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Projections
ArchiCAD can display parallel (axonometric) projections and perspectives. Axonometric projections automatically show the entire model in the center of your view. Perspectives are defined by a viewpoint and a specific target. When the 3D window is active, the 3D Navigator Preview Palette contains a miniature representation of the entire project view. This allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projection Settings, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric); you can adjust the view cone or change the axonometry while retaining an overview of the whole project. See Navigator Preview (3D).

3D Projection Settings
The View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings command from the menu or from the MiniNavigators pop-up menu opens the dialog box that contains all the controls you need to define the 3D view. The name and contents of the dialog box depend on the projection type: Parallel Projection Settings or Perspective Projection Settings. You can easily switch from one settings dialog to the other with the button at the top right corner.

The projections that you define in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box remain valid only until the next time you open the dialog box and modify them.

How to Switch Between Axonometric and Perspective Views


You can switch between the 3D Windows Perspective and Axonometry views by using the: Predefined shortcuts: Ctrl+F3 = Axonometry Shift+F3 = Perspective commands available from View > 3D View Mode:

3D Visualization toolbar:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

535

Virtual Building

Mini-Navigator toolbar:

Navigator Palette:

How to Store a 3D Projection


To store projections that you set up in the 3D Window, you can: Use the Save Current View command from the context menu of the Navigator palette. This will create a view (perspective or axonometric) based on the currently set up projection in the 3D window. The new view will be added to your Navigator View Map. Add the current perspective to your Project Map, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Place a Camera into the path command. A camera capturing the current perspective will also appear on the Floor Plan. Add the current axonometric (parallel) projection to the series of Pre-Set views, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Add Current Projection command.

Parallel Projection Settings Perspective Projection Settings Cameras Pre-Set Projections 3D Navigation Extras

536

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3D Navigation Extras
Other controls useful in modifying the 3D view are available from the View > 3D Navigation Extras (or a toolbar containing 3D window commands). These controls allow you to: Interactively set the target point for the perspective (Look to). Switch to a view perpendicular to a given point (Look to perpendicular). Reset the roll angle to zero to rapidly return from a bizarre view obtained during navigation (Reset Roll Angle). Return with a single command to a horizontal view of the model (Horizontal View). Edit pre-set projections and Add current projection: These commands are available if you are viewing an axonometric (parallel) projection. Put a camera into the path (for perspectives). This command adds the current perspective to the Project Map, if no camera is selected on the Floor Plan. If you have cameras on the Floor Plan already that define an animation path, the new camera will be added after the active camera in the active path, which is marked by its view cone on the Floor Plan. If you are in perspective view, with a camera selected, the following commands are also available from View > 3D Navigation Extras: Note: As you use these commands to change the camera selection, the selected item in the Navigator Project Map also changes accordingly. Go to the previous/Go to the next: Use these commands to navigate to the perspective views of the previous and next cameras in the active path, and to select the camera. Modify the selected: The selected camera will be updated to reflect the perspective view that you currently see in the 3D window. Use this when you have changed the view in the 3D window. Revert view to the selected: Discards all changes you made manually and shows the 3D model as the selected camera sees it. Insert a new camera after the selected one: A new camera is added to the path to define the current perspective view, and will be selected.

Cameras Pre-Set Projections

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

537

Virtual Building

3D Cutaway Sections
3D Cutaway is an imaging mode in ArchiCAD. With 3D Cutaway active, you can produce either ordinary cross sections or special sections to visualize the project in new ways. 3D Cutaway can be useful for special 3D visualizations allowing an insight into building spaces. The 3D section cuts you define are stored within the project document and can be recreated after opening the Project in a future session. Once the sectional 3D model has been created, you can save it in a variety of formats for additional work. 3D Cutaway settings will take effect in the 3D Document. Separate Model Display Settings for the 3D Document allow you to define materials for the surfaces cut by 3D Cutaway.

How to Create a 3D Cutaway


3D Cutaway works by applying cutting planes to the 3D model. These cutting planes are defined in the 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box. After defining 3D Cutting Planes in the dialog box, activate View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway. (To deactivate 3D Cutaway, press the command again.) If the View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway command is active, these cutting planes are applied to the model every time it is rebuilt.

538

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Sections
About Sections Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Open a Section Viewpoint Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Summary of Rebuild Commands Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

539

Virtual Building

About Sections
The Section tool is used to place a Section marker. The Section marker can take one of three different forms: 1) a source marker, which generates a section viewpoint 2) a linked marker, which does not generate a section viewpoint, but acts as a reference to any other view, viewpoint or drawing. 3) an unlinked marker containing custom text Note: An easy way to distinguish between source-type and linked/unlinked markers is to use the Highlight Source Markers option, which is activated by default at View > On-Screen View Options. See also Source Marker Highlight. Note: It is possible to create an Independent Section (with or without a marker), without using the Section tool. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. To generate a Section, you draw a Section line on the Floor Plan and place a Section source marker, which generates a new viewpoint in ArchiCAD. You can set this marker to display a variety of reference information - such as the first drawing that is created out of this Section viewpoint - for easy navigation and identification. Each newly created Section viewpoint is listed in the Navigator Project Map, in the Sections part. Elements in the Section viewpoint depend on the Section Status, defined in Section Settings. A Model Section contains editable construction elements linked and updated with their counterparts on the Floor Plan, as well as any 2D elements. A Drawing Section contains drawing primitives, which are not linked to the Floor Plan and do not reflect its changes. In the Section window, you can view and modify elements but you cannot create new construction elements. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy command to move a Door/Window, in a model-type Section window.) If you paste an element into a Section window, it will be reproduced as drawing primitives (points, lines, fills). Sections can be saved as Views and placed on a Layout as Drawings; the contents of a Section window can also be published directly. To place a linked or unlinked Section marker, use the Section tool in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail, Worksheet. Such a marker is a linked marker, and you can use it to link it to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. A linked marker is for reference purposes only. See an example at Place a Linked Section Marker. You can choose and format the Section Line and Marker object in Section Settings.

540

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

An unlinked marker can be useful in your published documentation, for example, if you want to refer (with a page number) to the location of an external drawing that is not integrated into the ArchiCAD project. See Place an Unlinked Marker.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

541

Virtual Building

Create a Section Viewpoint


Note: The creation process is identical for Elevations. To create a section with its source in the model, you must place a section marker on the Floor Plan. (This is a source section marker.) Note: Another type of Section viewpoint is the Independent Section, having no model source. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. 1) Activate the Section tool. 2) In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Create new section viewpoint is selected.

3) Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the Floor Plan.

Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. The Eyeball cursor appears. 4) With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the Section. The place where you click also defines the Sections limit line, if you have chosen a Limited horizontal range in Section Tool Settings.

542

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

5) The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed. (If you are placing a Section of limited horizontal range, the limit line is also placed automatically.) Note: Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Section viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. Other information about the new Section viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information, Model Display, and Story Lines - can be defined in Section Tool Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

543

Virtual Building

Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint


Note: This process is identical for Elevations. Use the controls in the General Panel of Section Settings to define the Section geometry.

Horizontal Range
An infinite Horizontal Range shows the full extent of the visible model from the Section line. A limited Horizontal range shows the model between the Section line and its limit, which is placed automatically. Once it is placed, you can select the limit line and move it, if necessary. A zero-depth range shows only the parts of the model cut by the Section line, at the cut location only. (For Elevations, there is no zero depth option.) For more information, see Horizontal Range (for Source Section markers only).

Vertical Range
A Section with an infinite Vertical Range shows all stories of the model. If you choose limited Vertical Range, enter the elevation values corresponding to the vertical range of the model you wish to include in the Section.

Editing a Sections Horizontal Range and Distant Area Limit


You can change the depth (horizontal range) of a selected section by moving the limit line: make sure that the Section tool is active, then move the line by clicking it and dragging to the desired position. You can also move the Distant Area limit line, if such a limit has been defined in Section Settings. Note: An optional distant area of your Section viewpoint, with separate colors/effects, is created if you check the Marked Distant Area box in Section Model Display Panel. The Distant Area limit line is then displayed as part of your Section. Both the Section limit line and the secondary distant line are on-screen-only elements. To show or hide the Section limit line (horizontal range) and the Distant Area limit line on the Floor Plan, use the toggle control in View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range. To change these line types/colors, use the control in Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. For more information, see Display of Marker Range Lines.

544

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Define Marker Reference for Source Marker


Follow these steps to define reference information for source-type Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. When placing a new source marker on the Floor Plan to create a viewpoint, the tools Default Settings gives you two choices for defining the Marker Reference:

the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint In other words, the marker will display information pertaining either to the viewpoint you are currently creating, or to the first drawing created from this new viewpoint. (First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book.) For example, the following Section has been defined to display the information of the first placed drawing created out of this viewpoint.

If you choose first placed drawing, and no drawing has been placed yet, the marker will display autotext (such as #DrgID), and once the drawing is placed, this autotext will be replaced by the relevant information. If you select an already placed source marker and open the tools Selection Settings or Info box, you have two additional choices, because the viewpoint may already have multiple drawings or views created out of it:

the selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected view

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

545

Virtual Building

Choosing either of these two options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the Navigator Layout Book or the Navigator View Map. Eligible drawings/views are available for selection (i.e., those which have been created from the selected Section viewpoint); other items are greyed and cannot be selected.

Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project's Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). See Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project. Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. The link information that will appear in the marker is previewed in the Reference to text field, as long as the referred item (such as a drawing) already exists in the project. Note: The same marker information is shown in the Marker Panel in the Section Settings dialog box.

546

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Assign Section Status


Note: The process for assigning a status is identical for Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. 3D Document status can be either Auto-rebuild or Manual Rebuild, but not Drawing. When creating each new Section, you assign it a status in the General panel of Section Settings. A Section can have one of three statuses: Auto-rebuild Model, Manual-rebuild Model, and Drawing.

Each Sections status defines the link between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan, and its rebuild method. In the two Model statuses (Auto-rebuild and Manual-rebuild), the window consists of construction elements; any changes made in a Model Section window can be updated in the Floor Plan window, as well as in the 3D window and in other Section windows, and vice versa. In a Section of Drawing status, construction elements are decomposed into 2D fills, arcs and lines. Changes made in this kind of window are not updated in other windows. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model. Construction elements are editable in both Autorebuild and Manual-rebuild Model status windows, but no new construction elements can be created within them, with the exception of duplicating existing Doors and Windows. Even by copying construction elements and pasting them back you can only obtain plain, additional drawing elements. Warning: Clearing a construction element from a Section Window of model status (either Autorebuild or Manual-rebuild) will also clear it from both the Floor Plan and the 3D model. Regardless of a sections status, you can add 2D graphics, annotation and dimensioning. For more information, see Updating Sections.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

547

Virtual Building

Model Display in the Section Window


Note: The controls for the display of elements is nearly identical for Elevations and Interior Elevations. Controls of the Model Display panel in Section Settings define the appearance (fills, contours, materials) of: Cut Elements Uncut Elements Sun and Shadows Marked Distant Area Boundary Contours in the Section window. The following are brief descriptions of these display features. All related controls are described individually at Section Model Display Panel.

Section Model Display Panel Story Level Lines

548

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Cut Elements
By default, cut elements are shown using their element-level line and pen definitions. You can customize the appearance of cut elements in a Section window by checking the Uniform Pen for Cut Elements checkbox in the Section Model Display Panel, then assigning the lines and colors, for the display of cut elements in this Section only.

Uncut Elements
These options in the Section Model Display Panel enable you to apply materials (shaded or unshaded) to the uncut elements shown in the Section window:

Sun and Shadows


The following section window is displayed with Vectorial Hatching on (as shown by the roof tiles) and with Vectorial Sun Shadow on (as shown by the shadow cast by the roof overhang.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

549

Virtual Building

Another effect is to display the materials of uncut surfaces in shaded mode - that is, to reflect rounded contours:

You can combine the two effects (cast shadows and shaded effect) in a single Section display:

See Section Model Display Panel for details on these controls.

Marked Distant Area


Consider the following Section line on the Floor Plan:

550

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Note that this Section includes the west face of the building, close to the section line, as well as parts of the far end of the building that extends northward. In this Section view, the close and distant areas are displayed identically, so you cannot tell which is which:

To differentiate the close from the distance elements, reconfigure the section so that it contains a Marked Distant area. To do this, check the Marked Distant Area box in the Section Model Display Panel and specify a different color for the contours of the distant elements.

Return to the Floor Plan and notice that a new line segment representing the Distant Area has appeared. Select this line and drag it as shown (select the section marker, then choose the icon shown in the pet palette to make sure you drag the Distant Area line, not the Section line):

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

551

Virtual Building

Note: The Distant Area line is a Marker Range Line. For information on its display, see Display of Marker Range Lines. Now re-open the Section. The distant elements are distinguished from the closer ones.

Boundary Contours
Boundary Contours refer to elements shown in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation window which extend beyond the horizontal limits of the Section (in other words, the entire element does not fit in the section window). Use Boundary Contours in the Section Model Display Panel to define the display of this boundary. Here, the left edge of the wall on the left does not fall within the section, and the displayed parts are shown as unfinished, without contours.

552

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

However, you can choose to display boundary contours - that is, to draw a line at the elements boundary as it is shown in the section, even though the element does not really end there. At Boundary Display, choose Uncut Contours to display these contours using the uncut pen chosen for these elements in their own Settings dialog boxes; or Override Contours to use a pen of your choice, like the blue dashed line in this example:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

553

Virtual Building

Open a Section Viewpoint


To open a Section viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator, or use a menu command. (View > Navigate > Sections > Open Section). Another way to open the viewpoint is to select the Section line on the Floor Plan and use the Open Section command from the context menu.

By default, each Section is opened in a single window, replacing the previous opened Section. To open multiple Section windows at a time, open each new Section from the Navigator, using the Open in new window context menu command.

554

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Section Marker


Note: This process is identical for Elevations, Details and Worksheets. Linked section markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing whose information is displayed in the marker. You can place a linked Section marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail. For example, you might create a Wall Section that functions like a Detail: First, place a source Detail marker in the Section window;

then place a linked Wall Section marker on the Floor Plan which is linked to this Detail.

This linked Section marker points you to the Detail of this walls Section. To place a linked section marker: 1) Activate the Section tool. 2) In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.

3) Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

555

Virtual Building

4) Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the plan.

Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. Note: The Staggered line option is not available for Elevations. The Eyeball cursor appears. 5) With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the linked Section marker. 6) The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed.

556

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker


Follow these steps to define reference information for linked Section, Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. For a new linked marker, or to redefine an already placed selected marker, you have these choices:

the selected viewpoint (i.e., the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the selected drawing (i.e., the drawing you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint (i.e., the first drawing created from the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. the first placed drawing of the selected view (i.e., the first drawing created from the view you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. Choosing any of these reference options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the relevant view of the Navigator (Project Map, View Map, or Layout Book). Choose the desired viewpoint, view or drawing. The chosen items information will be displayed in the linked marker. Thus, a linked marker can refer to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. If you are redefining a selected marker, click the Browse button to bring up the Define Marker Reference directory, and choose the item whose information you wish the marker to refer to.

Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project's Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. See Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project. After the marker is placed, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

557

Virtual Building

Place an Unlinked Marker


Follow these steps to place an unlinked marker with the Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet tool. 1) In Default Settings or the Info Box, choose Placed Unlinked Marker. Such a marker displays no linked information. 2) Define any custom text for the marker using the Custom text fields in the parameter list in the Marker Panel of the Settings dialog box.

3) Draw a line or boundary (depending on the tool) and place a marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; Worksheet; Detail; 3D Document.

558

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Section Viewpoint


Note: This process is identical for Independent Elevation Viewpoints. Independent sections, with or without a marker, can be created in some windows. These viewpoints have no model source; they are listed as Independent viewpoints in the Navigator. In an independent section, you can use 2D tools to create or add new content . Use copy-paste to transfer selected items from a Trace Reference into the drawing window in 2D form for further editing. To create an independent Section without a marker, use the Create New Independent Section command. This creates an empty viewpoint without a marker, but listed in the Navigator. This command is accessible: from the Section part of the Navigator Project Map. Right-click on this folder and choose the New Independent Section command from the context menu

or from the Document > Documenting Tools submenu or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map; the selected Project Map item (in this case, a Section) determines which kind of new viewpoint will be created.

If you wish this independent Section viewpoint to be linked to a marker, place a linked Section marker into the project and link it (Marker Reference to) to the existing independent Section.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

559

Virtual Building

Updating Sections
Note: The updating process is identical for Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations and 3D Documents. Each Sections status defines the link (and rebuild method) between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan. For further information, see Assign Section Status.

Updating an Autorebuild Model Section


An Autorebuild Model Section is linked to the Floor Plan model and can be edited interactively. If the Floor Plan has changed, a Section in Autorebuild Model status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen. Changes to existing construction elements in the Section window (including associative dimensions) will automatically be updated in the Floor Plan Window, and, when activated, in any other Section Window and the 3D Window. The update process works on construction elements only; 2D elements added to either the Floor Plan or Section window will not be reflected in the other window. If you are in Autorebuild status and you are editing elements inside the Section window, the rebuild function is continuous and immediate within this window. However, in large plans, continuous auto-rebuild can cause slowdowns. If you prefer that your Section window be rebuilt only when it is opened or brought to the front of the screen (the way it worked in ArchiCAD 9), go to the Options >Work Environment > More Options tab page and uncheck the Update Auto-rebuild Model... checkbox. If you nevertheless need to Rebuild manually, the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command is available. (The plain View > Refresh > Rebuild command, used to refresh 2D drawing elements, is not available for Autorebuild Model windows.) Note: Some complex changes to the plan (e.g., modifying a Library Part) do not appear automatically in Model Section Windows. For a Manual-rebuild section, use the View > Refresh > Rebuild command; for an Autorebuild section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model to see these changes reflected properly.

Updating a Manual-Rebuild Section


A Section having Manual-Rebuild Model status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command in the menu. In this case, any additional drawing elements you have added to the Section window will remain unchanged.

Updating a Drawing Section


Not applicable for 3D Documents, which are either Autorebuild or Manual-Rebuild type documents. To rebuild a Drawing-status Section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild. These commands refresh the view as a 2D drawing, fixing any potential temporary display errors. 560
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

For a complete refreshing of a Drawing-status Section window, choose View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model. This will refresh the contents of these windows to fully reflect the current state of the Virtual Building model. In the process, all 2D elements originating from the model will be removed and an up-to-date view will be generated. This means that any previous manual editing of this artwork will be lost. 2D artwork added to the drawing manually will be kept intact.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

561

Virtual Building

Summary of Rebuild Commands


The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. Additional Rebuild commands in the View > Refresh menu are available if the active window is a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, or a Detail or a Worksheet. Rebuild from Model: Use this command to rebuild the active window; this will refresh the window information to reflect modifications in the Floor Plan. Rebuild from Source View: This command is available only in the Detail and Worksheet windows. The following commands might not be visible in the View > Refresh menu by default. You can customize your menu (Options > Work Environment > Menus) to include these commands if needed. See Customizing Menus. Also, these commands are available from the context menu of the folders in the Navigator Project Map and View Map.

Rebuild All from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Section/Elevation/IE windows in your project. Rebuild All Model Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all the Section windows of Model status (either Autorebuild Model or Manual-Rebuild Model). Rebuild All Drawing Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Drawing-status Section windows.

562

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Display of Section Lines and Markers


Note: This information also applies to Elevations. To customize the attributes of a Sections line marker, use the controls in Section Marker Panel and Section Marker Head Panel.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

563

Virtual Building

Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines


Note: This process is identical for Elevations. However, Elevation lines cannot be segmented. To manipulate a selected Section line as a whole, you can use the Arrow tool, the Marquee tool, or Edit menu commands, as well as their counterpart commands from the pet palette. To change the length of a Section line, select it, then click the pet palettes stretch icon to stretch the line at either of its endpoints.

To break a Section line or line segment: Select the lines midpoint. Choose the Break Section/Elevation Line icon from the pet palette.

Click to break the segment in half, then move the newly created half-segment to a new position. Click to place. To move a segment of a Section line, select the Section Marker, then use the pet palettes Move Section line segment icon to move it.

To eliminate a break in a staggered Section line, select the Section line, then pull the break line (perpendicular to the Section line) out of the section range.

564

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Elevations
ArchiCAD has a separate tool for creating Elevation viewpoints and linked or unlinked Elevation markers. In contrast to Sections: Elevations generally do not slice through the structure, but rather create a cross-section view of the structure from a distant point. There is no zero depth option for the Elevations horizontal range. Elevation markers are conventionally different from Section markers; consequently, the Marker options in Elevation Settings vary from their counterparts in Section Settings. Unlike the Section Line, the Elevation line is an on-screen-only Marker item, and is not shown on the Layout. See Display of Marker Range Lines. In all other respects, the Elevation Tool works the same way as the Section Tool. To create an Elevation viewpoint, you must place a source-type Elevation marker on the Floor Plan. The resulting Elevation viewpoint has a Status (Model or Drawing) which determines its update process. The Elevation Settings Model Display Panel defines the display of the Elevation viewpoint, while the Marker and Marker Head panels determine the content and display of the Elevation marker. A linked-type Elevation marker, containing reference information only (without creating a viewpoint), can be placed in the Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Detail or Worksheet Window. Unlinked Elevation markers can also be placed. For more information, see the following topics: Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

565

Virtual Building

Moving an Elevation Marker


This option is available only for Elevation and Interior Elevation markers.

Select the Elevation line; the marker will be selected and will display a node. Click on this node and choose the Move Elevation Marker command from the pet palette, then drag the marker to the desired position. The marker will retain this position even if the elevation is dragged or rotated to a new position.

566

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Interior Elevations (IE)


About Interior Elevations Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint Create Multiple IE Viewpoints Interior Elevation IDs and Names Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation Interior Elevations and Zone Shape Display of Elements in Interior Elevation

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

567

Virtual Building

About Interior Elevations


ArchiCAD has a dedicated tool that is optimized for creating interior elevations of interior spaces.

Interior Elevations (IEs) work similarly to Sections and regular Elevations: choose an input method; define the view and its limits graphically; and place a marker with custom-defined marker reference information. Each Interior Elevation is a separate viewpoint in the Navigator Project Map. Edits made on an Interior Elevation can be reflected in the Model, and vice-versa: model changes can be reflected in the Interior Elevation following an update. Dimensions are associative.

Unlike the Section and Elevation tools, the Interior Elevation tool is used to create new viewpoints only; you cannot place a linked, reference-only IE marker. Note: As source markers, IE markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) An IE created using one of the polyline or rectangle input methods will have a separate IE view for each segment of the line; each view is created perpendicular to the segment.

568

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Since Interior Elevations are typically created in groups (e.g. four IE's created by placing a foursegment polyline around a single room), IE's are handled as a group for purposes of numbering, display, Trace functions, and placement on a layout. (Typically, you will use the Master Layouts Auto Arrange Setup options - in Master Layout Settings - to fine-tune the appearance of IE views on the Layout.) For more information, see Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout. These IE groups are automatically listed together in their own subsets in the Project Map. Each new IE viewpoint is assigned to an IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. You cannot move individual IE viewpoints from one Group to another.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

569

Virtual Building

Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint


Draw the IE limit line using the single line method to create a single IE viewpoint.

1) 2) 3) 4)

Note: In contrast to Sections/Elevations, when creating an Interior Elevation you start by defining the limit of the view (e.g. the wall you want to see), then click to define view line (the place from which you view the wall). Click once to begin the limit line. Click a second time to complete the line. Move the cursor to the desired view position. Click a third time to place the IE marker.

To define the Marker style and position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 5) A new IE viewpoint is created and listed in the Project Map. It is assigned its own IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints. For more information, see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections

570

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create Multiple IE Viewpoints


Use the polyline or one of the rectangle methods to create multiple viewpoints in a single IE Group.

The resulting Interior Elevation group contains the same number of viewpoints as the number of segments on the polyline/rectangle. 1) Click to begin drawing the limit line. With the polyline method, click once for each segment of the polyline; double-click to complete the polyline.

With the rectangular method, click a second time to define the opposing corners. With the rotated rectangular method, click to define the rotation vector; click again to define the length of the rectangle. The resulting line/polyline/rectangle represents the limit line of the Interior Elevation group. 2) Move the cursor to the desired view position.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

571

Virtual Building

3) Click once more to place the IE marker(s).

Interior elevations use a dedicated IE marker, a GDL object with editable parameters. IE marker(s) are placed at the middle of each segment of the IE line or at the center of the room. To define the Marker style and Position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. For any or all of the viewpoints, you can opt not to show a marker, by choosing the No Marker option in this panel. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 4) The new group of viewpoints is created and listed in the Project Map. 5) The Interior Elevation Group has its own Clone folder in the Navigator View Map. The viewpoints within a single IE group share certain settings (such as Show on Stories and Layer settings) which can be applied only to the group as a whole. However, the settings of any single segment are accessible individually. See Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints. For more information, see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections

572

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Interior Elevation IDs and Names


To assign IDs and names to IE Groups and their viewpoints, use the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. The options in the General Panel vary depending on whether you are defining Settings for an IE Group:

or for an individual IE viewpoint:

Each new IE viewpoint is automatically assigned to an IE Group (even if there is only one viewpoint in the group). The IE Group is assigned a default ID of IE-01. Subsequent IE Groups receive their IDs accordingly. (IE-02, IE-03...)

In each individual viewpoints IE settings, the Reference ID and Name fields are set to By IE Group by default.

This means that each IE viewpoint will have the same ID and Name as its parent IE Group. ArchiCADs default IE Settings further define the ID and Name of each IE viewpoint to include Autotexts.

Use Autotext to Create Meaningful IDs/Names for Interior Elevation Group


You can define a logical naming convention for your IE Groups by including an Autotext in the parent IE Groups ID and Name. This way, each individual Interior Elevation contained in the group will display a logical Autotext value that can vary for each elevation. By default, ArchiCADs IE Group ID adds an Autotext of <Number> to the ID of each viewpoint in the IE group. In the image below, each viewpoint ID includes the Group ID (IE-01) plus an automatically assigned number (01, 02, 03...). 573

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Also, the default IE Group Name adds an Autotext of <Orientation> to each viewpoint Name. Consequently, each viewpoint name consists of its specific orientation, which automatically assigned using Autotext (North, South, East, West...).

Use the General Panel of IE Settings to define any other Autotext to include in the IE viewpoints name and/or ID. For example, you can set the Interior Elevation Groups ID to be the Zone Number: 1) Click the Autotext button next to the ID field in General Settings and choose Zone Number from the list.

2) In the Navigator, note that the ID of the Group is now equivalent to the number of the zone (007, in this case) contained in the Interior Elevation.

This ID is inherited by all of the viewpoints in the Group. (Naturally, assigning a Zone Number autotext works only if the Interior Elevation includes a zone.)

Customize IDs and Names


You can give a customized ID and/or Name to any IE Group or individual viewpoint: Select the IE limit line. Open Interior Elevation Settings. If it is an individual IE Viewpoint, make sure the pop-up is set to Custom.

Enter the desired ID and/or Name.

574

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

You can also change IDs and Names for any IE Group or viewpoint in the Navigator.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

575

Virtual Building

Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints


Each viewpoint of an Interior Elevation group can be edited separately. First, select the viewpoint: select any individual Interior Elevation marker, or select any individual line segment of the Interior Elevation line.

The pet palette and context menu commands opened from this segment affect that viewpoint only. To edit the selected viewpoint: Open Interior Elevation Settings. (Use the context menu or the Info Box). Any changes you make here will apply only to the selected viewpoint. Note that certain options in IE Settings are greyed if you are editing a single viewpoint rather than an IE group. Use the pet palette's options to manipulate the selected IE segment or its marker.

Delete/Restore IE Viewpoint
If you have selected an individual IE viewpoint, you can delete that single viewpoint using the context menus Delete command.

You can restore this viewpoint even after deleting it: select the IE group to which it belongs (select any part of the IE Limit Line) and use the Restore all Interior Elevations in Group command from the context menu.

Note: This command regenerates the IE viewpoint, but any 2D edits you made in this viewpoint before deleting it have been lost. 576
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line


Selecting any segment of the IE limit polyline selects the entire IE group. If the IE group uses a single, common marker, then selecting the marker also selects the entire IE group.

As when editing other polylines in ArchiCAD, use the pet palettes line editing options.

Inserting a node will create a new IE viewpoint in the IE group.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

577

Virtual Building

Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation


Vertical Range
An IE viewpoints vertical range is set manually by the user in the General Panel of Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings or the Info Box.

Each IE view (i.e. each segment of the IE limit polyline) can have a separate, custom vertical range value, if desired: choose the Limited option as the Vertical Range and enter the desired elevation limits. Use the pop-up to define whether this vertical range should be measured from Project Zero, or from the Interior Elevations Home Story (the story onto which it was placed).

Horizontal Range
By default, the IE limit line represents the horizontal range of the resulting IE view. The Horizontal Range option of Interior Elevation Settings (see the General Panel) is set to By Limit Lines by default.

578

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

To adjust the horizontal range, select the limit line and stretch or shrink it using the commands of the pet palette. (Stretch/shrink modifications to this segment will affect the neighboring line segments accordingly, as when editing any polyline.)

To include connected enclosed areas in the Interior Elevation viewpoint, choose Add bounded areas the Horizontal Range option in IE Settings.

This way, if the room contains an odd-shaped alcove, the IE viewpoint will include structures that fall beyond the Limit Line, but still fall inside the room, as in this image:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

579

Virtual Building

Interior Elevations and Zone Shape


If you want the Interior Elevation to correspond to a zone, choose the Detect and Fit to Zones Vertical Range option from the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings.

If a zone is detected, its height will be used as the vertical range of the selected Interior Elevation viewpoint. Note: The zones height is the difference between its Level value and its Height value as set in Zone Settings):

Zones edited by Solid Element Operations are also calculated accurately, provided that you also check the Consider Solid Operations box. For example, a single zone trimmed to a slanted roof will have several different zone heights. These are accurately reflected in each viewpoint of the Interior Elevation group.

580

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Display of Elements in Interior Elevation


Use the Model Display controls in Interior Elevation Settings to define the appearance of cut and uncut elements in the view. These options are largely identical to the Model Display in the Section Window and Interior Elevation Model Display Panel. Interior Elevations do not have a Marked Distant Area display option. Two special display options are available for the display of cut elements in Interior Elevations: Exclude View Blocking Walls: If this option is checked, any intervening walls which block the view in the Interior Elevation will not be displayed. Hide Cut Elements: If this option is checked, elements that are cut by the Interior Elevation Line will not be displayed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

581

Virtual Building

3D Document
About the 3D Document Create a 3D Document The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document

582

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About the 3D Document


The 3D Document allows you to use the 3D view of the model as the basis for creating a document, to which you can add dimensions, labels and additional 2D drawing elements. For example, you can convert a 3D view of a building into a document that shows detailed structural information in 3D - such as intersection of composite walls in space. This is possible because the 3D Document can display cut surfaces in a 3D model structure, optionally using the cut fill and line attributes defined at the element level. To add dimensions, just use ArchiCADs dimensioning tools, plus certain dimensioning functions that are available only for 3D Documents.

The 3D Document is a viewpoint which appears in the Navigator Project Map. In many respects, the 3D Document is analogous to the Section viewpoint: it is an integral part of the ArchiCAD model, and its model elements are rebuilt automatically or manually, depending on its status. In the 3D Document, you can select model elements and access their settings dialog boxes to make changes in the model, but you cannot edit them graphically or create new model elements. The 3D Document has its source in the 3D window. Specific parameters and options affecting 3D window display (such as projection and filtering/selection of elements) will affect 3D Document display; you can redefine the 3D Document after adjusting these 3D window settings. However, like other model views, the 3D Document has its own 3D Document Settings dialog box, where you can set parameters that are specific to the 3D Document: these include fill/pen display of element surfaces (including cut composite elements) and contours, transparency, 3D hatching, shading, shadow and sun effects. Note: The display of composite elements in the 3D Document window also depends on the Partial Structure Display Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

583

Virtual Building

In particular, you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures:

3D Document Settings Model Display of the 3D Document Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source

584

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a 3D Document
1) In the 3D window, set up a 3D view of the model: the view you want to see in your 3D Document: Set up the perspective or projected 3D view; use 3D Cutting Planes; filter or select elements; use Marquee as needed, or perform solid element operations. 2) Create a new 3D Document by doing one of the following: With 3D window open: Use New 3D Document... command from the context menu of the Navigator's 3D Document folder

Use Capture Window for 3D Document command from the context menu of the 3D window (with nothing selected).

Use a menu command (Document > 3D Document > Create New 3D Document; or Document > Documenting Tools > Create 3D Document). 585

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3) The New 3D Document dialog box appears.

Enter a Reference ID and Name for the new 3D Document; click Create. 4) The 3D Document is created and opened in its own window. 5) The 3D Document is listed in the 3D Document folder in the Project Map of the Navigator.

586

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source


The contents of the 3D Document are defined out of the 3D Window; that 3D window is the source of your 3D Document. Although there is only one current 3D window at any given time (you cannot open multiple 3D windows simultaneously), each 3D Document can have its own 3D window source. In other words: each 3D Document stores the settings (projection, filtering, cutting planes etc.) of its own 3D window source. You can, at any time, edit certain settings of this 3D Window source, and then Redefine the 3D Document to reflect these edits. Redefine refers to specific settings of the 3D window that affect how the 3D Document appears in the window. These settings are: The current 3D projection, including zoom Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) Selection/Marquee limitations Cutting Planes Note the difference between Redefine and Rebuild. Rebuild refers to the model elements: their size, shape and relation to the rest of the model elements. Rebuild for a 3D Document works the same as for other model views (e.g. Section). Your 3D Document, if set to AutoRebuild, is rebuilt every time you open it. If it is Manual-Update, it is rebuilt only upon command. (View > Rebuild > Rebuild from Model). There is no Drawing-type 3D Document. For more information, see Assign Section Status.

3D Projections Filter Elements in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Show Selection in 3D 3D Cutaway Sections

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

587

Virtual Building

Redefine the 3D Document


There are three ways to redefine a 3D Document after you have created it. Each method is described below:

Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command Redefine Using 3D Document Settings Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source
If the 3D Document window is in front: use the Open 3D Source command from the context menu to open the source 3D window.

Or: right-click the 3D Document viewpoint or view from the Navigator, then click the Open Source View command:

588

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Make your changes in the 3D window: Edit elements Adjust the projection Change element visibility using Selection/Marquee Change the Filter Elements settings. Then use the Redefine command: Select the 3D Document from the Navigator Project Map and right-click to access the Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D command.

Alternatively, with the 3D window in front and nothing selected, use the Redefine 3D Document command.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

589

Virtual Building

This brings up the Redefine 3D Document dialog box.

Choose the 3D Document which you want to redefine based on the current 3D window. A warning reminds you that this Redefine operation is not undoable.

Click Redefine Anyway to proceed.

Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command


This command will redefine your 3D Document based on the status of the latest instance of the 3D window (the one currently open, or the one that was last open). You do not need to open the 3D window. Note: The current 3D window is not necessarily the same as the original source of your 3D Document. Your 3D Document will be redefined according to the following settings of the current 3D window: The current 3D projection, including zoom Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) Selection/Marquee limitations Cutting Planes

590

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

With the 3D Document in front, use the Redefine based on the Current 3D command from the context menu with nothing selected:

Another way to get the same result: In the Navigator Project Map, right-click the 3D document which you want to define and use Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

591

Virtual Building

Redefine Using 3D Document Settings


If you want to redefine an existing 3D Document without having to open the source 3D window, an easy way to do it is to use its 3D Document Settings. Open 3D Document Settings (select the 3D Document in the Navigator Project Map; or click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator or from the context menu; or from the Document > 3D Document menu).

The controls in the General panel allow you to access dialog boxes to modify the 3D Document and its 3D window source, without having to open the 3D window itself:

592

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Make any or all of the following changes: Click Redefine 3D Projections to bring up the Perspective or Parallel Settings dialog box which reflects the 3D Documents source 3D window. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the projections dialog box. This is where you can redefine Sun settings for your 3D Document: click Redefine 3D Projections, then More Sun to adjust the sun position. Click Redefine Filter Elements to access the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the dialog box. Check the box to redefine the projection, cutting planes, and visible elements of the 3D Document based on the current 3D window. Changes in your 3D Document will take effect when you click OK to leave 3D Document Settings. For details on these controls, see 3D Document General Panel.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

593

Virtual Building

Model Display of the 3D Document


While the 3D Document derives many of its settings from its 3D window source, several important settings for the 3D Documents model appearance are derived from the 3D Document Model Display Panel. In particular, you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures. Use the 3D Document Settings Model Panel to set: Fills and pens for element surfaces and contours, and for cut elements Transparency Vectorial 3D hatching Shaded materials Sun and Shadow effects Important: These settings apply to the 3D Document and are independent of its 3D source window.

594

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Details
About Details Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source Contents of the Detail Viewpoint Place a Linked Detail Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Updating the Detail Window

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

595

Virtual Building

About Details
The Detail tool is used to generate a Detail drawing viewpoint from the model by placing a Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail window. It is also used to place linked Detail markers, as a reference to any viewpoint, view or drawing. The Detail Marker (a GDL object) is displayed according to the settings you made in the Detail Settings dialog box. You can also create an independent Detail drawing, with or without a marker. Detail viewpoints are displayed in a dedicated Detail Drawing Window and listed in the Details part of the Navigator Project Map. Detail viewpoints generated from existing elements in the project are 2D-only copies of these elements. The viewpoints can be updated to reflect changes in the plan. You can add additional 2D elements, text, labels and objects to a Detail Drawing. You may wish to fine-tune the Detail Drawing before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. To open the Detail Drawing in its own window, double-click the detail view name in the Navigator.

596

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source


To create a Detail with its source in the model, place an area-based Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet or Detail. 1) Activate the Detail tool. 2) In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Create new detail viewpoint is selected.

3) Choose an area-based geometry method from the Info Box: Polygonal, Rectangular, or Rotated Rectangular. (The first, No Boundary geometry method, creates a marker linked to an independent viewpoint having no model source.)

4) Draw the Detail boundary and click to complete. 5) After drawing the detail boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Detail Marker. The X represents the Details origin.

Note: Source-type Detail markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Detail Drawing viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Detail viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information - can be defined in the Detail Tool Settings dialog box.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

597

Virtual Building

Contents of the Detail Viewpoint


The source-based detail drawing consists of only 2D lines/fills, including the 2D exploded representations of all construction elements inside the detail boundary. By default, only construction elements are transferred; annotations and dimensions are not transferred to the Detail viewpoint. (You can change this setting using a checkbox in the General Panel of Detail Settings.)

For information on what happens to annotation elements cut by the Detail boundary, see Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary. Only 2D tools are available in the Detail window. All types of 2D information can be added to the Detail Drawing: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. The Detail Drawing will include a line representing the Detail Boundary you drew on the plan. See Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary. Section Details (Detail viewpoints created from a Section) reveal the elevation of the original construction, which means that Elevation Dimensioning placed on Detail viewpoints shows correct elevation values, unless you displace drawing elements vertically. (The same is true for Elevation Dimensions in Details generated from Elevations and Interior Elevations.)

Worksheet vs. Detail

598

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Detail Marker


To place a linked detail marker without creating a viewpoint: 1) Activate the Detail tool. 2) In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.

3) Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. 4) Choose any of the Detail geometry methods to place the marker.

If you use the No Boundary geometry method: click once to place the marker If you use any of the area-based methods: draw a Detail boundary, then click with the hammer cursor to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

599

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint


An Independent Detail drawing is one whose content you create yourself, starting with an empty detail viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An Independent Detail drawing is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. You may wish to create an Independent Detail for your documentation which depicts something that does not otherwise exist in the model - for example, detail of a fence. These independent Detail Drawings always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can be marked or unmarked: Independent marked details have a corresponding detail marker on the plan. Independent unmarked details do not have a detail marker on the plan, but they exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator.

Create an Independent Detail viewpoint with a marker


1) In Detail Settings or the Info Box, choose Create New Detail Viewpoint. 2) Define the Marker Reference: the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint The link information of the chosen viewpoint/drawing will appear in the Reference to text field. After the marker is placed and the new Detail is created, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time. 3) Choose the single-click geometry method (the first icon among the Info Box geometry methods) and click to place a detail marker on the plan.

4) A new, empty Detail viewpoint is created (independent marked detail) and listed in the navigator. This viewpoint has no model source. To open the independent Detail viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator or access it with the Open Detail Drawing in the markers context menu. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the detail drawing window.

600

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Detail viewpoint without a marker


Use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Detail command. You can also access this command from the Detail folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator;

or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Detail or the Detail folder is selected. Independent unmarked details are listed in the Navigator, though they have no associated marker. Later, if needed, you can attach a Independent Detail viewpoint to a marker: place a linked marker and point the marker to your Detail viewpoint.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

601

Virtual Building

Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary


When you create a new Detail or Worksheet viewpoint using a polygon input method, the resulting drawing will show the Boundary as a dashed line. If you do not want this boundary included in the Drawing window, disable the relevant checkbox in Options > Work Environment > More Options.

602

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary


If you redraw the boundary of a source detail or worksheet marker, any markers linked to this marker's viewpoint will not be updated until you issue the Update Linked Markers Boundaries command from the Detail/Worksheet viewpoint item's Navigator context menu.

This command affects the shape of marker boundaries only, not any associated model content.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

603

Virtual Building

Updating the Detail Window


If the source view of a Detail viewpoint has been modified, update its contents with the Rebuild from Source View command (from context menu of the detail drawing listed in the Navigator, or from the View > Refresh sub-menu).

For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands.

604

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Worksheets
About Worksheets Worksheet vs. Detail Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source Contents of the Worksheet Window Editing in the Worksheet Window Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint Place a Linked Worksheet Marker Place an Unlinked Marker

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

605

Virtual Building

About Worksheets
The Worksheet window provides a dedicated environment for 2D model-based drawings, such as partial floor plans and partial sections, and for drawings created entirely in 2D. Worksheets can be used as a dedicated environment for finishing drawings using 2D tools, and for working with consultants limited to 2D methods. You might want use a Worksheet to add a diagram or organizational chart, which is totally independent of your model, yet useful for your documentation. As in the Detail window, elements on the Worksheet consist of 2D-only duplicates of any construction elements in exploded form (e.g. 2D lines and fills). Only 2D tools are available in the Worksheet window. You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. The user can link any type of marker to the Worksheet. You can place a Section marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type section. You can also place a Detail marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type Detail. Such Drawing Sections and Drawing Details cannot be refreshed based on the content of the Worksheet window. The Worksheet tool is active in any window. It has marker and linking options similar to those of the other ArchiCAD marker tools (Section, Detail). To open a Worksheet window, double-click its name in the Navigator. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the drawing window.

606

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Worksheet vs. Detail


While creating a Worksheet based on the source model is similar to creating a model-based Detail, the Worksheet is optimized for creating partial floor plans and partial sections. Unlike the Detail tool, the Worksheet tool has a single-click capture geometry method which reproduces the entire contents of the current window as 2D elements in the Worksheet viewpoint. Consequently, when transferring all or part of a source model view to a Worksheet window: Annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, appear in the resulting Worksheet, in addition to construction elements exploded into 2D components. (In contrast, a Detail viewpoint created from the model will - by default - contain the 2D-only copies of construction elements only, without the source model's annotation/dimension elements.) The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source. (In contrast, a Detail is created, by default, at half the scale of the original.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

607

Virtual Building

Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source


To create a Worksheet with its source in the model, place a Worksheet marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, Worksheet or Detail. 1) Activate the Worksheet tool. 2) In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Create new Worksheet viewpoint is selected. 3) Choose any of the geometry methods from the Info Box.

Capture Screen input method: Use the single-click method: the first input method in the Worksheet info box. Choose this icon, then click anywhere in the active project window. You will create a Worksheet based on the entire contents of the window. Area-based input method: Use one of the polygonal or rectangular/rotated rectangle geometry methods to define the Worksheet area. 4) Draw the Worksheet boundary and click to complete. 5) After drawing the Worksheet boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Worksheet Marker. Note: Source-type Worksheet markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Worksheet viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Worksheet marker. See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Worksheet viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information are defined in Worksheet Tool Settings.

608

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Contents of the Worksheet Window


A project-based Worksheet only contains drawing primitives, that is, lines and fills. These originate from the construction elements on the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document. Section/ Elevation and Detail/Worksheet markers within the Worksheet boundary are live markers: they continue to function as markers. When transferring all or part of a model view to a Worksheet window, annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, also appear in the resulting Worksheet. To copy construction elements only, without annotations/dimensions, check the Copy construction elements only box in Worksheet Settings. The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source, if any. (If the source has no scale, the Worksheet will be shown at a default scale value.) If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements, dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers; Detail/Worksheet markers), then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria, as follows. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings. (However, by default, Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all, unless you uncheck Copy Construction elements only in Detail Settings.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary, the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimensions endpoints must be inside the boundary. Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary, that segment is included in the Worksheet. Door/Window markers: If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary, then all Doors, Windows, and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoints origin (the X) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary, the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary, the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet, although the lines geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line. Note: Interior Elevation markers, unlike Section/Elevation markers, are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components.

Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

609

Virtual Building

Editing in the Worksheet Window


Only 2D tools are available when the Worksheet window is active. All types of 2D information can be added to the Worksheet: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Drawings, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. You can add content to your Worksheet window in several ways: Select any element(s) from any window and paste them into the Worksheet window. All elements, including construction elements, will be pasted in 2D form. To transfer elements from a Trace Reference, first switch the Reference with the active window, then copy-paste from there into the Worksheet (in exploded form) Draw all new 2D elements into the Worksheet window.

610

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint


An independent worksheet is one which you create yourself, starting with an empty worksheet viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An independent worksheet is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. These independent Worksheets always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can either have a marker, or not. Independent worksheets without a marker in the project exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator. To create an independent Worksheet without a marker, use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Worksheet command. You can also access this command from the Worksheet folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator; or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Worksheet or the Worksheet folder is selected. Independent Worksheets without a marker are also listed in the Navigator. However, you can subsequently link a marker to such a Worksheet as needed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

611

Virtual Building

Place a Linked Worksheet Marker


To place a linked Worksheet marker without creating a viewpoint: 1) Activate the Worksheet tool. 2) In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected. 3) Choose any of the Worksheet geometry methods to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Worksheet marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.

612

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Managing Markers in ArchiCAD


About Markers Display of Marker Range Lines Source Marker Highlight Changing Marker Type Transfer Marker Parameters Copying a Marker Navigation Using Markers Find Linked Markers Check Markers Palette Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker Deleting a Marker

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

613

Virtual Building

About Markers
Markers can be placed using any of the following tools: Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) Worksheets Details With any of the Marker tools, you can opt to place a source marker. A source marker creates a new viewpoint (e.g. a Section, Elevation, Worksheet, Detail) involving the model as their source. Any of the Markers - except Interior Elevation - can optionally be defined as a linked marker. Such markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing. This information is displayed in the marker, which can be used to navigate to the referred item. An unlinked marker has no model source and displays no linked information. You cannot use it to navigate among markers, but you can define any custom text for it.

614

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Display of Marker Range Lines


After you draw an input line or polygon with the any of the marker-type tools, these input lines will remain displayed on screen when you place the Marker. Marker Range items include: Elevation, Interior Elevation Line Section/Elevation Limit Line (for Sections and Elevations of limited depth) Distant line (for Sections and Elevations with a Marked Distant Area) Interior Elevation Limit lines Polygons defining area-based Details and Worksheets These Marker Range items are on-screen elements only; and never present on printouts. You can choose to show or hide Marker range items of all types using the View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range toggle. To customize the line type/color of these Marker Range lines, use the controls in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

615

Virtual Building

Source Marker Highlight


Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. This option makes it easy to tell at a glance which of your markers on screen are source markers. To toggle this highlight on or off for all source markers, use the View > On-Screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers command. To change the color of the source marker highlight, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.

Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

616

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Changing Marker Type


You can change the type of an already placed marker, so long as all the Marker references point to items that originate with a Marker tool.

To change a linked marker to a source marker:


Select the marker.

Use the Set as Source Marker command from its context menu; or Open the marker's Settings dialog box and choose the Source Marker option The linked marker becomes the source marker, while the original source marker becomes a linked marker. This function is available for: Linked markers which are linked to a viewpoint/view/drawing that is located within the current project. The linked marker must have been placed using the same tool as the item to which it was linked (e.g. a Section marker linked to a Section viewpoint). Note: A viewpoints cut/model attributes are defined by its source marker. If a linked marker becomes the source of a section, that marker's cut/model attributes are now applied to the viewpoint. Note: If you change a linked detail marker into a source detail marker, the viewpoints defining polygon will change to reflect the new source detail markers polygon. Linked markers linked to an independent viewpoint of the same type. The independent viewpoint is deleted and replaced by a source viewpoint. (If the original linked marker had no boundary, the source will take on a default boundary value.) Markers linked to an external drawing cannot be changed to a source marker.

To change a source marker to a linked marker:


Select the marker. Use the Set as Linked Marker command from its context menu; or Open the marker's Settings dialog box and choose the Linked Marker option The original source marker becomes a linked marker containing the same reference information as before.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

617

Virtual Building

Transfer Marker Parameters


You can use the Parameter Transfer commands (Pick Up Parameters/Inject Parameters) among markers. If you Pick Up Parameters from a source marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will take on all of the first markers parameters except its link information, and except for its geometry (e.g. the range of a section marker.) If you Pick Up Parameters from a linked marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will become identical to the first: a second linked marker with the same parameters, and containing the identical reference information, as the first.

618

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Copying a Marker
Any interaction (Copy/Paste, Drag/Rotate/Mirror Copy/Copies) that results in creating a new copy of a marker will have the following results: Copying a source marker (Section/Elevation/IE or Worksheet) results in a second source marker, which creates a new viewpoint having the same parameters as the viewpoint associated with the original marker. The new viewpoint's name, however, will be different. Moreover, the Marker Link information is not copied. Copying a source Detail marker will create a new linked Detail marker, which is linked to the original detail viewpoint.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

619

Virtual Building

Navigation Using Markers


To navigate using a marker, select the marker and open the context menu.

Use the Open command to go to the referred item. If the marker is linked to a Drawing, use the context menu (Go to Drawing) to open the layout containing the referred drawing.

From the same context menu, the Open/Open in new window commands will open the source viewpoint/view of the linked drawing. The linked detail marker in the image below refers to the first placed drawing of a selected Interior Elevation view. Its context menu allows you to Go to the Drawing Open the Interior Elevation view in the current or in a new window

620

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Find Linked Markers


To find all the markers linked to a particular viewpoint/view/drawing, select the item from the Navigator. Use the Find Linked Markers command from the item's context menu.

For Drawings placed on Layouts, the Find Linked Markers command is also available if you select the Drawing itself, then open the context menu.

The Find Linked markers dialog box lists all the linked markers: By marker subtype (shown as an icon) Placed to: ID and name of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed. (If it is a source marker, the viewpoint name is underlined.) Clicking either column header will sort the list accordingly. Click Marker Settings to open the Tool Settings dialog box of the selected marker. Click Go to Selected to zoom to the selected marker. (The button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.)
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

621

Virtual Building

Check Markers Palette


The Check Markers function lists which marker-referred items are missing from the project. The Check Markers Palette is available from Window > Palettes > Check Markers. To list undefined marker references, click the Check Markers button at the top of the palette.

The palette lists all the markers in the project which the user has automatically or manually linked a viewpoint, drawing or view, but whose referred viewpoint/drawing/view has since been deleted from this project. (In this case, the marker will display Autotext in place of the missing data.) If no such marker exists, the Palette will display this message: No undefined marker references in this project. Markers are listed, and can be sorted, according to the following: Marker subtype: Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet/Interior Elevation (shown as icon) Placed to: ID and Project Map path of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed Selected item: Name and ID of the markers referenced item (i.e. the viewpoint/view/ drawing one you chose when defining the marker reference). If this referenced item has been deleted from the project, this column will show N/A. Approve: Editable checkbox for each marker. You can sort items by any of these properties by clicking on its column header. You can then perform a secondary sorting function: clicking a second column header will further sort within the hierarchy obtained by the first sorting. An icon at the bottom of the palette allows the user to zoom to the selected marker. (The zoom button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.) For each problematic marker listed (or multiple selected markers), the user can click Marker Settings to re-link the marker(s) or otherwise modify them. The user may decide that the marker is OK the way it is (even though it continues to display undefined Autotext). In this case, the Approve checkbox can be used as a sorting criterion; check the box for these markers. (For example, if you know that the undefined Autotext refers to an external project that has not yet been loaded.)

622

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If you don't want the palette to re-list these approved markers as problems the next time you click the Check Markers button, use the Hide Approved Markers option from the pop-up at top right of the dialog box.

Otherwise, use the List all items option.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

623

Virtual Building

Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker


If you delete a viewpoint, the program will first check whether its source/linked markers are located on a locked layer or in a different Teammate's workspace, or whether the marker elements themselves have been locked. These markers include: The viewpoint's source marker Markers linked to the viewpoint Markers linked to views created out of the viewpoint. If none of these markers is locked or reserved, then the program displays a Warning dialog box informing you that proceeding with the Delete procedure will delete all of the following: The viewpoint (even if its source marker displays the data of a different viewpoint) Any views created out of the viewpoint All the source/linked markers listed above.

If you delete a view, any markers linked to that view will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. These markers will be listed as problematic the next time you run the Check Markers function. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint. If you delete a drawing, any markers linked to that drawing will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from view/viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint.

624

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Deleting a Marker
If you delete a source marker, a dialog box appears informing you that deleting a source marker will also delete the viewpoint and any markers linked to it. However, the same dialog box gives you a different option: delete the source marker, but keep the viewpoint as an independent viewpoint with no model source. Deleting a linked marker has no effect on any other element.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

625

Virtual Building

Interactive Schedule
About Schedules Open a Schedule Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items Editing and Updating Schedule Items Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings Sort Schedule Fields Format a Schedule Schedule Headers Add Annotations to Schedule Previews Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts

626

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Schedules
ArchiCADs Interactive Schedule function allows you to automatically generate schedules. Unlike simple lists created with the commands of the Document > Schedules and Lists menu, the Interactive Schedule not only displays quantities and other parameters - you can actually edit it. This makes it possible to notice and correct inconsistencies resulting from a data entry error or from the merging of the work of several people on different parts of the same project. For example, the schedule may allow you to detect that all but one of the thirty or forty doors placed in your building have the same height and width. You can then select this door directly from the schedule and check whether there is a reason for this inconsistency. If you find that this was a mistake, then you can correct the setting in the schedule and automatically update the door in all views. Similarly, its easy to double-check how many of the doors open to the right or the left. There are two categories of Interactive Schedules: Element Lists show characteristics of simple construction elements Component Lists are optimized to list information about each component of composite elements (composite walls, slabs, roofs and/or multi-component profile elements

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

627

Virtual Building

The content of the Schedule is based on Schedule Scheme Settings. To adjust these, you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Scheme Settings button at top right. For more information on defining schedule content, see Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings. The units of the listed values (e.g. length, volume) are set in Calculation Units and Rules Preferences. You can access Schedules from either the Navigator palette or the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules submenu. Click the name of a defined Schedule to open the Interactive Schedule window and update its contents. Schedules are viewpoints, which you can save as views and output as drawings on a Layout, or save in various other file formats. See Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule). A formatted schedule can be placed into any 2D window (typically a Worksheet), by using Copy/ Paste. The contents of the schedule, after pasting, will consist of lines and text, which you can freely edit, but will no longer be associative to the model.

628

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Open a Schedule
ArchiCAD 13 comes with predefined Schedules, such as Door List; Wall List; Window List. To open any of these schedules to list the elements in the current project, double-click the Schedule name in the Navigator.

. (You can also access Schedules through the Go command of the Mini-Navigator Toolbar, or from the Window menu.) The Schedule window opens, showing the schedule, along with formatting options in the left column. To display the schedule only, without the formatting panel, click the black arrow on the dividing line.

For information on formatting the schedule, see Format Options (Interactive Schedule).
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

629

Virtual Building

The Interactive Schedule window, like other Listing windows, has an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.

To adjust individual row or column heights, manually drag the tabs on the top and left side of the schedule. Double-click any tab to fit the cell to its contents.

630

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items


You may wish to view an Element Schedule for only certain items on the Floor Plan, for the purpose of interactively editing these elements. Select the desired elements (on the Floor Plan only), then find the desired Element Schedule in the Navigator Project Map or View Map. Right-click the schedule name and choose List Floor Plan Selection Only to view schedule data for the selected items only (as opposed to the items defined in the Schedule Scheme criteria).

This is a quick way to filter elements for editing as a group, by taking advantage of the Interactive Schedule capabilities. You cannot save a view out of the displayed data.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

631

Virtual Building

Editing and Updating Schedule Items


To work on an item of the Interactive Element Schedule, click its column (or row). You will see that some of the cells of this column become editable, while others cannot be modified. In the example below, you can see that while the name field of the Door type library part is locked, it is possible to overwrite the sill and head height.

Any changes you make in these fields of the Schedule are automatically and instantly reflected in the Floor Plan and in other views, when activated. Conversely, all changes made on these elements in the Floor Plan or another editable view are updated in the Schedule when you return to it. If you have selected an item in the Schedule Window, use the Select on Floor Plan icon to go to the Floor Plan window and view the selected item.

The icon to its right, Select in 3D, takes you to the 3D Window and zooms onto the selected item.

632

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings


The contents of your Interactive Schedule are defined in the Scheme Settings dialog box. Here, you define (1) the criteria for selecting the items to be listed in the Schedule; and (2) the fields (i.e. the particular information about the chosen items) to be listed in the Schedule. Choose the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules > Scheme Settings command from the menu; or the Scheme Settings button from the opened Schedule window

. In the top Schemes Panel, choose the scheme you want to edit, or use the buttons at the right to create, rename, delete, import and export schemes. For details, see Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

633

Virtual Building

If you choose Create New, you must define whether the new Schedule will be an Element Schedule or a Component Schedule.

Define Schedule Criteria


In the Criteria panel, select the first line, then choose a criterion for the items you wish to include in the Schedule. For simple Element lists, choose Element type.

In the Value column, select the desired element. For example, to create a Door List we have chosen Element Type is Door as the only criterion.

634

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Add New Criteria


To add a new criterion, click the Add button.

You can now choose a second Element Type criterion, such as Window. The and/or field in the first row (Element Type is Door) is now editable: in this case, choose or.

The two values (Door, Window) are joined as an or statement, so that the resulting schedule will include every element that is either a Window or a Door. To narrow the scope of a schedule, add additional criteria. For example, if you want a schedule of only those doors and windows which are on Story 2 and above, add a new criterion by clicking the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. Then choose Story from the Criteria list, and complete the row with the desired Story value (>=2).

In this example, the schedule will list all elements that fit either of the Element Type Criteria, and also fit the Story criteria: to be on the list, the element must be either a window or a door, and it must be located with the defined Story range.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

635

Virtual Building

If you have chosen an object-type Element as an Element Type, and you want to use one of its particular parameters as an additional criterion, click the Additional Parameters button at the bottom of the dialog box. In the appearing dialog box, browse the loaded libraries to find the library part whose parameters you need. Choose the parameter, then click Add. This parameter will then be listed in your Criteria list.

Complex Criteria Definition


If needed, use the Open Parentheses and Close Parentheses columns of Scheme Settings to set up nested criteria for more complex schemes: in any selected row, click on the pop-up under the parentheses column to choose a parenthesis, or no parenthesis.

Each open must have a corresponding close in order for the scheme to be logical. If there is a mistake in your parentheses logic, the Criteria invalid! warning appears at the bottom of the panel.

Define Schedule Fields


In the Fields Panel of Schedule Scheme Settings, you will choose which fields should be displayed in your schedule. From the list of Available Parameters on the left, choose the desired items, and click Add at the bottom of the dialog box to add them to the Schedule Fields on the right. For example, in the Wall List scheme pictured here, we want the Wall Layer to be included in the schedule. Choose Layer from the Available Parameter, then click Add to add it to the Schedule Fields on the right.

636

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Sort Schedule Fields


To change the order in which fields are listed in the schedule, use the up/down arrows at the left edge of each row to move the field up or down.

See also Schemes Fields Panel. You can further set the order in which items are listed within each field, by using the three buttons at the right: Click the first button to sort walls in this field in ascending/descending order. (You can also leave this field blank, for None. None means that this field will not be taken into consideration when sorting.) In the example below, walls will be listed by Wall Type (the name of the schedule column that lists walls by Cut Fill type, the first schedule field); inasmuch as several walls are of the same type - such as Masonry Block- the walls will be listed in order of their volume.

Click the second button to add a schedule cell which displays the sum of the items in the selected field. Here, we will have the schedule add a sum to the schedules Volume column.

The second button contains an icon for a second option: to list a quantity for this field.

Here, we will have the schedule add a Quantity to the schedules Wall Type column.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

637

Virtual Building

The result: Wall Type shows a Quantity at the bottom of the column (a total of 8 walls), and the Volume column shows a total sum of all the volumes at the bottom (65.19 m3).

Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sums/quantities, which is called Grand Total. If you choose Grand Total from the Apply to pop-up list, the formatting options will apply to this row/column of the schedule only.

The third button lets you add a flag to one of the fields in the list. (You cannot flag more than one field at a time.) The flagged field will display a separate sum or quantity for each group of identical elements in that field. For example, the Wall Type field already has a Quantity row, showing the total number of walls; to show a Quantity for each type of wall in that field, we have added a flag to the Cut Fill Type field.

The result: Wall Types show a separate quantity for each separate wall type. Moreover, the Volume column also lists the corresponding volume sub-totals.

Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sum/quantity subtotals, which is called Total.

638

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Format a Schedule
Use the formatting controls at the left side of the Schedule Window to format the current schedule.

For more information on each of these options, see Format Options (Interactive Schedule).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

639

Virtual Building

Schedule Headers
Each field of the schedule has a header. These headers are shown at the top of the schedule (for column-style schedules) or at the side (for row-style schedules). Each schedule also has a single main header. To show or hide headers and/or the main header, use the commands from Header Options, at the top of the Schedule window.

To change a header text, just click into the field and type. To format it, make sure that Header is selected from the Apply To pop-up, then choose text formatting options.

To select multiple fields, use Shift-click. You can add an additional header field above existing headers: 1) Select multiple headers (use Shift-click.) 2) Choose Insert Header Cell Above from Header Options.

3) A new cell is inserted above the selected cells, showing the text merged. Type in any header text and format as usual.

640

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Add Annotations to Schedule Previews


If your Interactive Schedule includes previews of objects, doors and windows, you can add dimensions to these preview pictures in the Schedule. 1) Double-click the cell of the preview which you wish to annotate, or Select the cell, then click on Annotate.

2) The preview picture opens in a separate 2D window entitled Element Preview. 3) Use the available 2D tools to annotate the preview picture: dimensions, labels, text. You can also add annotations from available libraries, using the Object tool.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

641

Virtual Building

4) Click OK in the drawing windows menu to close this window and apply the annotations to the selected preview; or click Cancel to close the window without applying any changes.

Dimensions in the Interactive Schedule preview cells can be associative: if you modify the object size in the project, its dimensions as shown in the Interactive Schedule will be modified accordingly.

Automatic Dimensioning of Door/Window Previews


If the selected preview cell contains a Door or Window, the Schedule Options include the Add automatic dimensions option.

Check this box to add automatic door/window dimensions to the selected preview picture. Below the checkbox, click Dimension Settings to set dimensioning options for the preview picture, in the appearing Automatic Dimensions dialog box.

642

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout


Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. Use the Restructure Table command to automatically split large tables which exceed the Layout size into parts and lay them out next to each other. The Restructure Table command is available in the Pet Palette, from the node of a selected Schedule placed as a Drawing.

Click the command, then manually resize the Drawing frame. The following image shows a Window Schedule that does not fit onto an A4 sized sheet.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

643

Virtual Building

The Restructure Table command is used to define a new enclosing rectangle for the Schedule table. In this case, ArchiCAD recalculates sizes and lays out the Schedule so it best fits the new geometry. The result: the Schedule is split in two portions which are placed under each other. Note: If the selected Drawing is set to Split Drawing into Multiple Layouts, then the Restructure Table command will enable you to define a new enclosing rectangle, but instead of placing the Schedule parts onto a single Layout, each new part will be placed onto an additional Layout. See Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts.

644

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts


Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. Use this feature to quickly and easily split up a long Schedule and place it onto multiple Layouts, so that all data on the Schedule can be published. This feature is available only for Drawings created from Element Schedules and Project Indexes. The feature works using the Split Drawing among Multiple Layouts checkbox, located on the Frame Panel of Drawing Tool Settings. Whenever you place a Drawing based on an Element Schedule onto a Layout, this checkbox becomes available, and is checked, in Drawing Selection Settings. (For Drawings with any other source, the checkbox is grey.)

If this Drawing does not fit onto a single Layout - as can easily happen with a long Schedule ArchiCAD will create as many Layouts as needed to display the entire contents of the Schedule. In this example, the Window List has been placed on the Layout. The Split Drawing feature has placed the total Window List onto two Layouts. In the Layout Window, Layout is drawn to indicate that it consists of multiple pages:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

645

Virtual Building

In the Navigator Layout Book, only one Layout is shown, but it has a multi-page icon, different from the single Layout icon, and the total number of Layouts used for this Drawing is displayed after the Drawing Name.

If a Layout Window displays a multi-Layout Drawing, the Windows title bar shows the range of Layouts which display the Drawing.

In the Layout Book, you can navigate between Layout pages as usual, using the navigation arrows at the bottom of the Layout Window.

However, if you open a Layout Window which contains a multi-Layout Drawing, the navigation button at the bottom of the screen displays a small black arrow. Click this to access additional navigation options among just the Layouts that display the current multi-page Drawing.

First Page and Last Page here refer to the Layouts of the multi-page Drawing.

646

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place Additional Drawings Next to Multi-Layout Drawing


It is possible to place several multi-page Drawings (Schedules or Indexes) alongside each other, on the same Layouts. For example, suppose you place a long Schedule onto a Layout; ArchiCAD generates a total of three Layouts to display the entire Schedule. Then you place another long Schedule onto the first of those Layouts. ArchiCAD fills up the three existing Layouts with the second Schedule (alongside the first Schedule), and generates any additional Layouts needed to display the full Schedule. If you place any other type of Drawing (i.e. which is neither a Schedule nor a Index) onto a Layout that contains a multi-page Drawing, then that Drawing will appear on every one of that set of Layouts. This can be an advantage if the additional Drawing serves as a Title on the Layout.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

647

Virtual Building

Project Indexes
About Project Indexes Index of Published Items

648

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Project Indexes


Project Indexes are table of contents type items listed in the Project Map of the Navigator palette. They allow you to display and access lists of views, layout sheets and drawings based on a set of filtering criteria. Project indexes are based on schemes defined with the Document > Project Indexes > Project Index Schemes command. The dialog box that appears allows you to: Create, rename, delete, import and export schemes Choose the filtering criteria (depending on the type of the index) Select the parameters and other information to display for the items that match the set criteria. For more information, see Index Settings Dialog Box. Once the new (or modified) scheme is defined, its name appears in the Navigator and you can use it like any other view, meaning that you can add it to a view map, publish it or place it on a layout. Project indexes have their own special icons in the Navigator.

View lists allow you to filter and list views by their location in the Project Map, their scale, model view option combination, layer combination, dimensioning standard and publishing status.

Layout sheet lists allow you to filter and list layouts by their master layouts, subsets and publishing status.

Drawing lists allow you to filter and list drawings by their location (layout and subset), update status and zoom information. To open an index, go to the Navigator palette and double-click its name. The format of the index (including fonts, colors, cell and heading styles) can be fully customized with the controls on the left of the displayed list.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

649

Virtual Building

The content of the index is based on the choices you made in Project Index Schemes. If you need to adjust them, you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Index Settings button top right.

Project indexes are interactive, which means that you can edit some of the fields: for example, you can change the scale or the layer combination of a view, the name or the ID of a layout or a placed drawing. The modifications are carried out immediately. You can move Index Settings among projects by exporting and importing them (use the Import/ Export commands in the Index Settings dialog box).

650

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Index of Published Items


Suppose you are publishing a number of Layouts in a Publisher Set, and you want to include a Sheet Index which indicates which items have been published. One way to do this is to add the field Published to the Index.

The checkboxes will be activated for those items which you have published, but only in the published copy of the Index (not while you work in ArchiCAD). For example, if you publish Foundation and Roof plans, as well as this Sheet Index, on a Layout, then the published Sheet Index Layout will look like this:

If you want the published Sheet Index to list only published items, add Published as a criterion to your Index Settings.

Note: As long as the Published criterion is set to On, the Index as viewed in the ArchiCAD window will be empty. Thus, set this criterion to Off while you format the list, then set it to On before you publish the Sheet Index. The published Sheet Index will then consist of a list of published index items. For more information, see Index Settings Dialog Box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

651

Virtual Building

Construction Elements
Construction Elements are the virtual equivalents of actual three-dimensional building components. They include Walls, Columns, Beams, Roofs, Slabs, Meshes, Zones and Curtain Walls. Each of these elements has a dedicated tool in the ArchiCAD Toolbox. Elements are displayed as solid building components in the 3D Window. Their cut or elevated view can be projected in Section and Elevation windows.

How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD Walls Columns Beams Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Roofs Slabs Meshes Zones Curtain Wall: A System Tool

652

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD


The typical steps in element creation using the Toolbox are: 1) Select the elements tool in the Toolbox and open its settings dialog box. 2) Adjust the settings offered by default to suit your particular situation or purpose. You can choose a Favorite - a predefined element configuration - using the button on top of the Tool Settings dialog box. 3) The panels of the Settings dialog boxes provide lists of pen, material and line options for the elements Core Structure, Cut Surfaces, Outlines, and other parameters where applicable. For more information, see the descriptions of individual panels for each Tool Settings dialog box in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. 4) Where applicable, choose a Geometry Method from the Info Box allowing you to create plain, curved, chained, rotated or polygonal variations of the elements. 5) Draw the element in the Floor Plan or 3D window. Other methods of element creation include: Use the Favorites Palette: double-click on stored Favorite settings for the relevant tool, then click to place an element with those settings. Use the Magic Wand to create irregularly shaped elements Create Element Duplicates of existing elements RoofMaker and TrussMaker from the Design > Design Extras menu. See Element Extras.

Positioning Construction Elements


For any of the construction elements, you define its absolute and relative base height in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of its Settings dialog box.

Positioning Construction Elements to a Custom Elevation Level


The actual elevation of elements is always calculated to Project Zero. However, in some projects you may want to define the input elevation to with reference to some other level. To do this, define one or two alternative Reference Levels in Options > Project Preferences > Reference Levels. These newly defined reference levels will then be available in the Geometry and Positioning panels of all elements Settings dialog boxes.

Gravitate Elements onto a Slab, Roof or Mesh


To make placement more accurate, you can use the Gravity function to place Wall, Column, Beam and Object type elements directly onto a Slab, Roof or Mesh.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

653

Virtual Building

Walls
About Walls Create a Straight Wall Create a Curved Wall Create a Chain of Walls Create a Rectangle of Walls Create a Trapezoid Wall Create a Composite Wall Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Log Wall Create a Gable Wall Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Wall-Wall Intersections Walls and Other Elements Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) Wall Tool Settings

654

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Walls
In ArchiCAD, you can draw walls that are straight, curved, trapezoidal and polygonal. They can be simple, of a single material, or composite, composed of several materials. You can even go a step further, and create complex walls (Profile Wall) of any custom shape and with a combination of materials. Certain parametric objects such as Doors, Windows, and Wall Ends can only be placed into Walls. A Curtain Wall is constructed with a separate, dedicated Curtain Wall tool. See Curtain Wall: A System Tool.

Wall Reference Lines


Each Wall possesses a reference line at the base of the wall, and a direction. The reference line is a heavy black line (including the arrow that shows the Walls direction) that appears when you draw the Wall on the Floor Plan, provided that the View > On-Screen View Options > Walls & Beams Reference Lines feature is switched on.

The reference line helps you achieve the precise connection of Walls for clean intersections. It also establishes hotspots and edges for selecting, moving and transforming Walls. Some Pet Palette editing commands are accessible only from the reference-line side of the selected Wall, as shown in the two images here:

The reference line is also relevant for determining which side of the wall is which, for assigning materials to the 3D model (in the Wall Model Panel). Depending on the chosen Construction and Geometry Method, the wall body protrudes on either or both sides of the reference line. The direction of the wall is defined by the order in which you define the walls endpoints. Note: With the commands of the Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On), you can modify the thickness, the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

655

Virtual Building

Display of Walls
Use the panels of the Wall Tool Settings dialog box to choose attributes for the display of your wall in the various 2D and 3D windows. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed wall should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. Some aspects of Wall display depend on the current settings in View > On-Screen View Options. Wall & Beam Intersections can be set on and off. Fill patterns can be shown as Vectorial Hatching or bitmap. Other display options for a walls fill patterns are set in the Model View Options Override Fill Display Panel. In the case of composite walls, you can choose to display or hide the separator lines.

When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Wall Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Walls, in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.

656

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Straight Wall


The Single Straight Wall method produces one straight wall element at a time.

With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Straight Wall Geometry method from the Info Box and draw the wall segment on the plan. In both Floor Plan and 3D, you define the length of Wall segments by clicking at their endpoints. Note: This CAD-like drawing method is the default method of drawing segments in ArchiCAD, but you can change it in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods. The moment you start drawing the Wall, a ghost contour appears and it follows the cursor until you click at the second endpoint.

Walls can be stretched using either menu commands or pet palette commands. See Stretching Walls.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

657

Virtual Building

Create a Curved Wall


With the Wall Tool selected, choose one of the three Curved Wall Geometry Methods from the Info Box.

The first option defines the curved wall by the arcs or circles centerpoint and radius. Your first click defines the centerpoint. A ghost contour of the circular wall follows your cursor until you click a second to time to define the radius. After that, only a partial ghost curved segment is shown, until you click a third time to define the length of the arc walls circumference. If you need a full circular wall, double-click when defining its radius. When all three points are defined, the ghost contour is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches.

The second option defines the curved wall by three points on the arcs circumference. The first two clicks define two points that you will probably locate on points connecting other elements, grid intersections or special snap points. After that, a ghost circle follows the cursor until you click a third time to define the third point.

658

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

A fourth click is needed to define the length of the arc segment. Double-click the third point to define a full circular wall. Note that the second and the third points do not need to be actually part of the arc wall.

When the arc length is defined, the ghost arc is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches.

The third option only defines full circular shapes based on three tangential edges or points. In this process, you select three initial points: these can be a tangent edge (indicated by the Mercedes cursor), a node (indicated by the Checkmark cursor), or a free-floating point (indicated by the Crosshair cursor.) An endpoint cannot qualify as a tangent edge when using this method, so a maximum of two endpoints are allowed. If more than two are selected, the process will revert to the second method described above. Only linear tangency is allowed: all tangent points must be on the straight edges of Slabs, Lines, Walls, etc. If you click a radial edge with the Mercedes cursor, the resulting Circle will pass through that point rather than being a tangent to the curve. The next step depends on the geometric situation. If there is only one solution, the circular Wall is automatically drawn.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

659

Virtual Building

If there are two or four solutions, the Eyeball cursor appears and the ghost contour of the Wall flips from one position to the other as you move the cursor around. Click when it is at the right place to complete the circular wall.

If there is no solution, (for example, if you define three parallel edges for tangency), no circle will be made. Note: Since Walls need to have two endpoints, the fully closed circular Wall that you draw will in fact consist of two half-circles. Walls in the forms of full ellipses, elliptic arcs or splines cannot be created directly, but you can trace the shapes of plain drawing elements with the Magic Wand.

Stretching Curves Curve/Straighten Element Edge

660

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Chain of Walls


A chained wall is a sequence of connected straight or curved wall elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Chained Wall method from the Info Box. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button.)

As soon as you start drawing the first Wall, a pet palette appears, offering you geometry options for drawing a straight or a curved segment.

The options are: A straight wall segment A curved segment tangential to the previous one (cannot be used for the first wall segment) A curved segment tangential to a line you define before actually drawing the segment A curved segment passing through two points A curved segment defined by its centerpoint, radius and length

Place the cursor on the option that suits you best and define the endpoint of the first segment using the methods described above for single Wall segments. This endpoint automatically becomes the starting point of the next Wall segment. When you want to finish drawing Wall chain segments, double-click the endpoint of the last segment. Throughout the process, a ghost contour of the Wall segments is shown. The full Walls are only displayed when you are finished. Clicking the Cancel button in the context menu or the Delete key at any time during drafting will abort the process, and no elements will be created. Choosing Edit > Undo command will remove the entire new chain of Walls, not just the last segment. Hitting the Backspace key allows you to undo the previous segment and continue the creation of the Wall chain. If you change the Walls attributes in the Info Box during the creation process, all created Wall segments will have the modified attributes (reference line position, line type, fill color, material, etc.).
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

661

Virtual Building

If necessary, you can switch methods on the fly with the pet palette. If the Edit > Grouping > Autogroup function is switched on, the chained Wall segments will be created as part of a group. For more information, see Group Elements.

662

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Rectangle of Walls


The Rectangle Wall method produces four Wall elements with coincident nodes by defining the diagonal line of a rectangle. With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Rectangle Wall method from the Info Box. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button.)

Draw the diagonal of the rectangular wall and click to define its length. The rectangle wall is created. Its four sides are always aligned orthogonally with the Normal Grid and are not affected by the use of a Rotated Grid.

The Rotated Rectangle Wall method produces four wall elements as with the previous method, except that you first define a rotation vector for the rectangles base reference line. Then drag the cursor to define the rectangle.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

663

Virtual Building

Create a Trapezoid Wall


The Trapezoid or Non-Parallel method allows you to draw straight Walls whose thickness is not constant.

You draw this type of Wall as a straight Wall, except that you will first enter the thickness of the Wall at its two endpoints, using the Wall Thickness fields in the Info Box or in Wall Settings.

Composite Trapezoid Wall


When drawing a trapezoid Wall with a composite fill, only the outermost Core skins thickness reflects the trapezoidal shape of the Wall. In the image below, two of the skins are marked as Core, but only the Insulation core skin - the outermost Core - has a trapezoid shape.

See also Composite Structures.

664

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Composite Wall


You can apply or customize a composite structure for a wall. For more information, see Composite Structures and Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab. (Remember that the models Partial Structure Display settings will affect the display of composite walls.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

665

Virtual Building

Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall)


To define a polygonal wall block of free shape, choose the Polygon Wall Geometry Method in the Info Box. Polygon Walls can contain Doors or Windows. For Polygon Walls, only simple fills are available (no composites). Draw the contour of the Polygon Wall, using pet palette segment options as needed (as when drawing a chained wall). Both straight and curved edges are allowed.

Once you have closed the polygon, click with the hammer cursor to complete the wall. If you define a polygon whose edges intersect themselves, ArchiCAD will warn you about this, but the wall will still be drawn. The walls edges will include one reference edge (like a straight walls reference line).

To make another edge the reference edge, select an endpoint of the current reference edge. The pet palette contains a command with which you can move the reference edge endpoints to other nodes of the polygon wall.

When you assign materials to the surfaces of a polygon wall in the Model panel of Wall Settings, the materials are assigned depending on the location of the reference edge. The Left Material is the reference-edge surface; here, in red. Side Material are the two surfaces adjacent to the reference edge; here, in gold.

666

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Right Material surfaces are assigned to all other edges (those which are opposite the reference edge), here, in blue.

To edit polygon walls, click the nodes and edges of the selected Walls and use the pet palette.

When connected to other, plain walls, wall polygons keep their original contour by default. If you wish to override this setting, check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active in the Info Box). For more information, see PolyWall Corners.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

667

Virtual Building

Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall


To draw a wall whose vertical axis is slanted on either or both sides, go to Wall Geometry and Positioning Panel, and click the desired Slanted Wall Icon, then enter the desired wall angle(s).

A slanted wall tilts in one direction; its two faces are parallel to each other. A double-slanted wall has faces which are not parallel; in Section view, the wall is trapezoid in shape. When setting the angles of a double-slanted wall, you are constrained by the minimum thickness of the top of the wall. For a simple structure (using a single material), this can be zero. The top of a composite wall, however, has to be wide enough to accommodate all of the skins. The height of either type of slanted wall is the distance between its lowest and highest point. When entering a height value of a double-slanted wall, you face the obvious constraint that the walls width at the top cannot be negative (i.e. once the two faces meet, you cant go any higher.) The thickness of a slanted wall is its thickness perpendicular to its slant vector (as indicated by the icon in the Info Box):

The thickness of a double-slanted wall equals the width of the wall base. If you switch from one kind of slant to another, the wall is transformed as follows: If you transform a single-slanted into a double-slanted wall, the new walls width (i.e. its wall base) will take on the width of the old, single-slanted wall. Similarly, if you have a double-slanted wall and change it to either a vertical or single-slanted wall, the new wall will have the same width as that of the old, double-slanted wall. For information on modifying slanted wall geometry, see Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns.

668

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Log Wall


You can create straight walls constructed from logs. Log details appear in both the 3D Window and Section/Elevation/IE Windows.

Clicking the Log Details button in the Model panel of the Wall Settings dialog box opens the Log Details Dialog Box with a number of geometry and texture options. Note: Log construction is only available for simple straight walls. When determining the logs height, remember that if you enter a value that is larger than the walls width parameter, the logs will not rest on each other.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

669

Virtual Building

Create a Gable Wall


When you need walls to fit a Roof or you want Walls with cutoff corners, you can obtain them by cutting regular Rectangular Walls with appropriate roof pitches as shown below. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof.

670

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Wall-Wall Intersections
The connection of walls and their fills on the floor plan and in 3D is determined first of all by their Wall Priorities. When walls of unequal priorities intersect, the element of higher priority will remain intact in 3D. (In 2D, the element of higher priority will be in front.) The element of lower priority will be cut, and the intersected part removed You can set a separate priority for each individual wall, on a scale of 0-16 (even numbers only), using the Wall Priority slider switch (Wall Settings > Floor Plan and Section panel). To make alignment of connecting walls easier, the intelligent cursor snaps to all sides and corners of wall segments. In the case of composite walls, the cursor snaps to each endpoint of the inner skin as well.

Display of Intersecting Composite Wall Skins (2D only)


When displaying an intersecting composite wall in 2D windows and the 3D Document window, you can control its display of skin by skin if you wish. Each skin of a composite wall has a separate intersection priority, which you can fine-tune in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.

These Walls intersect according to the following rules: Skins with higher priorities will block skins with lower priorities. Skins with equal priorities will form a mitered joint. (provided they have the same fill pattern)
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

671

Virtual Building

Wall Outlines and Overhead lines also intersect each other. Once you set these skin priorities for a composite wall, you must activate them with the Enable Skin Priorities checkbox (in Wall Tool Settings: Floor Plan & Section Panel).

However, if you want to set a single 2D intersection priority for the composite Wall as a whole, do not check Enable Skin Priorities; in this case, the Wall Priority slider switch (in Wall Tool Settings: Structure) will prevail for this wall in 2D as well as 3D.

Composite Wall Intersection Example


You can make good use of the priority options to fine-tune the appearance of connecting fills on your floor plan. In the example below, the Wall Priorities of both Walls are set to 8 in their Wall Settings dialog boxes. The skins of the wall core do not intersect the way we want.

672

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

So, in Options > Element Attributes > Composites, we set Skin Priority numbers for the Composite used for these Walls. In this composite, we set the Core skins Priority to 12. Then we return to the Wall Settings dialog box and check the Enable Skin Priorities box.

Now, the skins intersect as desired.

Display of Intersecting Profile Wall Skins


Complex Wall skins are represented as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. A priority value is assigned to each component of a Complex structure, just as they are assigned to each skin of Composite Structures. For more information, see Components - Default/Selected Panel.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

673

Virtual Building

For example, the predefined Brick Wall with Footing complex wall has three components. In the Profile Editor, select each of these components in turn to assign a separate intersection priority for each.

Note: Wall (and Composite Structure) and Column Intersection Priority Numbers are always even numbers; Beam Intersection Priority Numbers are always odd numbers. Thus, any time a Wall/Column intersects with a Beam in 3D, the program can determine which is dominant depending on their Priority Numbers.

674

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Wall Intersection Display in 2D


For best display of wall intersections in 2D, the reference lines of the intersecting walls must be joined together. Then the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections option (View > On-Screen View Options) will ensure that walls are joined correctly in 2D. Note: Wall intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. However, if intersecting walls are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups, then wall intersection will not take place. For more information, see Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections. When drawing a new wall to meet an existing wall, it is sufficient to click any edge or inside the hatching of the target Wall. You dont have to meet the target walls reference line manually; the new Walls reference line will be adjusted automatically for proper connection, and the walls will also be joined correctly in 3D. This feature is called Auto Intersection, and works only if the Options > Auto Intersection option is switched On.

Walls in an X Intersection
Two walls crossing each other in an X junction will automatically create a clean intersection. When making an X wall junction, the wall you place second will cut the wall that is already on the plan, provided that the two walls have equal intersection priority. The intersection sequence is visible in the 2D window (if Clean Wall and Intersections is off) as well as in the 3D window. You can modify this intersection sequence for X intersections using the Edit > Display Order command. The 2D Display Order affects the intersection sequence in both the 2D and 3D windows.

Walls in L or T Intersections
In the case of T intersections, if the connecting walls have equal priorities, then the running wall will prevail over the adjoining wall. In the case of L intersections, if the connecting walls have equal priorities and are of equal thicknesses, they will be joined in random order. To change the order in which they are joined, change their Wall Priorities. If two walls are connected in an L intersection and have equal priorities, the fill that is thicker has priority.

L or T intersections are not affected by Display Order modifications.


ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

675

Virtual Building

If you need a more elaborate drawing detail at wall intersections, you can create a patch or a detail drawing.

Intersecting Walls in 3D
To improve the appearance of wall connections in 3D, especially when connecting walls of different heights, enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each wall has been cut. Intersections involving complex walls will always be calculated as if this function were active. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance. If your projects wall intersections involve simple walls of equal heights, you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked.

PolyWall Corners
When connected to other, plain walls, wall polygons keep their original contour by default. If you wish to override this setting, check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active). In the following example, a Single Wall is connected to a Wall Polygon.

The first illustration shows you the situation with View > On-Screen View Options > Clean Wall & Beam Intersections turned Off. Turning Clean Wall & Beam Intersections On will give a different results depending on whether PolyWall Corners Can Change is active.

676

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On)


Note: This tool is not visible in the interface according to ArchiCADs Standard Work Environment profile. You can add it to the Edit menu (or any other menu) by customizing the menu scheme in Options > Work Environment > Work Environment > Command Layout Schemes > Menus. For more information, see Customizing Menus. With the commands of the Modify Wall hierarchical menu, you can modify the thickness, the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements.

With the Modify Wall Structure command, you can change the hatching of the selected Walls, and still keep the position of a desired part of the Wall. At the top of the dialog box, you can set the fill. If the chosen fill is not a composite, you can set its thickness, otherwise the thickness of the core layer is displayed. Click the radio button at the bottom to choose which part of the wall should keep its position after the modification. (If possible, this will be done by adding an offset to the reference line. If not, the reference line will be moved.) With the Modify Wall Reference Line command, you can move the reference line of the selected walls without changing the walls position on the Floor Plan.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

677

Virtual Building

On the left side of the dialog box, you can change the reference line side of walls. On the right you can add an offset to the reference line to position it to the desired part of the wall.

With the Invert Direction command, you can change the direction of the reference line. (This is visible when the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections command toggle is Off.) See also Wall Reference Lines.

678

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Walls and Other Elements


Beams and Walls: Intersection priorities for walls and beams are set at the element level in their respective Settings dialog boxes. (Wall priorities are always even numbers; beam priorities are odd.) When a wall intersects a beam, the element of higher priority will remain intact. The element of lower priority will be cut in 3D, which means that the intersection part will be removed from it. Columns and Walls: see Columns and Other Elements. Roofs and Walls: The top or the bottom surface of Walls can be trimmed to Roofs: see Trim Element to Roof Walls and Curtain Walls: Walls can be connected to Curtain Walls using the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect Wall command. See Connect Wall to Curtain Wall. Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Wall settings, define how the Wall should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter), or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in, or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. See Relation to Zones.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

679

Virtual Building

Columns
Columns in ArchiCAD are made up of two components: the load-bearing core and the optional veneer used to simulate fire proofing or any kind of sheathing around the core. The Columns section can be rectangular or circular, or they can be complex, as defined in a profile. Columns can stand free, or they can be smartly connected to walls. The columns axis can be either vertical or slanted. Double-click the Column tool icon to open the Column Tool Settings and set your preferences.

Creating Columns Create a Slanted Column Columns and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Column Tool Settings

680

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Column Display on Floor Plan


Attributes for each part of the Floor Plan representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the columns Settings dialog box. Use the panels of the Column Tool Settings dialog box to choose attributes for the display of your column in the various 2D and 3D windows. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed column should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.

Crossing Symbol
The Floor Plan Symbol options (in Column Tool Settings, Floor Plan and Section Panel) refer to the columns crossing symbol (Plain, Slash, X, or Crosshair). The display of all column floor plan symbols in the project can be turned on or off with the Show Column Symbol checkbox in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options for Construction Elements.

Core and Veneer


In Section view, the core fill pattern is shown, while in Elevations the Column is displayed with its contour only. The structure and cut attributes of the core and veneer are set in the Floor Plan & Section panel of Column Settings. The contour of Column cores with a slash or an X is always fully drawn, regardless of any other factors.

Unwrapped Columns on the Floor Plan


Unwrapped Columns (those placed with the Freestanding Construction method) do not modify the shape of the wall, just cut out a place for themselves, breaking through all wall skins.

The connection line between wall skins and the Column are removed where their fill patterns match.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

681

Virtual Building

Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan


Wrapped Columns (those placed with the wrapped construction method) break through the core skins of composite Walls. The other (non-core) wall skins wrap around the column, thus adding this thickness to the column. Note: For composite walls, the skins that are core are defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.

Wrapping on the Floor Plan will only occur if: the Column was placed using the Wrapped Method it intersects a composite Wall the composite Wall type has at least one skin that is non-core (which will wrap around) the Column touches or intersects the core skin(s) of the composite Wall Note: Wrapping is not available for curved or polygonal Walls.

682

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Column Display in 3D
The Model panel controls the walls material settings in 3D view. In 3D, a single material is used to display all their surfaces.

Columns in 3D Views
Columns placed with the Wrapped Construction Method will inherit the Surface Material of the connecting Walls, even if the wall is not a composite wall, and even if there are no wall skins configured to actually wrap around the Columns.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

683

Virtual Building

Unwrapped columns retain their own materials in 3D.

If Column surfaces are connected to wall or slab surfaces or other Column surfaces within the same 3D plane, the connection lines are eliminated in 3D view when using the Internal 3D engine.

684

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Creating Columns
Use the Column tool to create new columns in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window. Choose the desired column attributes and geometry from Column Tool Settings, then click to place the column into the project. After placement, you can still stretch a columns height in the 3D window. See Stretch Height.

Column Placement Methods


There are three Geometry Methods (input methods) available in the Info Box for placing Columns.

Simple: Place the Column with one click. The Column axis will be projected vertically from the Floor Plan. Rotated: Your first click determines the position of the Columns Anchor Point at its Base, the second will define its rotation angle around a vertical axis. Revolved placement method: If your column is complex and/or slanted, this input method provides a three-step placement process. First, click to place the column. Second, rotate it around its vertical axis and click. Third, revolve it around its own, slanted axis (i.e. set the rotation angle), and click to complete.

Column Construction Methods


When placing a Column that will intersect a Composite wall, your choice of Geometry method wrapped or unwrapped - will affect the display of the wall/column in the Floor Plan. Use the wrapped/unwrapped (or freestanding) icons from the Column Info Box or the Column Settings dialog box to determine how the columns will be interact with composite walls.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

685

Virtual Building

Wrapped Columns can only break through the core skins of composite Walls. The other wall skins wrap around the column, retaining their thickness.

For more information, see Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan.

686

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Slanted Column


From Column Tool Settings, choose the Slanted icon and enter a slant angle in degrees.

Choose a Placement Method from the Info Box, then place the column. (See Column Placement Methods.) See also Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

687

Virtual Building

Columns and Other Elements


Beams and Columns: When a Beam crosses a Column, the element of lower priority is cut in 3D. Column Priority vs. Beams is a global setting applicable to all columns; it is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Beam Priority is set in the Beam Tool Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). Walls and Columns: See Column Display on Floor Plan. Roofs and Columns: The top or bottom surface of Columns can be trimmed to roofs. See Trim Element to Roof. Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Column settings, define how the Column should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter), or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in, or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. See Relation to Zones.

688

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Beams
ArchiCAD Beams are horizontal or inclined construction elements with vertical end faces. They can be rectangular or complex in shape.

Beam Reference Axis Beam Display on the Floor Plan Create a Beam Create a Hole in a Beam How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces Beams and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Beam Tool Settings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

689

Virtual Building

Beam Reference Axis


Each Beam possesses a reference axis (center line) which serves the precise connection of Beams for clean intersections and establishes hotspots and edges for selecting, moving and transforming Beams. Its direction determines the beams left and right surfaces for the purpose of applying materials in the Beam Model Panel. The direction of the reference axis follows your cursor as you drag it to draw the beam. (To see the arrow on the beam that indicates the axis direction, turn on View > On-Screen View Options > Walls and Beams Reference Lines.) You can show/hide the reference axis (center line) of any individual beam using the Show Center Line checkbox in the Symbols part of Beam Floor Plan and Section Panel).

690

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Beam Display on the Floor Plan


When you create a beam with the Beam Tool, ArchiCAD generates its Floor Plan display according to your choices in Beam Tool Settings. These determine the individual beams structure and its fill and line attributes. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed beam should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.

Global Settings for Beam Display


In Document > Set Model View > Model View Options (Options for Construction Elements panel), the Show Beam as options apply globally to all beams in the project. Choose to display beam in their entirety, or just the reference lines, or just the contours.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

691

Virtual Building

Create a Beam
Define Beam settings in the Beam Tool Settings dialog box. When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Beam Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Beams. New Beams can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.

Beam Geometry
There are four Geometry Methods available for drawing Beams.

Choose one of these Geometry Methods from the Info Box. The Single Beam method produces a beam element by clicking twice, at the reference lines starting point and endpoint. The PolyBeam method creates a sequence of connected beam elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. The process for drawing chained Beams is the same as for Walls. Only straight beam segments can be drawn when creating a PolyBeam. When you click to end the definition of the first Beam, you automatically start drawing the second one, and so on, until you double-click to finish drawing the chained Beams. The Rectangle Beam produces four beam elements with coincident nodes and aligned to the X and Y axes. Define the rectangle by clicking the starting point and the endpoint of one of its diagonal lines. The Rotated Rectangle Beam method produces four beam elements with coincident nodes, the first side of the rectangle being defined by the first two mouse clicks at their endpoints and the perpendicular side defined by the third mouse click.

692

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create an Inclined Beam


To create an inclined (slanted) beam, click the inclined beam icon (in either the Info Box or in Beam Settings). The slant angle field is now enabled. The slant angle of Inclined Beams must be between -89 and +89, and is measured from the starting point of the Beam. The Beam is inclined in the vertical plane defined by its Axis.

Inclined Beams are placed the same way as Horizontal Beams. The 3D body of an Inclined Beam is created so that the height of its section cut by a plane perpendicular to its Inclined Axis will be constant at every point (and equal to the Beam Height value). In the image below, the Beams height was set to 500 mm in its Settings dialog.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

693

Virtual Building

Create a Hole in a Beam


All types of Beams can include Holes. Holes can be circular or rectangular, and Holes of different shapes and sizes can appear in the same Beam. Holes are defined after the Beam has been placed. The geometry of the Holes is defined in the Hole panel of the selected Beams Settings dialog box. Select the desired Beam and make sure that the Beam tool is active.

On the Floor Plan, create a hole by clicking on the Beams reference line. The pet palette appears with the possible editing choices. Click the Hole icon. The Beam Hole Settings dialog box will appear, letting you set hole parameters.

Click OK to apply the beam hole settings; the Hole will immediately appear in the Beam. In the 3D window, you can access the pet palette by clicking the Mercedes cursor on a top edge of the selected Beam element.

694

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Selecting and Modifying Holes


If you need a number of Holes in the Beam whose settings are dissimilar, you may wish to first create the series of Holes by multiplying them and then fine-tune some of the Holes shapes, sizes or positions. To select a hole, make sure the Beam tool is active, then Shift-click in the center of the hole.

Note that only one selected hole can be edited at a time, but if you select the Beam itself, you can modify the values of all holes simultaneously. To modify a selected Holes shape and size, use the controls in the Beam Settings dialog box or the Info Box. The position of the Hole can also be changed graphically. Selected Holes can be moved along the Beam in Floor Plan view. In 3D, the pet palette offers you the possibility of moving the Holes up and down.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

695

Virtual Building

How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces


For end faces at free angles, use the following trick: 1) Draw your Beam. 2) Set Beam thickness to zero in the Beam Settings dialog box in order to draw a second (virtual) Beam. 3) Draw the zero thickness Beam starting from the end of the reference axis of the first Beam at the desired angle as shown in the figure below.

4) Click to complete the zero-thickness beam and view the result in 3D.

5) Touch up the floor plan symbol by adding a line segment to complete the gap.

696

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Beams and Other Elements


Beam Intersection Priority
A Beams intersection priority is set using the Beam Priority slider in Beam Floor Plan and Section Panel. When Beams cross Walls or Columns, the element of lower priority will be cut in 3D, which means that the intersection part will be removed. The element of higher priority will remain intact. This applies to volume calculations as well. Note: The priority of Columns vs. Beams is a global control set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Slabs and Beams: Beams always cut Slabs when the two elements join in space (provided that their Layers belong to the same intersection priority group). This applies to both the 3D Window and volume calculations. Roofs and Beams: Beams can be trimmed to Roofs using the Trim to Roof command. (See Trim Element to Roof.)

Auto-Intersection of Beams with Other Beams


When a Beam intersects another Beam, ArchiCAD automatically cleans crossings, T and L junctions of Beams if the Options > Auto Intersection feature is turned on. If one end of the joining Beam falls within the contour of the other Beam, the end of the joining Beam will automatically adjust to the reference axis. Their appearance in 3D will be cleaned up accordingly, provided that the beams have the same intersection priority.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

697

Virtual Building

Beam junctions are also cleaned up if the crossing or joining Beams run at different elevations. If Beams pass each other in space, without intersecting reference lines, the junction will be cleaned up depending on their respective intersection priorities.

Beam Connections in 3D
To improve the appearance of beam connections in 3D, especially when connecting walls of different heights, enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each beam has been cut. Intersections involving complex beam will always be calculated as if this function were active. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance. If your projects intersections involve simple beams at uniform elevations, you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked.

Note: Beam intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. However, if intersecting beam are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups, then beam intersection will not take place. See Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections.

698

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile


About Complex Profile Elements Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile Profile Manager Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

699

Virtual Building

About Complex Profile Elements


If customizing a standard construction element gets very complicated, or you dont find a specialized construction object in the library, you can place a profiled Wall, Column or Beam, known as a Complex Profile. Complex Profiles are predefined and custom defined walls, columns and beams that can be edited by hand to take nearly any desired shape. For example, the following image shows a curved wall to which the Brick Wall with Footing profile has been applied.

A Complex Profile element is composed of a cross-sectional profile that is extruded perpendicular to the profiles plane. To place a complex element, you can use or modify a predefined profile, or create a new one. Note: You can also place a Standard steel Column or Beam profile from a catalog. See Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile. A saved Complex Profile element is handled as an attribute of the Wall, Column, and/or Beam element. Saved profiles will appear in the Settings dialog box of the respective tool. Alternatively, you can apply a custom profile to any selected element in the model window on a one-time basis without having to save it as an attribute.

700

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

ArchiCAD ships a number of predefined profile elements for these tools. To use them, do the following: Open the Wall (Column, Beam) Settings dialog box. Choose Profiled Wall from the Geometry and Positioning panel.

The Structure section of the Floor Plan and Section panel includes a pop-up that lets you choose among saved profiles for the current element. The pop-up includes a preview to help you choose.

Choose the desired profile, then adjust the rest of the settings in the element Settings dialog box as you would for any other element. Click on the plan to place. Once you place a complex profile element, you can modify it graphically on-screen, similar to other construction elements. Special pet palette commands are available to stretch and rotate profile elements: see Modifying Complex Profile Elements.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

701

Virtual Building

Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element


Choose Design > Complex Profiles > Profile Manager. The Profile Manager Dialog Box appears. Manage Profiles: Choose a command in this section of the Profile Manager depending on what you want to do. To create a new profile, click New. To create a new profile based on an existing profile: Choose an existing profile, then click Duplicate.

To create a new profile using the shape of a selected Wall, Beam or Column element in the active model window, click the Capture elements profile button in the Profile Manager (or choose Capture Profile of selection from the context menu of a selected element in the model window). To edit an existing profile, select it, then click Edit chosen profile. The Profile Editor window opens. In this window you will draw or edit the cross-section of the profile element, using the 2D drawing tools that are available. Use the Fill tool to draw the cross-section of the complex profile and edit it, with the usual 2D techniques, to achieve the desired shape. Your cross-sectional profile can contain multiple shapes; they will all be saved together as a single profile. The Origin shown in the Profile Editor window is a significant reference point: if the complex element is a Wall, the origin represents the location of the Walls reference line. In case of a Column or Beam, the origin represents the location of the elements axis. You cannot move this origin, but you can move the profile shape so that it correctly positioned with respect to the origin.

702

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Only hotspots and shapes drawn with the Fill tool in the Profile Editor window will be part of the saved profile. Other 2D elements added to the Profile Editor window (lines, dimensioning, etc.) can be used as local drafting aids, but will have no effect on the final appearance of the complex profile when placed into the model. (These drafting aids are located on the Drafting Design Layer; see below.) In Profile Manager, the Use with buttons, like those in other Attribute Settings dialog boxes, determine which ArchiCAD tools can be used to place the current profile. The rest of the Profile Manager settings are active only if the Profile Editor is open. Design Layers: The Design Layers section of Profile Manager contains layer settings that apply to the Profile Editor window only.

The layer of the active tool will be highlighted. For example, if the Fill or Hotspot tool is active, the Construction layer will be highlighted; all items drawn on the Construction layer will be saved as part of the profile. Other 2D elements in this window will be placed on the Drafting layer; while they will be saved as part of the profile attribute, they will not be visible in the placed profile. Note: Dimension elements placed in the Profile Editor window are not saved as part of the attribute; they are for drafting purposes only. The show/hide parameters for Design Layers affect the Profile Editor window only. Horizontal and Vertical Stretch (in the list of Design Layers) are an optional attribute of the profile. Check the boxes to switch on the stretch parameter in either or both directions. If you do not switch it on, you will not be able to stretch or resize the cross-section of the resulting profile once you place it on the plan.

If Horizontal/Vertical Stretch is switched on, the Profile Editor window displays dotted lines indicating the plane that can be stretched. Within the Profile Editor window, you can move these lines like any other drawing element to any part of the profile; these will serve as the stretch handles of the resulting profile element after it is placed in the model.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

703

Virtual Building

If you switch on Opening Reference (in the list of Design Layers), the Profile Editor window displays a line representing the reference line at which doors/windows will be placed, once you place the profile wall on the plan.

If necessary, edit the line, like any other line, to conform to the shape of the profile so that openings will be in the right place. If you do not switch on Opening Reference, doors/windows will be placed along the profile elements bounding box.

Edit Profile Components


Use the controls in the Components panel of Profile Manager to set the attributes of each profile component (i.e., the solid body represented by each fill drawn in the Profile Editor window) individually. Select a component (represented by a fill) in the Profile Editor window. Edit its intersection priority as needed. Note: This setting will be applied to the placed profile element only if you check Enable Skin Priorities in the Structure/Cut Surfaces/Outlines part of the elements Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel).

Edge/Side Materials for Profile Element


Use the Materials pop-up under Side Material in Profile Editor to select a material for the 3D display of the sides of the profile element. This material will be applied to all sides of the selected component (Uniform).

704

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

To apply a different material to one or more selected sides of this component, select a profile component fill in the Profile Editor window and execute the pet palette command Set parameters for profile edge, then edit the controls in the appearing Custom Edge Settings dialog box. These custom edge settings will be applied to the edge from which you opened the Pet Palette (Selected edge only), or to all edges. If needed, you can apply a different custom edge material/contour line to each individual edge.

Store or Apply a Modified Complex Profile


Click Store Profile to name and save the profile you have edited. If a newly stored profile is a modified version of an existing profile, and you do not rename it, then the modifications will be applied to all profile elements of this type that have been placed in the plan. If you do not want to store the profile, and need the profile only for a one-time use, you can apply it to a selected element in the model, using the Apply to selection button. The selected element will turn into that profile element. The unstored profile is called Custom until it is stored.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

705

Virtual Building

Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements


A quick way to create a complex profile is to use the Design > Complex Profiles > Merge Walls/ Columns/Beams. To use this command, draw multiple walls, columns or beams in the model window. The elements must be of the same type and must be parallel to each other. Executing the command will create a new profile element, which will replace the original elements. The new profile element will be as long as the longest original element, and will inherit the attributes of the original as well as any wall openings. By default, the new profile is named custom but can be opened in the Profile Editor, modified and renamed. To merge two or more parallel Straight Walls, use the Merge Walls command on them. The Walls will become the same length, and the cross section of the resulting Wall will be a unity of the cross sections of the two Walls. The bodies of the two Walls do not need to touch, they may be at a distance from each other. This command works only for Straight Walls (Vertical, Slanted, Double-Slanted, Custom Profile). It does not work for Trapezoid, Polygonal and Curved Walls.

The Merge Columns command allows you to merge two or more Columns whose axes are parallel to each other. If this condition is met, all types of Columns (Vertical, Slanted, Custom Profile) may be merged. More than two Columns may be merged at the same time.

706

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Use the Merge Beams command to merge two or more Beams whose axes are parallel to each other. If this condition is met, all types of Beams (Horizontal, Inclined, Custom Profile) may be merged.

Profile Manager Dialog Box

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

707

Virtual Building

Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile


If you exchange data with structural softwares, using the IFC standard, it can be helpful to use standard elements as your profile Columns or Beams. During the data exchange process, those structural engineering programs will recognize and identify such standard elements accurately and completely, without requiring any settings adjustments. Use the Options > Import Standard Steel Profile command. This brings up the Profile Database.

Profile Database

In this image, our list of Project Profiles (the list window on the right) is empty, so we must add selected profiles from the database. From the non-editable Available Profiles list on the left, you can access thousands of standard profiles. (If needed, sort the list columns by Name or by specific dimension.) Use the Country Code, Profile Types and Geometry controls to help find the profiles you need.

708

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Select these, then click Add Profile to the Project.

The selected structures now appear in the list to the right. (If needed, click Remove to remove a project profile.) Click Import. The selected profiles are now available for use in your ArchiCAD project.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

709

Virtual Building

Place Structural Profile Element


Choose the Complex geometry method in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of Column or Beam Settings. In the Core Structure pop-up of the Floor Plan and Section panel of Column (or Beam) Settings, choose the profile you need.

710

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

When placing the structural Column or Beam, note that its insertion point is the center of the objects bounding box. However, an additional hotspot is located at the elements center of gravity.

These predefined steel profile Beams and Columns can be listed by name in the Interactive Schedule: just include Cut Fill/Profile in the Fields panel of Interactive Schedule Scheme Settings.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

711

Virtual Building

Roofs
About Roofs Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan Create a Simple Roof in 3D Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof Create a Dome-Shaped Roof Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof Create a Hole in a Roof Modify the Roof Slant Angle Create Roof Level Lines Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material Intersect Roof Planes Trim Element to Roof Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker Roof Tool Settings

712

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Roofs
ArchiCADs flexible Roofs can be used to create both standard and abstract 3D shapes meeting a wide variety of needs. The roofs elevation is measured by the elevation of the pivot line, a horizontal non-printing line that you draw when creating the roof. In most cases, you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a wall Reference Line or a slab edge. Note: You can hide all pivot lines by disabling the Roof Pivot Lines option in View > OnScreen View Options. The Pivot Line elevation is shown in the roofs info box (the B value).

This is the same value as the Roofs Relative Base Height, in Roof Settings. The Roof Slope Angle (or pitch) is measured from this pivot line. The Roof Pitch value is also shown in the Info Box (the T value).

See also Modify the Roof Slant Angle. To aid in precise element placement, you can turn on the Gravitate to Roof command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Roof.

Display of Roofs
Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Roof Tool Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box, combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed roof should be displayed. For Roofs, the default Floor Plan Display option is Projected with Overhead. For more information on Floor Plan display of roofs, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.

Roof Geometry
The Roof tool has six geometry methods in the Info Box, allowing you to create both simple and complex roof shapes. The options are: Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle, Polyroof, Dome and Barrel-vaulted. Note that only four options are visible at a time. The remaining options can be viewed by holding down the button to pop out the additional icons.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

713

Virtual Building

When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Roof Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Roofs. New Roofs can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window, although some options differ or are restricted.

Gravitate New Elements onto a Roof


Use the Gravity control to place Wall, Column, Beam and Object type elements relative to the elevation of a Roof.

714

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan


Choose one of the first three Geometry Methods in the Info Box (Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle), then define the position of the pivot line with two clicks. With the Rectangle method, the roof will always be orthogonal. In most cases, you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a wall Reference Line or a slab edge. As an aid in drawing the pivot line, the cursor will change to a Heavy Checkmark/Heavy Mercedes when it hits a wall or beam reference line; it will change to a Light Checkmark/Light Mercedes when it hits any edge that is not a Wall or Beam reference line.

1) Draw the pivot line.

2) After you draw the pivot line, a cursor in the form of an Eyeball will appear. Use this cursor to click on the side of the pivot line where you want the roof plane to rise (or, in the case of a negative roof pitch, slope downward).

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

715

Virtual Building

716

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

3) You can then draw the contour of the roof by clicking on each of the new roofs nodes. Or use the Magic Wand: click on an existing element to serve as the pattern for the roofs contour.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

717

Virtual Building

Create a Simple Roof in 3D


1) Choose one of the first three Geometry Methods in the Info Box (Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle), then define the slope of the roof plane by clicking any three points. ArchiCAD will generate the Pivot Line for you. 2) Draw the contour of the roof. The Hammer cursor appears when you return to the first node. Click to close the polygon. ArchiCAD will then generate the Roof.

718

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof


By choosing the Polyroof geometry method, you can create equally sloped roofs on any polygonal or curved base. The result will be a set of individual roof planes. With the Autogroup function active, they will be automatically grouped when created. The process for drawing a Polyroof is the same on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Window. First, you draw a polygon of straight segments only. This defines the pivot lines of the elements of the Polyroof.

When you are finished, the Polyroof Settings dialog box appears. The final outline will be defined by the Eave Overhang value which is added as an offset to the pivot line polygon. Polyroofs can be made up of a maximum of four levels. The inclination and maximum height of each segment can be independently defined.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

719

Virtual Building

To create curved or other shapes with the Polyroof method, draw the shapes with the 2D drawing tools, then use the Magic Wand to define the pivot line polygon. Make sure that the Polyroof Geometry Method is active when you do so. Note: ArchiCAD uses a crystal growth algorithm to calculate the best solution for any particular polygon base. The height defined in the settings dialog box is the maximum limit. If the roof meets another roof plane before it reaches that particular height, it will not go higher. If the roof has reached the maximum level allowed, and the roof planes have not met, a horizontal plane will be placed on top. Once the structure is completed, its parts are individually editable.

720

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Dome-Shaped Roof

To create a Dome-shaped roof, select the Dome geometry method in the Info Box. A DomeShaped Roof is a set of individual roof planes. With the Autogroup function active, they will be automatically grouped when created. The process for drawing a Dome-shaped roof is the same on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Window. With the first click, you define the center of the arc. The second click marks the beginning of the outline; the third click is the end of the outline. Double-clicking the beginning of the arc will create a full circular dome. Once you have defined the outline, make your choices in the Dome Settings dialog box:

Enter the height of the Dome Roof as measured from its centerpoint. This value is set by default to the maximum allowed, i.e., the height of a semi-sphere structure. By entering a smaller number, you can flatten your dome. The next edit field contains the elevation of the domes base. The number of strips and segments that make up the dome can also be defined in this dialog box: they are limited to 90 and 360 respectively. The roof thickness measured perpendicular to the roofs elevation can also be set, while the roof edges trimming is controlled by the radio buttons.

The three options available are perpendicular, vertical and horizontal trimming. Once the dome is created, its parts can be edited as individual pitched roofs, but not as a whole.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

721

Virtual Building

Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof

Barrel-vaulted Roofs can be constructed in either Floor Plan or 3D view, but it is done through different steps. In 2D, a curve drawn on the Floor Plan is interpreted as the cross-section of the Roof. Draw a series of arcs (or trace a shape with the Magic Wand) and double-click when finished. When you have defined the curve, you will see a rubberband boundary, whose ends are connected to those of the cross-section curve. One of the sides of this boundary is the imaginary floor and, at the same time, the side of the barrel roof.

With a first click, you define the starting point and the shape, and with the second, the length of the barrel-vaulted roof. Then make choices in the Vaulted Roof Settings dialog box. You can set Vaulted Roof characteristics here.

Enter the elevation of the base point of the roof, its edge angle and, if using a simple fill pattern, its thickness. Press the OK or Cancel button when finished.

722

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The resulting roof planes are individually editable. If Autogroup is on, they are generated as a group. The curve drawn in the Floor Plan is clearly visible in the 3D view of the roof.

Note: ArchiCAD only allows the construction of curved roofs that can be hit by vertical rainfall. This avoids the construction of self-intersecting or reclinate roofs. This also means that the same curve may be valid for the generation of a roof from one angle of the boundary box, and invalid from another angle. This is because the shape of the roof is determined not only by the curve that it is constructed from, but also by the angle of the boundary box that it is associated to. The start and end points of the roof must be defined in such a way that the heavy line side of the rubberband boundary does not intersect the original cross-section curve. There are three possible methods available for drawing a Barrel-Vaulted Roof in 3D: Rounded, Symmetrical and Irregular. Draw the first side of the outline rectangle of the roof at the desired height. The pet palette appears. Defining the cross-section is different for the three methods.

Rounded Roof
To create a Rounded roof: Click on the first icon.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

723

Virtual Building

Draw the geometry of the roof cross-section by defining its height and click.

Extend the roof to the desired length and click to place the roof.

Symmetrical Vaulted Roof


To create a Symmetrical vaulted roof, click on the second icon. The Symmetrical Vaulted Roof dialog box appears. Enter the number of roof planes to create.

724

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Draw the geometry of the roof by defining its height and click.

Extend the roof to the desired length and click to place the roof.

Note: This method creates roof planes of equal length in cross-section.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

725

Virtual Building

Irregular Roof
To create an Irregular roof: Choose the third method from the pet palette and click.

Define the shape of the roof by clicking as many times as you wish to create new planes. Doubleclick to finish creating roof planes.

Extend the roof to the desired length and click to place the roof.

726

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Hole in a Roof


1) Select a Roof pane 2) With the Roof tool active, draw a new contour within its boundaries. The new contour will be interpreted as a hole in the Roof. Note: If you create a hole whose outline intersects the host Roofs contour or the outline of other holes in the same polygon, ArchiCAD will display a warning message, but the outline of the hole will still be created.

Selecting Roof Hole

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

727

Virtual Building

Modify the Roof Slant Angle


Once youve drawn a roof and selected it, you can modify its slant angle in several ways. Change the roof slant angle in the Info Box or in Roof Settings. In the 3D window, select the roof, then select the Modify Slant Angle command from the pet palette and graphically adjust the roof angle (or enter a Slant Angle value into the Tracker.)

In the Floor Plan or 3D Window, select the roof, then Ctrl+click (MacOS: Cmd+Click) at any point on the roof plane to bring up the Roof Elevations dialog box. Enter a numerical value in the top field: this value will be the elevation value of the roof plane at the point at which you clicked it. Altering this elevation value has the same effect as modifying the roof slant angle.

728

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create Roof Level Lines


The Design > Create Roof Level Lines command, available in the Floor Plan, will place a line on a selected roof at the height value you specify in the Roof Level Lines dialog box.

On Top/On Bottom: Choose whether you want to measure the height value to the top or to the bottom surface of the roof. Specify Roof Level Lines height level: Use either input field - the current story level or Project Zero - to define the height of the desired roof level lines. Omit Lines Outside Roofs: Check this box to omit level lines that fall outside the floor plan polygon of the roof they belong. If the checkbox is disabled, all resulting lines will be drawn. In this case, lines that fall outside the roof polygon will be drawn to be of equal length to the pivot line of the roof they belong to. Group with Roof: Check this box to group level lines with the roofs they belong to. Note: This option is greyed if the Suspend Groups toggle is active.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

729

Virtual Building

Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material


To customize a roof edge angle and apply a separate material to the edge(s) of a roof and/or its holes, select the roof and click on an edge with the Mercedes cursor to bring up a pet palette. (For complex roofs, you must ungroup the Roof first to be able to select a single edge.) Select the Roof Edge settings icon to open the Roof Edge dialog box.

Apply on: Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (angle, material, edge type) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette. Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the roof only or the edges of the hole only, depending on which one is selected. (See Selecting Roof Hole below.) All Edges will apply the chosen options to all edges of the roof as well as all edges of its holes. (If the selected roof has no holes, then Selected Polygon and All Edges have the same effect.) Edge Angle: From this list, choose an angle (vertical, horizontal, perpendicular, custom) for the roof edge. If you choose custom, enter the desired angle value in the field below.

730

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If you have clicked an edge that is the common joint of two selected roofs, a fifth Mitred option is available. Choose this to create a mitred joint along the selected roof edges.

Non-mitred:

Mitred:

Side Material: Choose a material for the roof edge(s). Material will be applied as defined in the Applied to control above. If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the default roof edge material, the Roof Model Panel will indicate that a custom side material has been applied.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

731

Virtual Building

Edge Type: Optionally, choose a type for the roof edge (either the clicked edge, the selected polygon, or all the edges, as chosen at the top of this dialog box).

The Roof Edge type you define here can be used as a parameter in all of ArchiCADs listing functions. For example, you can add Eaves Length and Gables Length as parameters to an Interactive Schedule listing the roofs in your project.

732

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Selecting Roof Hole


To apply options to the hole only, you must select the hole, rather than the entire roof, and then choose Selected Polygon from the Apply On pop-up. To ensure that you have selected the hole, make sure the Info Tag says Inner polygon of the selected Roof:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

733

Virtual Building

Intersect Roof Planes


You may need to adjust simple roof panes to each other or to modify some of the panes of a complex roof, for example to accommodate a dormer. To have these two roof planes intersect:

Select the lower one on the Floor Plan, and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the other. Now select the other roof plane and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the lower one. The two faces have been adjusted to each other.

In this example, when the two ridge lines meet on the Floor Plan, this means that they are in fact intersected in 3D.

734

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

For more complex intersections, when more than two roof planes meet (e.g., when a barrelvaulted roof meets a simple pitched roof), additional nodes should be added to accommodate the shape. However, the intersection process itself is similar.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

735

Virtual Building

Trim Element to Roof


Using the Trim to Roof Function Undo Roof Trim Effect of Roof Trim on Wall/Column Height Settings Use Roof Trim to Create Complex-Shaped Walls, Beams and Columns Trimming Slabs with a Roof Trimming with a Remote Roof
Note: You can also achieve the effect of trimming with a Roof by using Solid Element Operations.

Using the Trim to Roof Function


Roofs can trim either the top or the bottom of Walls Beams Columns Slabs Doors Windows Objects This trimming is not done automatically: you must use the Design > Trim to Roof command. Elements are trimmed only if they intersect a roof at any point, and only if you check its element type in the Trim to Roof dialog box. It is usually easiest to use Trim to Roof in the 3D window, where you can see the spatial relationships of roofs to other construction elements. The Trim to Roof command is available only if at least one roof or one element of the above types is selected. To trim elements to a roof, follow these steps: 1) Do one of the following: Select the elements you wish to trim. (Remember, only elements which intersect a roof at any point can be trimmed); or Select the roof(s) to which you want to trim elements; or Select both elements and roof(s). Selection of roofs and/or elements narrows the scope of the Trim. If you select only a roof, all eligible elements are trimmed; if you select only elements, they will be trimmed to all the eligible roofs.

736

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2) Go to Design > Trim to Roof to bring up the Trim to Roof dialog box.

3) Check the element type(s) you want to trim. (If you have already selected certain elements before bringing up the dialog box, these checkboxes are greyed.) 4) Check either Trim Top or Trim Base, depending on which part of the eligible element(s) you want to trim. Trim Top will trim the part of the element(s) above the roof, and Trim Base will trim the part below the roof. 5) Click the Trim button.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

737

Virtual Building

Undo Roof Trim


Trimming an element can either be temporary, for visual display only, or definitive. You can restore elements after a temporary trimming. If an element has been trimmed to a roof, the Undo Roof Trim button becomes active at the bottom of that elements Settings dialog box (Model section). The only exception is Slabs: their trimming can only be undone through the Edit > Undo command. The trim remains in effect even if you hide the Roof or the trimmed elements, move them away from each other or even delete the trimming Roof. This allows you to create special gable shapes from those construction element types. If you trim a wall with a roof that crosses the wall entirely, the original wall will be cut into two walls: one with a cutting at the end, while the other will be a separate wall without any cut.

Exception: If you have an opening that would have points in both parts of the wall after the trim, the wall will remain one piece.

Effect of Roof Trim on Wall/Column Height Settings


By default, trimming a Wall or Column to a Roof will also alter the trimmed elements height. The Set Wall/Column Top to highest (lowest) Point checkbox at the bottom of the Trim to Roof dialog box is active by default. This means that the height of a trimmed wall or column is recalculated to equal the maximum of its trimmed height (if you trimmed the top) or the minimum trimmed base height (if you trimmed the bottom). Regardless of whether the checkbox is active, the Trim operation will result in the same visual effect.

738

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

In this example, the top of the wall will be trimmed to the roof.

In the first trim, the checkbox is checked. This means that the Walls actual height (as shown by the selection dots) has changed to the highest point of the trimmed Wall.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

739

Virtual Building

In the second trim, the box is left unchecked. The Wall is trimmed as usual, but the selection dots indicate that its height remains at its original value.

Note: if you click Trim Base, the Set Wall/Column Top to highest Point box changes to Set Wall/Column Base to lowest Point. In this case, its the base elevation of the element that changes. However, the Undo Roof Trim command will have a different effect depending on the checkbox status: if you set the Trim operation to recalculate the Wall/Columns height value (if the checkbox was active), then the Undo Roof Trim will only recreate the wall/column up to the maximum trimmed height. If you did not check the box, then the Undo Roof Trim will recreate the original Wall height.

740

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Use Roof Trim to Create Complex-Shaped Walls, Beams and Columns


You can cut complex shapes into walls, beams and columns by trimming them to Roofs. The wall will always follow the shape of the roof(s) above them, no matter how many roof segments you have.

However, remember that any roof can only make parallel cuts into the walls.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

741

Virtual Building

Trimming Slabs with a Roof


Slabs can also be trimmed by the lower or upper slope of roofs with the help of the Design > Trim to Roof command. However, there is a big difference between trimming slabs and trimming walls, columns or Library Parts. While other elements can be partly trimmed, slabs are always cut along the whole section line of the roof and the slab. Moreover, the trimmed edge of the slab is always vertical even after being trimmed by a slanted roof.

742

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Trimming with a Remote Roof


You can use remote roofs and even roofs on other stories whose outline is shown on the given story for trimming elements to the plane of that particular roof.

Just select the elements you intend to cut, then Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) an edge or a node of the roof you want to cut them with. The reverse procedure will also work: select the roof you want to cut with and Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) the individual elements you want to be cut. Note: The Wall/Beam/Column is cut whether it is under a roof or not. Be sure to set a sufficient height for the original rectangular Walls/Beams/Columns so that they are cut correctly.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

743

Virtual Building

Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker


RoofMaker allows you to add GDL Object-based elements to specific parts of your design in order to enhance them in 3D views and Section/Elevation/IE windows. RoofMaker can be accessed from the Design > Design Extras menu. Technically, RoofMaker is an ArchiCAD AddOn and is loaded with ArchiCAD on startup. After placement, roof construction elements behave like ordinary Objects and can be modified. The Roof Wizard is a RoofMaker function that allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. For more information, see Using the Roof Wizard. We recommend that you begin modelling the roof construction with the purlins and continue with the hip rafters/valley rafters before placing the rafters. This way you can easily keep track of all the connecting elements. (When placing ridges, you already know the thickness of the purlin; when placing rafters you already know the thickness of purlins, hip and valley rafters, etc.)

To place rafters, ridges or purlins (beams), a single roof surface has to be selected. If multiple roof surfaces are grouped, you must first ungroup them using the Edit > Grouping > Ungroup. You will then be able to select roof surfaces individually. Although the placement of roof construction elements using RoofMaker works using other methods, we strongly recommend setting the reference line of the roof to the upper exterior edge of the wall beneath (as handled by ArchiCADs Complex Roof Placement Method). The definition of elements, with or without overhang, uses this reference line as a basis. We recommend setting the roof thickness equal to the general cross-section height of the rafters. This way, you can use the roof to cut elements that are standing upon the rafters (e.g., Posts). To place a trimmer (blocking), a collar beam or a tie beam, two corresponding rafters must be selected (opposite rafters for a collar beam or a tie beam, and rafters in the same roof surface for a trimmer). After choosing the command for the placement of an object, a dialog box opens in which certain parameters concerning the object itself can be set. Surface materials and a layer can be assigned to all elements. The current pencolor set for the Object is used by default. If you change the current pencolor, all the subsequently placed elements will have the new color. 744
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The object is then placed with one or more clicks, or is placed automatically, depending on the object type. To display the RoofMaker commands in a separate floating toolbox, choose Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker > Show RoofMaker Toolbox. The RoofMaker Toolbox opens, which contains shortcuts to all of the RoofMaker menu commands.

Create a rafter Create multiple rafters Create hip or valley rafter Create a trimmer Create a purlin Create an eaves purlin Create collar beams Create tie beams Using the Roof Wizard Create a rafter
When creating rafters, the bottom plane of the roof serves as a reference plane. Rafters will be automatically placed on top of it. Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. Choose Create a rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the first icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The Rafter Settings Dialog Box appears in which rafter parameters can be set. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click inside the selected roof surface. (If you click outside, an error message appears.) A rafter is placed with its axis going through the specified point. By definition, rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

745

Virtual Building

After the rafter is placed, you can select it and open its Object Settings dialog box. Among others, the parameters include profile and profile thickness. The rafter may have a rectangular (default) profile as well as I-beam, L-beam or C-beam profiles.

Create multiple rafters


Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. Choose Create multiple rafters from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the second icon from the RoofMaker toolbox. In the Multiple Rafters Dialog Box, set the desired parameters. You will set the same controls as for a single rafter, but the placement controls for multiple rafters are also active. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click twice inside the selected roof surface to define a placement line. (If you click outside, an error message appears.) Several rafters are placed along the placement line, with the axis of the first rafter going through the point defined with the first click, and the axis of the last rafter going through the point defined with the second click. By definition, rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.

Create hip or valley rafter


The hip rafter usually lies between two neighboring roof polygons. Select the roof surface where the hip rafter connects to a purlin instead of another hip rafter; other methods may cause errors. Choose Create a hip rafter or valley rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the third icon of the RoofMaker toolbox). The Hip or Valley Rafter Settings dialog box opens. After adjusting those settings, click OK to return to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click along one of the edges of the selected roof that is NOT parallel or perpendicular to the reference line. A Hip or a Valley Rafter (or a Valley Rafter without Overhang) is placed along the specified edge of the roof, depending on the position of the edge to the roofs reference line. Hip and Valley Rafters can also be placed with two roof surfaces selected previously. It is then not necessary to click afterwards to specify an edge; the object will be placed along the common edge of the two surfaces. The difference between the two methods lies in the shape of the resulting objects; the top cut in the latter method makes the object suitable for steeple type roofs.

Create a trimmer
In order to place a trimmer, you must first select the two rafters the trimmer is going to be placed between. The two rafters have to be within the same roof polygon. (This also means that they have the same pitch angle and they are both perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.) Choose Create a Trimmer from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu. The Trimmer Settings dialog box appears. For more information, see Create a Trimmer (or Blocking).

746

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

A trimmer is placed at the same height as the rafters. It can be vertical or rotated to a position perpendicular to the pitch angle of the roof. The 2D symbol also shows the current position. Clicking OK, you return to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. Click between the rafters. (If you click outside them, an error message will appear.) A trimmer is placed between the two rafters, the axis going through the specified point. Trimmers are always parallel to the reference line of the roof and thus perpendicular to the rafters.

Create a purlin
Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create a Purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the fifth icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which purlin parameters can be set. For more information, see Create a Purlin (or Beam). By default, the purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof, since a purlin generally supports the rafters from below. However, an elevation value can be set for the purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. Set the values for the width and the height of the cross-section. The purlin can also be perpendicular to the rafters and be on the top of them as well. If the purlin is placed on top, the cross section height of the rafters has to be set. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click either an edge of the selected roof, or inside the roof polygon. (Clicking outside the polygon produces an error message.) If you click on an edge, a purlin is placed with its axis along the edge. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof, the endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights - as indicated in the Height difference parameter of the library part - and the purlin will be inclined. Clicking inside the roof polygon determines the position of only one side of the purlin; an additional click is needed to define the direction where the purlin extends. (For example, if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall, first you click to the interior side and then toward the exterior.) If you click inside the polygon, the axis of the beam will pass through the clicked point parallel to the reference line of the roof.

Create an eaves purlin


Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create an eaves purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the sixth icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). The Eaves Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which eaves purlin parameters can be set. For more information, see Create an Eaves Purlin (or Plate Beam). This type of purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof, supporting the rafters from below. However, an elevation value can be set for the eaves purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. You can also set the values for the width and the height of the cross section.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

747

Virtual Building

Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan, with the reference roof surface still selected. You need to click either one of the edges of the selected roof, or inside the roof polygon. (If you click outside the polygon, an error message appears.) If you click on an edge, the purlin is placed inside the polygon, with its side along the edge. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof, the two endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights, as indicated in the Height difference parameter of the library part, and the purlin will be inclined. If you click inside the polygon, the axis of the purlin will pass through the clicked point, parallel to the reference line of the roof surface. An additional click is then needed to define the direction where the plate beam extends. (For example, if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall, first click on the interior edge of the wall and then toward the exterior.) By default, a background fill is assigned to the 2D symbol of purlins because purlins usually have to cover posts placed underneath. These posts are generally displayed as a larger circle to indicate that there is some kind of supporting structure. You can use the Bring to Front and Send to Back commands to ensure the accurate positioning of elements.

Create collar beams


In order to place a collar beam you must first select two rafters to place it between. The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top, otherwise you will get an error message. Choose Create a collar beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the seventh icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). The Collar Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the collar beam can be set. For more information, see Create Collar Beams. A collar beam can be double- or single-sided. In addition to the dimensions of the cross-section, an elevation value must be set, calculated from the height of the insertion point of the rafters (which is usually also the height of the reference line of the roof). If the two rafters are not inserted at the same height, the collar beam is placed relative to the higher one. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. If a double-sided collar beam has been selected, it is placed automatically in the appropriate position. If a singlesided collar beam is selected, click once more to determine on which side of the rafters the collar beam will be placed.

Create tie beams


In order to place a tie beam, you must first select two rafters to place it between. The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top, otherwise you will get an error message. Choose Create a tie beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or eighth icon in RoofMaker Toolbox). The Tie Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the tie beam can be set. For more information, see Create Tie Beams.

748

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

In addition to the dimensions of the cross section, an elevation value must be set, calculated either from Project Zero or the current story elevation. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. The tie beam is placed automatically in the appropriate position.

Using the Roof Wizard


The Roof Wizard allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. You can place rafters, purlins, trimmers, collar or tie beams in one step. To begin, select all the roof surfaces in the project that you wish to add structural elements to. Choose the Roof Wizard command from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the last icon in the RoofMaker Toolbox). The Roof Wizard Dialog Box appears. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan. The roof construction elements you have specified are placed automatically in the appropriate position.

The placement of the rafters is optimized to meet the specified requirements. The objects now behave as ordinary Objects and can be modified as such.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

749

Virtual Building

Slabs
About Slabs Creating Slabs Placing Holes in Slabs Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material Slab Tool Settings

750

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Slabs
Slabs are the basic horizontal building blocks in ArchiCAD. They are typically used for modeling floors or split levels. Attributes for each part of the slabs representation (e.g. cover fill, cut fill in Sections) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Note: For Slabs and Meshes, their Floor Plan outlines on remote stories (if they are shown on stories other than their home stories) are displayed using the line type set in Construction Elements Preferences (Project Preferences > Construction Elements). Choose a separate line type to display slabs and meshes on stories Above and Below their home stories. In the Slab Model Panel, you can assign separate materials for each of the three slab surfaces (top, bottom and side).

It is also possible to assign a separate material and a separate edge angle to each edge of the slab: see Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material. For more information on Floor Plan display of slabs, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. Note: The default slab structure is a composite slab. The thickness of such a composite slab is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and equals the sum of the skins thicknesses. A composite slabs thickness cannot be edited in Slab Settings. If you want to edit the slab thickness in Slab Settings, choose a non-composite slab structure, or change the thickness of the composite skins in Options > Element Attributes > Composites. To aid in precise element placement, use the Gravity function: turn on the Gravitate to Slab command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Slab.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

751

Virtual Building

Creating Slabs
When you are satisfied with your choices in the Slab Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Slabs by applying one of the Geometry Methods in the Info Box. New Slabs can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.

Slab Geometry
There are three Geometry Methods available for Slabs from the Info Box.

With the first icon on the left, you can create a Polygonal Slab. Just like for Walls, the pet palette appears and allows you to draw straight and curved segments for the Slabs outline.

If the Slabs polygon intersects itself, a warning appears, but the Slab will still be drawn. A self-intersecting Slab polygon will be fixed automatically if you edit the polygon later using any of the pet palettes editing methods. The second and third icon allow you to create a Rectangular or a Rotated Rectangular Slab. The rectangle is defined by placing two opposing corner nodes. A rectangle Slab is always aligned orthogonally with the normal grid. The Rotated Rectangular method requires that you first define a rotation vector, then drag the cursor in a perpendicular direction to complete the slab.

752

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Placing Holes in Slabs


You may need to make holes in Slabs to accommodate objects such as staircases, or for an open atrium space. Select a Slab and activate the Slab tool, then draw a new contour within the Slabs boundaries. This new contour will be interpreted as a hole in the Slab.

If you forgot to select a Slab before starting to create a hole in it, the new contour will be interpreted as a new Slab, even if it lies inside another Slab. (In 3D, this will not be apparent until you select either of the two slabs. You can then delete the inadvertently created slab). If you create a hole whose outline intersects the host Slabs contour or the outline of other holes in the same polygon, ArchiCAD will display a warning message, but the outline of the hole will still be created.

Selecting Slab Hole

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

753

Virtual Building

Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material


To customize a slab edge angle and apply a separate material to the edge(s) of a slab and/or its holes, select the slab (or just its hole) and click on an edge with the Mercedes cursor to bring up a pet palette. Select the Edge settings icon to open the dialog box.

Apply on:

Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (angle, material) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette. Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the slab only or the edges of the hole only, depending on which one is selected. (See Selecting Slab Hole below.) All Edges will apply the chosen options to all edges of the slab as well as all edges of its holes. (If the selected slab has no holes, then Selected Polygon and All Edges have the same effect.) Edge Angle: From this list, choose an angle (vertical or custom) for the slab edge. If you choose custom, enter the desired angle value in the field below.

754

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Side Material: Choose a material for the slab edge(s). Material will be applied as defined in the Applied to control above. If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the slab side material defined in the Slab Model Panel, that panel will indicate that a custom side material has been applied, using the yellow triangle. If you have applied a custom edge angle, the Various radio button is active.

To return this slab edge to its perpendicular default, click the perpendicular edge icon.

Selecting Slab Hole


To apply options to the hole only, you must select the hole, rather than the entire slab, and then choose Selected Polygon from the Apply On pop-up. To ensure that you have selected the hole, make sure the Info Tag says Inner polygon of the selected Slab:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

755

Virtual Building

Meshes
About Meshes Display of Meshes Create a Mesh Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point Add New Points to the Mesh Create a Hole in the Mesh Mesh Tool Settings

756

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

About Meshes
Meshes are surfaces of any form created by defining the elevation of their characteristic points and interpolating between them. In the Floor Plan, only the outline and the ridges of the mesh are shown. In 3D, depending on the construction method chosen in the Info Box and the Mesh Tool Settings dialog box, you will obtain meshes created as superficies, meshes created with vertical sides (skirt) and meshes created as solid bodies. A mesh is created on the foundation of the Mesh Reference Plane and the ridges of the Mesh. You draw the main contours of the mesh projected to the Reference Plane. You can then raise the characteristic points of the meshs superficies out of this plane. To aid in precise element placement, you can turn on the Gravitate to Mesh command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Mesh.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

757

Virtual Building

Display of Meshes
Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, uncut lines) are set using the popup options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Mesh Tool Settings dialog box. When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Mesh Settings dialog box, you can start drawing meshes. Note: For Slabs and Meshes, their Floor Plan outlines on remote stories (if they are shown on stories other than their home stories) are displayed using the line type set in Construction Elements Preferences (Project Preferences > Construction Elements). Choose a separate line type to display slabs and meshes on stories Above and Below their home stories. There are two types of ridges in a mesh: user-defined and generated ridges. You have the option to display all the ridges, or just the user-defined ones. (This control is located in Mesh Tool Settings).

User-defined ridges are always displayed. If the Show All Ridges option is selected, ArchiCAD will also show the ridges generated through the connecting mesh nodes. Each generated ridge connects two mesh points at different heights that are not already connected by a user-defined ridge. Generated ridges are shown only if they connect points that differ in elevation.

758

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Mesh
New meshes can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.

Mesh Geometry
The Mesh has four geometry methods in the Info Box. You can create Polygonal, Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular shapes or a Regular Sloped Mesh.

In all cases, you will draw a Mesh polygon at the elevation of the basis plane defined in the Settings dialog box.

Create a Polygonal or Rectangular Mesh


The Polygonal and Rectangular/Rotated Rectangular Mesh geometry methods work the same as similar controls for the Slab tool. For more information, see Creating Slabs. If needed, select the Mesh and edit its points, add new points, or create a hole.

Create a Regular Sloped Mesh


The Regular Sloped Mesh method (the fourth in the Info Box) helps you quickly create regular meshes with plane surfaces. After defining the rectangle contour of the mesh, the Regular Sloped Mesh dialog box opens automatically.

In the first part of the dialog box, you can set the number of divisions in either coordinate direction. You must then set the elevation of three mesh corners; the fourth one is generated automatically. Divisions: Specify divisions along two perpendicular edges of Regular Sloped Mesh. Set the number of divisions in X and Y directions. Note: Bigger division numbers allow you change the flat surface in finer steps.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

759

Virtual Building

Mesh Corner Elevation: Set the elevation values of three corner points of the mesh. Note: You can specify elevation of three corners; the fourth is calculated by ArchiCAD. On confirming the settings, ArchiCAD will draw the mesh. If needed, select the Mesh and edit its points, add new points, or create a hole.

760

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point


1) Select the Mesh. 2) With the Mesh tool active, click a Mesh Point to bring up the pet palette.

3) Choose the Elevate Mesh Point command from the pet palette. This opens the Mesh Point Height dialog box.

4) Enter a new height value in the text field. Checking the Apply to All box will set all Mesh points to this new height. Changing the elevation of a single point will not affect the elevation of the neighboring points. The arrow below the text field opens a pop-up menu in which you can choose a reference level for the modified height.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

761

Virtual Building

Add New Points to the Mesh


1) With the Mesh tool active, select the mesh. 2) Draw a closed polygon or a straight segment within the Mesh polygon. (If you draw outside of the contour of the first polygon, only points within the contour will constitute the Mesh.) The New Mesh Points dialog box then opens.

3) Choose the Add New Points radio button. (If you drew a two-point line rather than a polygon, this is the default and only choice.) 4) Choose an option from the drop-down menu to define the relationship between the newly created points and existing ones.

New Mesh Points Dialog Box


When you add points to the selected mesh, in the New Mesh Points dialog box you can choose between adding new points and creating a hole. Located below the two radio buttons, the pop-up menu contains three choices that produce different results.

762

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If you choose No Surface Fitting, the new points will be added with the height value currently set in the Mesh Settings dialog box. Intersected user-defined ridges will keep their height. If youre creating a hole, the slopes of the mesh will be connected to the bottom elevation of the mesh.

If you choose Fit to User Ridges, the new points will be placed on the current surface of the mesh, and only user-defined ridges will keep their height. This method is recommended for renderings.

If you choose Fit to All Ridges, the new points will be placed on the current surface of the mesh, and all ridges will keep their height. This method is the most precise one, but it may generate a rather large number of ridges.

In the latter two cases, if you wish to Create a Hole in the Mesh (for instance, to accommodate a house plot), no slopes connected to the bottom of the mesh will be created, allowing you to place your building exactly into the excavated site.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

763

Virtual Building

Create a Hole in the Mesh


1) With the Mesh tool active, select the mesh. 2) Draw a closed polygon that falls entirely within the Mesh polygon. The New Mesh Points Dialog Box then opens.

3) Choose the Create Hole radio button. 4) Choose an option from the drop-down menu to define the relationship between the newly created points and existing ones.

764

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Zones
Zones are spatial units in your Project. Usually, they represent rooms; wings of a building; blocks of a housing estate or functional areas of a building. Zones in 3D can also be used for simple mass modeling.

Zone Categories 2D Display of Zone Fills Zone Stamps 3D Display of Zone Spaces Creating Zones Trim Zone to Another Element Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume Updating Zones Zone Tool Settings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

765

Virtual Building

Zone Categories
Each zone you create in your project is assigned a Zone category in the Zones Settings dialog box. This Zone Category defines the color of the default zone fill and the type of Zone Stamp object used for the zone. The main function of zone categories is to use colors to visually distinguish different types of spaces in your project: for example, you can assign the Office category to all your office space, which will all be displayed in pink; and the Communication and Access category to the hallways, which will all be displayed in white. (However, you have great flexibility in the display of zone fills; see 2D Display of Zone Fills). Some Zone categories are predefined in ArchiCAD; you can define your own categories using the Zone Categories Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories).

766

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2D Display of Zone Fills


By default, zones are displayed in the color of their zone category. (See Zone Categories.) If you like, you can assign a different Zone fill using any cover fill. 1) Go to the Floor Plan panel of Zone Settings. 2) Activate the Cover Fill icon at the left.

3) Choose a fill pattern from the fill pop-up menu. If you have assigned a Zone fill, it will be displayed in Floor Plan by default. You may want to vary your zone display settings depending on what you are outputting. For example, construction documentation might display zones using the zone fill settings, while draft and approval documentation display category colors. To vary zone fill display on the Floor Plan, use the options in the Model View Options Override Fill Display (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options). For Zone fills, the relevant settings are in the panel section called Override Zone Fills.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

767

Virtual Building

Check the Override Zone fills box to choose any other zone fill display preference. These settings are global and apply to every zone in your project.

For details, see Model View Options Override Fill Display.

Display of Zones with Slanted Walls


Zones bounded by one or more slanted walls will accurately consider the slanted geometry. Such zones are displayed on the Floor Plan with two separate zone polygons: the polygon with editable selection dots, which delimits the visible part of the zone on the Floor Plan (while you can edit this polygon, such editing has no effect on the true 3D zone), and the polygon with regular selection dots, which indicates the true extent of the base of the 3D zone (you cannot edit the zone shape by editing this polygon.)

768

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Zone Stamps
Zone stamps are intelligent parametric GDL Objects whose look, contents and behavior can be fitted to local architectural practice. They reside in the ArchiCAD Library. The zone stamp object assigned to your zone depends on the Zone Category you have chosen. See Zone Categories. Each zone stamp contains textual information about the zone, including its name, number, area, and other optional parameters; the exact content of your Zone Stamp depends on the parameters you set in the Zone Stamp Panel of the Zone Settings dialog box.

2D Display of Zone Stamps


Zone stamps are displayed by default. If you do not wish to display any zone stamps in the project, check Hide Zone Stamp checkbox in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options.

Moving Zone Stamps


Zone Stamps can be moved independently of the Zone: Click on a node of the Zone stamp. Choose the Move Sub-Element icon from the pet palette.

Drag the Zone Stamp to the desired location.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

769

Virtual Building

3D Display of Zone Spaces


To view zone spaces in 3D, go to View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D and make sure the Zone checkbox is selected. In 3D, Zones appear as 3D spaces. ArchiCAD performs accurate analyses of both the geometric and quantitative attributes of zone spaces, no matter how complex their geometric shape. Note that the Z-value (height) of a zone space is not constrained by its boundaries as defined in the 2D view; your zone space in 3D takes on the height you define in Zone Settings (zone height.) When viewing the Shaded model, go to the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings, and choose the Contours: Draft option to view only the 3D Zones, without any of the construction elements.

If you choose Contours: Best, you will see the shaded Zone surrounded by the construction elements. Elements hidden by the zone shape are not displayed at all.

Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode, and all other elements types in wireframe mode. To achieve this effect, apply the predefined Show 3D Zones as Solid Layer Combination.

3D Window 3D Window Settings

770

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Creating Zones
In the Zone Tool Settings dialog box, customize the parameters of your zone - such as its name, its category, its height, and the content of its zone stamp. Then you are ready to define the zone shape. The Zone definition methods are represented by the three icons in the Info Box. You can either manually draw the contour of a zone (using the Polygonal Method), or let ArchiCAD automatically recognize a zone surrounded by bordering elements (using the two Automatic Recognition Methods).

. Note: Columns cannot serve as the enclosing boundary of a zone. Whichever Geometry Method you choose, the Hammer cursor appears when you have finished defining the outline of the Zone. Click with it to define the location of the Zone Stamp. The Zone Stamp does not necessarily have to be placed inside the Zone polygon.

Polygonal Method

The Polygonal (manual) method is your best choice when your Zones boundary is not clearly surrounded by elements (e.g. when doing space planning). With this method, you simply draw a polyline (as you would for any other polygon) by clicking at every corner of the zone. Zones created with this method cannot change their shape when using the Update Zone command on them. You can edit a polygonal zone graphically by selecting it and using the pet palette commands.

Automatic Recognition Methods

Both automatic recognition methods, Inner Edge and Reference Line, are based on the fact that most Zones are surrounded by Walls and the only openings in them are Doors and Windows. If you choose the Inner Edge method, ArchiCAD will always define the zone area by the inner edges of walls. If you choose the Reference Line method, ArchiCAD considers the reference lines of the walls as the boundaries of the zone. Note that even if you constructed Walls with the reference line placed on the external edge, the Zone fill does not overlap the wall symbol until you choose Bring to Front from the Edit > Display Order.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

771

Virtual Building

Note: In case of a slanted or complex wall, the Reference Line method will not consider the walls reference line, but rather its inner edge. (You cannot edit a zone polygon created with the automatic method using graphical methods, since these methods cannot determine the zones 3D shape.)

Exclude a Wall or Column as a Zone Boundary


By default, the Relation to Zones settings in the Wall or Column Settings Listing and Labeling Panels are set to Zone Boundary; this means that all walls/column enclosing a closed space are considered zone boundaries by default. To exclude any wall/column as a zone boundary, just change the Relation to Zones setting to No Effect on Zones.

Create a Manual Zone Boundary


If the Zone has openings that are not Doors or Windows, ArchiCAD will continue searching for boundaries outside the spatial unit that you wished to identify as a Zone. In this case, the result may not be what you expect (see figure, below right).

In this case, close the Zone by: using the Polygon method place an Empty Opening Door object into the Wall which is the same height as the Wall - the Wall is not shown in 2D, but it does serve as a Zone Boundary drawing a line to serve as a Zone Boundary

You can draw a Line, Arc or Spline to serve as a zone boundary if you check the Zone Boundary checkbox in its Line Settings dialog boxes (Line General Settings Panel).

772

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

If your desired zone boundaries also encompass freestanding shapes or walls, you may get a warning message when clicking to place the zone stamp.

If this happens, you must click closer to the bounding elements. Then the zone will be created correctly.

Zone Reference Point


If you place the Zone Stamp with one of the automatic recognition methods, you will see a cross appear inside the Zone at the location that you first clicked to define the Zones area. This cross indicates the reference point of the Zone.

This point is used as the starting point of boundary recognition for subsequent updating actions.

Updating Zones Relation to Zones Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

773

Virtual Building

Trim Zone to Another Element


Zone spaces can be trimmed to roofs, slabs and beams with the Design > Trim Zone command. You can either select an element (Roof, Slab, Wall, Column, Beam or Library Part) and trim a Zone to it if the element protrudes into the Zone, or select a Zone and then choose which element types to trim it to. Note: Zone space will be trimmed by any multi-story element with which it intersects, on any story. When trimming a zone to a roof, a checkbox gives you the option of ignoring holes (that is, to include any hole in the roof as part of the roof for the purposes of a zone boundary.) You can choose between trimming the base or the top of zone spaces. Check the corresponding boxes to define which elements you wish to trim to the zone.

The trim will be executed by clicking the Trim button in the dialog box. If you select only one type of trimming element in the project (e.g. Roof), all the checkboxes are greyed.

Zone space trims can be undone by selecting the trimmed zone space and pressing the Undo Top Trim or Undo Bottom Trim button in the Zone Model Panel of Zone Settings. Note: You can also opt to undo the Trim when updating modified Zones. For more information, see Updating Zones. 774
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume


Zone area is an important component in project calculations, and you can customize the way in which zone areas and 3D zone spaces are calculated. Zone dimensions are associative; following an update, zone areas will be recalculated to reflect any modifications. Zone areas are usually displayed on documentation as part of the Zone Stamp; they also form part of Zone Lists created with the Document > Schedules and Lists > Zone Lists hierarchical menu. The way ArchiCAD calculates Zone area depends on several different settings: Relation to Zones options chosen for Walls and Columns which define the Zones area; the Zones Preferences screen in Options > Project Preferences > Zones, containing global controls for calculating wall recesses and refining the calculation of walls or columns; the Zone Area Calculation Panel of the Zone Settings dialog box, which allows you to check the measured area of the Zone and refine the calculated values.

Relation to Zones
For each wall, Curtain Wall and column, you can customize its Relation to Zones, that is, whether it will act as a zone boundary (stopping the zone, as a delimiter), and whether its area and/or volume should be taken into account when calculating the area and volume of the zone shape. This definition is made in the Wall Settings, Column Settings and Curtain Wall Settings dialog boxes, with a pop-up menu located on the Listing and Labeling panel. The options are as follows: 1) Zone Boundary (not available for slanted columns.): A wall or Curtain Wall set to Zone Boundary will act as a delimiter of the zone; it will be the edge of the zone. If such a Zone Boundary wall/Curtain Wall is slanted, the zones geometry will take this into account, and will be slanted accordingly to fit to the wall. Also, a wall/Curtain Wall set to Zone Boundary, if located inside the zone area, will not be included as part of the measured zone area. The zone boundary is drawn at the base of the wall. A column set to Zone Boundary cannot act as the edge of a zone (unless it is located inside of a wall that is a zone boundary). However, a vertical column set to Zone Boundary, if located inside the zone area, will not be included as part of the measured zone area. The zone boundary is drawn at the base of the column. Multi-story elements in automatic display mode can serve as zone boundaries on any story on which they exist, not just their home story. Note: Any line-type element can also be set as Zone Boundary in its Settings dialog box. Such a line will act as a delimiter of the zone. 2) A wall/Curtain Wall/column located inside a zone and set to Reduce Zone Area Only means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column does not affect the zone geometry, but when you calculate the zone area, the area of these walls/Curtain Walls/columns is excluded from the zone area. (Zone volume, however, will include the wall/column volume.) Note: Even if you have set a wall, Curtain Wall or column to Reduce Zone Area, you may prefer to ignore this setting for very small-sized walls or columns. To set the minimum limit

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

775

Virtual Building

for excluding such walls and columns, go to Zones Preferences at Options > Project Preferences > Zones. To see how much of a zones gross area has been reduced due to Wall/Column reduction, select the zone and view the data in the Zone Area Calculation Panel of Zone Settings. 3) A wall/Curtain Wall/column located inside a zone and set to Reduce Zone Volume means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column does not affect the zone geometry, but when you calculate the zone area and volume, the volume of these walls/Curtain Walls/columns is excluded from the zone volume. 4) No Effect On Zones means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column has no effect on the zone; the zone area and volume will include the area and volume occupied by the element. The following example and table will help you understand what happens to a zone area of 10 by 10 meters (and of 2.70 meter standard height) including a square 1 by 1 meter column.

Option Boundary Reduce Area only Reduce Volume No effect

Area 99 m2 99 m2 99 m2 100 m2

Volume 267.3 m3 270 m3 267.3 m3 270 m3

776

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Updating Zones
When you modify your design, associative zones do not automatically adjust themselves to the changes.

To adjust Zones to your updated design and recalculate the Zone area, use the Design > Update Zones command to use the Update Zones dialog box. This function also alerts you to any problematic Zones that might have been created. The Update Zones dialog box contains the following columns: Status: This is where ArchiCAD tells you if the Zone could be updated, and if not, what the nature of the problem is. The icons appearing in this field represent the following: All is well, ArchiCAD has successfully updated your Zone. The Zone was created manually and cannot be automatically adjusted. The layer on which the Zone resides is locked. Unlock the layer in the Layer Settings dialog box and repeat the update process. The Zone is self-intersecting. Just as in the case of polygons, you may have to adjust the Zone to have valid geometry, or split it into two Zones. You can examine the Zone by selecting it in the list, and clicking the Zoom to Selected Zones button. Fix the problem and repeat the update process.

The reference point of the Zone is outside of its boundary. Each automatic Zone has a reference point that must lie inside the Zone. If you get this error message, move the reference point inside the Zone and repeat the update process.

For more information, see Zone Reference Point.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

777

Virtual Building

The Zone you are trying to update cannot be properly adjusted, because it has difficulty in finding all of its edges. Click the Zoom to Selected Zones button to find the Zone. Fix the problem and repeat the update process. No.: This column contains the number that has been assigned to the particular Zone. Name: This column contains the name of the Zone. Added m2: This column contains information on how the Zone has changed. (You can change the area unit in the pop-up menu in the upper right portion of the dialog box.) To keep the original position of zone stamps when updating zones, check the Keep Zone Stamp position checkbox. To remove the 3D zone space trim, check the Undo Top Trim if updated and/or Undo Bottom Trim if updated checkboxes. Note: If you leave these checkboxes unchecked, conflicts may arise in certain geometric configurations. For more information, see Trim Zone to Another Element.

778

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Curtain Wall: A System Tool


About Curtain Walls Working with Curtain Walls: Overview Curtain Wall Members Create a Curtain Wall System-Level Editing Curtain Wall Display Curtain Wall Edit Mode Edit Grid Edit Curtain Wall Boundary Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line Curtain Wall Frames Curtain Wall Panels Curtain Wall Junctions Curtain Wall Accessories Curtain Walls and Other Elements Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls Free-Rotate Curtain Wall Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members Curtain Wall Settings

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

779

Virtual Building

About Curtain Walls


The Curtain Wall tool, located in the regular ArchiCAD toolbox, lets you create a Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D window.

The Curtain Wall is a single element consisting of Frame, Panel, Accessory and Junction components: these are the Members of the Curtain Wall, arranged on a Base Surface according to a pre-defined and editable Scheme.

To control the whole hierarchy at once, System level settings, which define the overall scheme and configure the Curtain Wall members, are organized into a multi-page settings dialog. Curtain Walls can be manipulated in the same way as any construction element in ArchiCAD. But unlike other elements, a Curtain Walls component members can be placed and edited individually, without disassembling the System. To enable the manipulation of sub-structural members, each Curtain Wall can be accessed at a deeper level: the Curtain Wall Edit mode. This is a graphical 3D workspace, similar to ArchiCAD's own, with dedicated tools and techniques to manipulate Curtain Wall members. In this context, only the members and scheme of the selected Curtain Wall are editable, although the rest of the model can be also displayed in a background manner, as a reference. Since Curtain Walls often feature extreme geometry that does not necessarily coincide with vertical-horizontal planes, ArchiCAD offers versatile input planes for greater freedom in surface definition. Also, in comparison with other construction elements, a higher level of editing freedom is provided: including input in Section views, boundary editing, and free rotation. 780
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Working with Curtain Walls: Overview


Creating a Curtain Wall involves a simple graphical input. You will select the Curtain Wall tool from the ArchiCAD toolbox, then a geometry method, and then draw a reference line, polyline, contour or arc, depending on the chosen geometry method. If you use the Boundary method, then your input defines the entire geometry of the Curtain Wall. If you draw a Reference Line/Arc/Polyline, then the Curtain Wall will be extruded from this line/polyline/arc. The next click, with a sun cursor, defines which side of the Curtain Wall should face the outside. Finally, a dialog box pops up to allow you to enter basic geometry information for the Curtain Wall. Clicking Place will create the Curtain Wall. For details on Curtain Wall geometry methods in different windows, see Create a Curtain Wall. Curtain Walls consist of a set of Members (such as Frames, Panels and Junctions), and each Members parameters are defined in Curtain Wall Default Settings. See Curtain Wall Members. View the Curtain Wall in your project. If you want to change something, you can approach the Curtain Wall at two levels: 1) either edit the Curtain Wall as a whole, using System-level Settings 2) or edit the settings of individual selected members of the Curtain Wall. To do this, you will enter Curtain Wall Edit Mode, where you can edit selected members either graphically or using member-specific Settings dialog boxes. These individual, edited Curtain Wall members will henceforth have Custom settings.

For System-Level Editing of Whole Curtain Wall:


Select the Curtain Wall; open Curtain Wall Settings; and edit any of its System-level settings again. Click OK to redefine the Curtain Wall according to the modified settings. See System-Level Editing.

To Edit Individual Curtain Wall Members:


Select the Curtain Wall; go into Edit mode. (See Curtain Wall Edit Mode). Edit mode shows you your Curtain Wall in 3D. At the Edit mode level, you can delve deeper into the individual components of the Curtain Wall you are editing. In Edit mode, you cannot place additional Curtain Walls, but you can edit any members of the selected Curtain Wall or add additional members to it. In Edit mode, each member (Scheme, Frame, Panel, Accessory, Junction) has its own Dialog box and its own Tool, enabling you to change settings and place new Members in this Curtain Wall. To customize the settings of any member of the Curtain Wall, select it and use the dialog box to change its settings. For example, select a panel and change its materials. Changing the settings of a selected member will transform that member into a Custom member. You can have any

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

781

Virtual Building

number of different customized members. Once a member has Custom settings, the System-level settings no longer apply to it. In Edit mode, you can create additional members for your Curtain Wall, using the Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction and Accessory Tools. When using any of these tools to create a new member, you have the choice of using the System-level default settings, or else defining custom settings. Save changes and leave Curtain Wall Edit Mode to return to your regular ArchiCAD editing environment.

Additional Curtain Wall Commands


The Design > Curtain Wall menu contains a collection of commands which are specific to Curtain Wall functions. These functions are described elsewhere in this documentation.

782

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Curtain Wall Members


It is important to distinguish the following Curtain Wall components:

Reference Line
The Reference Line is the original input line/polyline/arc you draw in the window. If you use a Boundary method to create a Curtain Wall, the first drawn segment of the Boundary is the Reference Line. The Reference Line is part of the Curtain Wall Scheme (together with the Grid pattern, the Boundary, and the Base Surface.) Later, you can edit the Reference Line of a placed Curtain Wall. See Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line.

Reference Surface
The Reference Surface is an imaginary plane or arced surface automatically created by ArchiCAD by extruding the input line (polyline, arc) you have drawn. Often, you will place your input line along an existing ArchiCAD element (e.g. slab); the Reference Surface is extruded from this input line.

Base Surface
The Base Surface defines the shape and orientation of the Curtain Wall. It is the surface in which the physical members of the Curtain Wall (Frame, Panels) lie. The Base Surface may coincide with the Reference Surface; more likely, you will offset it. When you move or rotate the Curtain Wall as a whole, it is the Base Surface which you are moving; the Reference Line and Reference Surface move along with the Base Surface.

The Base Surface of Curtain Walls is an infinite plane - except if it is based on a curved shape. (The Base Surface of a curved Curtain Wall is cylindrical, and is infinite only in the direction of the cylinders axis.) A Curtain Walls infinite Base Surface gives you great freedom in connecting the Curtain Wall to other elements, and in adding multiple, bounded Curtain Wall portions to any Curtain Wall. See Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

783

Virtual Building

Grid
The Base Surface is crisscrossed by a Grid (primary gridlines plus secondary gridlines, defined as part of the Curtain Wall Scheme.)

The Grid defines the default location and arrangement of Frames and Panels in the Curtain Wall. You can edit the Grid (delete, add gridlines, move or rotate it). Changes to Grid geometry will change the geometry of its Frames and Panels accordingly. See Edit Grid.

Boundary
The Boundary is a simple polygon on the Base Surface, which represents the physical limits of the Curtain Wall. The Boundary is part of the Curtain Wall Scheme (together with the Grid, the Base Surface and the Reference Line). Depending on the geometry method used to create the Curtain Wall, the Boundary is either drawn by you or created by ArchiCAD in accordance with input parameters. You can draw additional boundaries on an existing Curtain Wall - this gives you freedom to separate the Curtain Wall into parts, while still keeping it as a single element: all parts of the Curtain Wall use the identical Scheme. See Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary. The Curtain Walls Boundary Frame always coincides with this Boundary polygon.

You can edit the Boundary of the Curtain Wall like any other polygon. See Edit Curtain Wall Boundary. 784
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Scheme
The Scheme contains the essential geometry definitions for the Curtain Wall: the Scheme encompasses the Base Surface, the Grid, Boundary, and Reference Line. Use Scheme Settings to arrange the gridline pattern in two directions (primary and secondary). The Scheme also defines the class to which individual panels within this basic pattern belong. See Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page. All other members of the Curtain Wall (Frames, Panels, Accessories, Junctions) are attached to the Scheme.

Frame
You can define three classes of Frames for any Curtain Wall: Boundary Frame; Mullion Frame; Transom Frame. Each Frame class has unique settings. Frames are attached to the Grid when you create the Curtain Wall, so if you move or delete a Gridline, you move or delete the Frame. (In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can place additional Frames independent of the Grid.) See Curtain Wall Frames.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

785

Virtual Building

Panel
Panels are the flat surfaces - generally glazed - of the Curtain Wall. Any Curtain Wall can have two predefined classes of Panels: Main and Distinct. Panels are always placed between Frames. See Curtain Wall Panels.

Junction
A Curtain Wall Junction is an optional structure that serves to connect panels to the Frame. In ArchiCAD, a Junction is a GDL object, and can be placed either one by one, or automatically at every intersection. See Curtain Wall Junctions.

Accessories
Accessories are optional, non-load-bearing members - such as a sun shade - attached to the Curtain Wall. These are GDL objects placed at any Frame of an existing Curtain Wall.

See Curtain Wall Accessories.

786

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Create a Curtain Wall


In ArchiCAD, creating a Curtain Wall is intuitive and flexible. You will use input methods that are familiar from other ArchiCAD functions. ArchiCAD also gives you a wide range of geometry methods so that you can choose the easiest method for the situation and model view you are working on. Input methods are almost identical in all the windows (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, and 3D): draw an input line, polyline, or arc, and then extrude the Curtain Wall to a defined distance. Or draw the entire boundary of the Curtain Wall. The Curtain Wall is placed on or relative to the input plane. In the Floor Plan, the input plane is the Story level. In Section/Elevation/IE, the input plane is identical to the Section plane. In 3D, the default input plane for Curtain Walls (as for any construction element) is Project Zero or the User Origin, but you may use several methods for defining any other input plane. See Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window.

Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan Create a Slanted Curtain Wall Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the Section Window Create a Curved Curtain Wall: Geometry Methods Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall in the 3D Window Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the 3D Window Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane

Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan


To create a single flat Curtain Wall, activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Polyline - Single geometry method from the Info Box.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

787

Virtual Building

Note: The Polyline Geometry method is also available in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation Window. In these windows, the Single method will extrude the Curtain Wall perpendicularly from the Section plane. See Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View. Suppose you are working on the following Floor Plan of a two-story project, and you want to place a Curtain Wall for the remaining side of the building.

Draw a Reference Line representing the length of the Curtain Wall.

Click to complete the Reference Line. The sun cursor appears: click with the sun cursor to define the outside direction of the Curtain Wall. Here, move the cursor to the outside of the building and click.

788

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

In the appearing Place Curtain Wall dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height and slant angle (default: 90 degrees). Here, we will enter 6200 mm and leave the angle at 90 degrees for a vertical Curtain Wall.

Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed. View the result in the 3D window.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

789

Virtual Building

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit Mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/ Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

Create a Slanted Curtain Wall


To create a slanted Curtain Wall, follow the same steps as above (Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan). After drawing the reference line, the sun cursor appears: click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box, enter a slant angle: we will use 72 degrees. Note that this angle is measured on the inside of the Curtain Wall (opposite the side you clicked with the sun cursor).

790

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Click to place the slanted Curtain Wall.

View it in 3D:

To change the slant angle of a placed Curtain Wall, you can edit the Curtain Wall graphically in the 3D window, using the Free-Rotate Curtain Wall function. Alternatively, select the Curtain Wall and change the angle value in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Geometry and Positioning Panel. To trim the ends of the walls by connecting them to the Curtain Wall, use the Connect Curtain Wall function. See Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

791

Virtual Building

Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the Section Window


Use this method to create a Curtain Wall by drawing its Boundary freehand, in the Section window. Note: Using this Boundary method in the Floor Plan will create a horizontal Curtain Wall placed at the Story level. We start with the following building model. We will create a Curtain Wall whose Boundary runs along the opening on the buildings southern face. To do this, we will use the Boundary geometry method in the Section Window.

In the Floor Plan, the building and its Section line S-01 look like this. Note that we have drawn a Section line here whose sole purpose is to define the Curtain Walls input plane. In Section windows, the Curtain Wall input plane exactly coincides with the Section plane.

Open the Section. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Boundary geometry method from the Curtain Wall Info Box.

792

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Draw the Curtain Wall Boundary along the desired contour, clicking at each node as when drawing any polyline. Double-click or click with the Hammer cursor to close the polygon. Note: The Reference Line of this Curtain Wall is the first Boundary segment you draw.

Now click with the Sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall: If you click outside the polygon, the outside of the Curtain Wall will face in the same direction as the Section plane (away from you). The result in the Floor Plan looks like this:

If you click inside the polygon (on the Curtain Wall surface), the outside of the Curtain Wall will face opposite the Section plane (toward you). The result in the Floor Plan looks like this:

In our case, we want the Curtain Wall to face outside the building, opposite the Section plane (toward you). So after drawing the Curtain Wall boundary in the Section window, we will click inside the polygon, using the Sun cursor:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

793

Virtual Building

Now the outside of the Curtain Wall is behind the Section Line. Therefore, due to the geometry of this Curtain Wall, no physical members (Panel, Frame) of the Curtain Wall are visible in the Section window. However, the result is seen in both the Floor Plan and the 3D window:

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

Create a Curved Curtain Wall: Geometry Methods


You can create a curved Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE window, or 3D window. When defining the geometry of a curved Curtain Wall, you must first define the cylindrical Base Surface, then mark off the parts of this cylinder onto which the Curtain Wall will be placed. Note: Curved Curtain Walls are always regularly shaped: the axis of its cylindrical Base Surface is either horizontal or vertical to the input plane when you create it, although subsequently you can tilt it in any direction. Choose one of the four geometry methods for creating a curved Curtain Wall with a cylindrical Base Surface. For the most part, these are the same methods used to draw circles or arc walls in ArchiCAD.

1) Centerpoint and Radius: Click to place the centerpoint. Click a second time to define the radius and one of the endpoints of the Curtain Wall. Click a third time to define the other end of the wall. Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed.

794

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

2) Three Points: Click three times in succession to define the beginning point, another point, and the endpoint of the Curtain Wall. By defining these three points, the reference cylinders radius and centerpoint are also calculated. For an example, see Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan. 3) Tangential: Use this geometry method to place a Curtain Wall that forms a full circle. Click three times in succession to define three points on the Curtain Wall. By defining these three points, the reference cylinders radius and centerpoint are also calculated. A temporary reference circle appears. If the three tangential points enable more than one geometrical possibility for a full-circle, the eyeball cursor appears. Move the cursor to view the possibilities, then click to choose which geometry you need. Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. The full-circle Curtain Wall is placed. 4) Radius and Axis: Use this geometry method to create a regular arc-shaped Curtain Wall. This Curtain Wall will always be a half-cylinder shape placed on the input plane. The first two clicks define the Curtain Walls beginning and endpoints. Click a third time to define the extrusion length of the arc Curtain Wall. For an example, see Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window.

Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan


The following building in the Floor Plan is based on a curved slab.

Follow these steps to add a curved Curtain Wall to the South Elevation:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

795

Virtual Building

Activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Three Points geometry method from the Info Box:

Click the three points to define the reference arc of the Curtain Wall.

Click a fourth time to define the angle formed by the two ends of the wall and the cylinder centerpoint.

Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the appearing Place Curtain Wall follow-up dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height. Here, we will enter 6200 mm.

796

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

For a curved Curtain Wall, you cannot set a slant angle; it will always be vertical.

Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed. View the result in the 3D window.

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit Mode, Graphical Editing of Curtain Wallselect the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View


The input plane in the Section window coincides with the Section Plane. When you use an input method which extrudes the Curtain Wall from a Reference Line (such as the Polyline, Chained, or Curved methods), you must define starting point and the length of the extrusion. For this, use the options in the Place Curtain Wall on Section dialog box.
ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

797

Virtual Building

To freely position the beginning of the extrusion by offsetting the starting point from the input plane: choose the first method. The first field is the absolute length of the extrusion; the third field is its offset from the input plane. (The sum of the two values is shown in the middle field.)

To begin extruding the Curtain Wall away from you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the second method and enter the length of extrusion. There is no offset (the Curtain Wall begins right at the input plane).

To begin extruding the Curtain Wall toward you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the fourth method and enter the length of extrusion.

798

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

To place the midpoint of the extrusion vector at the input plane, choose the third option. Enter the total extrusion length in the first field below.

Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan


Use the Chained geometry method to create a multi-segment Curtain Wall based on a reference line drawn as a chained polyline. For each segment of a chained Curtain Wall, you can set up a separate Scheme, with a distinct pattern for each. In this example, we will place a chained Curtain Wall along a more complex slab contour.

Activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Chained geometry method from the Info Box:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

799

Virtual Building

Trace the outline of the slab to create the Curtain Wall reference line, using the same pet palette controls as when drawing a polyline. Double-click to complete the reference line.

Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the appearing Place Curtain Wall dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height. Here, we will enter 6200 mm. For a chained Curtain Wall, you cannot set a slant angle; it will always be vertical. Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed.

The result: a single Curtain Wall with three Base Surfaces, based on a three-segment Reference Line.

800

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

A Frame is always placed at the place where two adjacent segments are joined. Such a Frame cannot be deleted. (If you wish, you can set its type to Invisible, by selecting the Frame in Edit mode and adjusting its Type in Frame Settings.)

A Chained Curtain Wall has as many Schemes as it has segments: you can select one Scheme at a time and customize each Scheme separately.

Make any changes in the Grid Pattern, or modify the Grid Patterns origin. The selected Scheme is now a Custom Scheme. See also Edit Grid Pattern and Position.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

801

Virtual Building

Click OK to apply the changes.

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using the Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window


With the Curtain Wall tool active in the 3D window, the Info Box provides the following options for defining the Curtain Walls input plane:

Default: Use the default input plane in the 3D window, which is the same input plane - Project Zero or the User Origin - you use when working with any other tool in the 3D window.

802

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Intelligent: Use one of the following intelligent methods to define an input plane by a series of clicks: Surface: Click any surface: the plane of the surface will be your input plane. Edge plus point: Click any edge (mercedes cursor) to define a line.

A plane appears on screen, rotating around the line as its axis. Then click a point (arrow cursor) to fix the input plane.

Point plus edge: This is just the reverse of the method above. Click a point, then an edge to define the input plane. Three points: Click any three points to define the input plane.

Horizontal: Click on a point to place a horizontal input plane at that point.

Vertical: Click on a point to place a vertical input plane at that point.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

803

Virtual Building

Normal: Define a slanted input plane by defining a vector that is perpendicular (normal) to the desired plane. 1) Click two points to define the normal vector to the input plane, or Click on an edge to define the normal vector to the input plane 2) Then click a point through which the input plane will run. For an example, see Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane.

Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall in the 3D Window


In the 3D window, the process is the same as in the Floor Plan. However, the feedback is different. In the 3D window, the default Curtain Wall input plane is the same as the current 3D input plane (Project Zero, or the User Origin). To define other input planes, see Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Polyline - Single geometry method and the Default Input Plane from the Info Box.

Click to begin drawing the Curtain Wall Reference Line. No matter where you click, the input plane is fixed, and indicated by a temporary grid. Any Reference Line you now draw will be placed on this input plane. In our example:

Click at the two front corners of the building to define the Reference Line length. With the Sun cursor, click on either side of the Reference Line to define the outside of the Curtain Wall.

804

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The Place Curtain Wall dialog box appears:

By default, both the top and the bottom height values are measured to the Reference Line, and the Curtain Wall will be perpendicular to the Input Plane, but you can choose a different reference level using the pop-up:

Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window Click Place. View the result.

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

805

Virtual Building

Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the 3D Window


We start with the following building model. We will create a Curtain Wall whose Boundary runs along the opening on the buildings southern face. To do this, we will use the Boundary geometry method in the 3D Window.

In the 3D window, the default Curtain Wall input plane is the same as the current 3D input plane. However, you can use a different Input Plane to make input easier. For more information, see Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. In this example, we will use the Intelligent Plane Input to define the plane that is perpendicular to the slab. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Boundary geometry method and the Intelligent Input Plane Method from the Info Box.

Now you must define the Input Plane by a series of clicks. Here, click the slab edge with the Mercedes cursor (indicating an edge) to define a line. As feedback, an input plane appears in the window, rotating (as you move the cursor) around the line you clicked.

806

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Next, click the upper corner of the building with the Arrow cursor to define the input planes final position.

Now click to begin drawing the desired Curtain Wall Boundary on the input plane, clicking at each node as when drawing any polyline. Note: The Reference Line of this Curtain Wall is the first Boundary segment you draw. Double-click or click with the Hammer cursor to close the polygon. When the Sun cursor appears, click on the polygon surface: the outside of the Curtain Wall will face toward you. View the result.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

807

Virtual Building

To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)

Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window


We will place a half-cylinder Curtain Wall on a slab in the 3D window. Choose the Radius and Axis geometry method and the Horizontal Input plane method

Click on the slab to place a corresponding horizontal input plane.

Now locate the midpoint of the slab and click once: the axis of our half-cylinder will run through this point.

Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor to the far end of the slab, then click to define the half-cylinders radius. The feedback helps you visualize the structure.

Now move the cursor to define the extruded length of the Curtain Wall, then click to complete the Curtain Wall.

808

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

See the result in 3D.

Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane


When creating a flat Curtain Wall, it is extruded from your input line in a perpendicular direction. The input plane is ordinarily either vertical or horizontal. However, in the 3D Window, you can define any input plane. See Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. Consider the following model in 3D:

Suppose you want to draw the Curtain Wall so that it is extruded perpendicularly to an input plane which corresponds to the shape of the building. You need an input plane perpendicular to the buildings slant, rather than to the ground. To achieve this, activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Single geometry method combined with the Normal Vector input plane method:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

809

Virtual Building

In the 3D window, draw a Normal Vector corresponding to the slanted shape of the building (you want the input plane to be perpendicular to this vector). Here, we draw the vector joining the southwest corners of the top and bottom slabs:

When you complete the normal vector, an input plane appears which is perpendicular to it.

Click anywhere to place the input plane: its angle will define the Curtain Walls extrusion from the input line.

810

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Now you are ready to draw the input line. The input line (as indicated by the rubberband line) is constrained and is projected perpendicularly to the input plane. Click at the two points where you want the Curtain Wall to begin and end: in our case, at the two front corners of any of the slabs.

The Sun cursor appears. Click below the input line to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. The Place Curtain Wall dialog box appears. Define the height of the Curtain Wall at its top and bottom. We enter 0 for the bottom and 6200 for the top height value. The reference level is significant: if you would measure from the Reference Line, the bottom of the Curtain Wall would coincide with the slanted input plane, and both the bottom and top of the Curtain Wall would be parallel to the input plane. This is not what we want. Instead, choose Project Zero as the reference level for the top and bottom height values. This way, the Curtain Walls top and bottom will both be parallel to the horizontal plane at Project Zero.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

811

Virtual Building

Click Place.

812

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

System-Level Editing
Use System-level editing to set up or edit the Curtain Wall element as a whole, using a single dialog box. Open Curtain Wall Default Settings by double-clicking on the Curtain Wall Tool. Or select the Curtain Wall you wish to edit, and open Curtain Wall Selection Settings.

Click on the items listed in the left-hand tree structure to open any of the dialog box pages associated with Curtain Wall Settings. Use these dialog box pages to define general System (position, display) preferences, as well as options for the Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction and Accessory members. (Each option is presented in detail in Curtain Wall Settings in ArchiCAD Help.) Options set here will define the structure and appearance of subsequently placed Curtain Walls. Note: Once the Curtain Wall is placed, you can customize individual members of a selected Curtain Wall, using Curtain Wall Edit Mode. Modifications to Curtain Wall System Selection Settings will modify all affected parts of the selected Curtain Wall. For example, if you modify a Mullion Frames material, the material of all the Mullion Frames in the Curtain Wall will be changed when you click OK to leave the dialog box. However, Custom Frames are not affected by changes to the Mullion Frame settings. Note that Frame definition occurs on three different pages: Boundary, Mullion, Transom: this means that a single Curtain Wall will have three different default Frame definitions (or classes) at once. You can set all Frame classes to have the same settings if you wish. After editing the Systemlevel parameters of one of the three Frame classes), click the Uniform Frame Classes button at the top of the Frame Settings dialog box of any of the three frame classes. Note that Panel definition occurs on two separate pages: Main and Distinct: this means that a single Curtain Wall will have two default panel types (or classes.)

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

813

Virtual Building

You can set both Panel classes to have the same settings if you wish. After editing the Systemlevel parameters of one of the Panel classes, click the Uniform Panel Classes button at the Top of the Panel Settings dialog box of either of the Panel classes. When you have finished setting up the Curtain Wall System options, use the Curtain Wall tool to place the Curtain Wall using any of the geometry methods. See Create a Curtain Wall.

814

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall


To edit a placed Curtain Wall graphically, select it in Section or the 3D window, and use the pet palette commands. These are analogous to the commands used to graphically edit walls. (Some commands might not be available in every window type.)

Stretch Height/Extrusion
As you change the Curtain Wall height, its thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly. The Curtain Walls Reference Line stays in place.

Stretch Slanted Height


The Curtain Wall is stretched along its plane; its slant angle remains constant.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

815

Virtual Building

Modify Angle
The Tracker fields reflect the new slant angle as well as the horizontal distance that the selected Curtain Wall edge is moved. The Curtain Wall is slanted, pivoting around its Reference Line.

Another graphical option is Free-Rotate Curtain Wall, available in the 3D and in Section/ Elevation-type windows.

816

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Curtain Wall Display


Curtain Wall display in Floor Plan and Section views is defined in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel. Note that the Curtain Walls default Floor Plan Display option is called Symbolic with Overhead, which is unique to Curtain Wall Settings.

In Symbolic with Overhead, Frame and Panel elements are depicted using symbolic display. The Curtain Wall is displayed as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane, plus the Curtain Walls overhead part (the part above the Floor Plan Cut Plane), and its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. In Symbolic with Overhead mode, Accessories and Junctions are not shown at all on the Floor Plan, and only the Frame centerlines are displayed. The Symbolic or Symbolic with Overhead options are recommended for regular, vertical Curtain Walls. For other geometries, the Projected options will work better.

Model View Options for Curtain Walls


Go to Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. In the Options for Construction Elements panel, choose one of the two preferences for displaying Curtain Walls. These will affect the display of Curtain Walls in the 3D, Section-type and 3D Document windows only: Full: Panels and Frames are displayed in the Curtain Wall. Schematic: Only the Scheme (Gridlines, Boundary, Reference Line) is displayed.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

817

Virtual Building

Curtain Wall Edit Mode


About Curtain Wall Edit Mode Edit Mode Display Palette Select Curtain Wall Member in Edit Mode Multiselection of Panels and Frames About Curtain Wall Edit Mode
Any placed Curtain Wall instance is defined by Curtain Wall System Settings. However, you can use Edit mode and its dedicated member-specific tools to access and change the individual members of a selected Curtain Wall, or to add new custom members to it, using the same input, selection and editing methods as in the normal ArchiCAD workspace. In Edit mode, each member (Scheme, Frame, Panel, Accessory, Junction) has its own Settings dialog box and its own tool, enabling you to change settings and place new Members in this Curtain Wall. (You cannot create a new Curtain Wall in Edit mode; the purpose of Edit mode is to provide a deeper level access to the components of an existing, selected Curtain Wall.) Once you change the parameters of any selected Curtain Wall member in Edit mode, that member is no longer tied to Curtain Wall System Settings; it is a Custom member, and its parameters are locally defined, in its individual tool settings dialog box (e.g. Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction, and Accessory Settings). Custom parameters are set in Edit mode only. Please note that changing the settings of any selected Curtain Wall member in Edit mode will NOT affect the Curtain Wall's System Settings.

Curtain Wall Tool Settings in Edit Mode


Tools can be accessed in the familiar way from the Curtain Wall Toolbox, available in Edit mode only:

Each of these tools has its own settings dialog, with the same appearance and arrangement of controls as the corresponding page of the Curtain Wall Settings dialog.

818

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

The only difference is that member-specific Tool settings do not display the navigation tree seen in Curtain Wall System Settings, and they display a different header. Panel Settings, System Level:

Panel Selection Settings, Edit mode:

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

819

Virtual Building

For each selected member in Curtain Wall Edit mode, Tool Selection Settings displays the parameters of the currently selected member. If, for example, you have selected a panel of class Main, the top panel displays, by default, Class: Main Panel. These parameters are those defined in the System Settings: Main Panels dialog box. However, as soon as you change any parameter in this Selection Settings dialog box, the top panel display changes to Custom. Clicking OK will apply these Custom parameters to the selected panel(s) only.

A Custom member means that its link to the settings of the Curtain Wall has been broken, and any changes to the Curtain Wall Settings will not affect it. You can always renew this link by changing the class field back to System. To edit the System-level Settings without leaving Edit mode, click the System Settings command at the bottom of the Edit mode display palette. (See Edit Mode Display Palette.) When in Edit mode, you can save and load your Favorite settings individually for each tool, as with any other ArchiCAD tool. In the individual Tool Settings for Curtain Wall members in Edit mode, layer assignment is displayed but cannot be edited. All curtain wall members will be placed on the layer determined by the Curtain Wall Settings; layer assignment cannot be individually set for its members.

Enter Curtain Wall Edit Mode


To enter Edit mode, first select the Curtain Wall. Then click the Edit (or Edit in 3D) button which appears on the selected Curtain Wall. Another way to enter Edit mode: select the Curtain Wall, then the Design > Curtain Wall > Edit System command.

820

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Note: This only works if you have selected a single Curtain Wall. If the selection includes several disparate Curtain Walls, the Edit button will not appear, and you cannot edit individual members of any of them. When in Curtain Wall editing mode, the model is shown in the 3D window (even if the original Curtain Wall selection took place in a Floor Plan or S/E/IE window). The rest of the building (the environment) is shown in background mode. Note: If the contents of the 3D window do not include the Curtain Wall, you cannot use Curtain Wall edit mode. Make sure that the Curtain Wall can be seen in the 3D window before entering Curtain Wall edit mode.

Once you are in Curtain Wall Edit mode, the regular ArchiCAD toolbox is replaced by a special Curtain Wall toolbox. To edit the System-level Settings without leaving Edit mode, click the System Settings command at the bottom of the Edit mode display palette. When you have completed your modifications to the selected Curtain Wall in Edit mode, click OK in the Edit mode Display palette to save changes and return to the 3D window, or Cancel to discard changes.

(The same commands are available from a menu: Design > Curtain Wall > Finish Edit System or Cancel Edit System.) While you are in Edit mode, each Undo command will discard only the last modification. Right after you leave Edit mode, clicking Undo a single time will discard all the changes you just made in Edit mode.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

821

Virtual Building

Edit Mode Display Palette


The Edit Mode Display palette appears automatically whenever you enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. To make editing easier, use the Edit mode display palette to show/hide the Curtain Wall elements as needed (click the eye icons to open or close them). You can click them on and off even during an editing operation. Right-clicking any of the components (e.g. Scheme) means that component will be displayed and the rest hidden. Note: The Edit mode display palette is a display-only editing aid and does not affect the construction or the output of the Curtain Wall element.

Environment, in this display palette, refers to the rest of the building model, which you can show or hide as needed to assist in editing. Preselection tags will identify the Environments model elements in dimmed form, but in Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can edit only Curtain Wall Members. Note: If you have trouble identifying the edges of these model elements shown as the Environment, try switching on the Draft or Best Contours option in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings.

822

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Select Curtain Wall Member in Edit Mode


Use the selection tools to select any member(s) of the Curtain Wall. To select all instances of any of the members, activate the tool and click Ctrl+A. For example, to select the Scheme, activate the Scheme tool and click Ctrl+A: all parts of the Scheme (Grid lines, the Boundary and the Reference Line) are now selected. If you also turn off the display of Frames and Panels (by clicking the eye icons in the Edit Mode Display palette), the Scheme is now easy to edit.

Note: In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can use the Marquee to limit the scope of the Find and Select Elements function - to find certain Curtain Wall members either inside or outside the Marquee.

Multiselection of Panels and Frames


When you select a single Panel or Frame of a Curtain Wall in Edit mode, an editing aid called a Grip appears. The Grip appears at the same time as the pre-selection Info Tag. The Grip gives you a shortcut for selecting multiple Frames or panels, based on the Curtain Wall Grid.

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

823

Virtual Building

When selecting a Frame, you can click one of two buttons on the Grip: the button with the single line will select all the Frames along the full gridline underlying the selected Frame:

the button displaying multiple parallel lines will select all the Frames that are parallel to the selected Frame segment.

When selecting a Panel, the Grip selection shortcut enables you to select all Panels along either the grids primary direction or its secondary direction.

824

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Edit Grid
To edit a selected Curtain Wall Grid or individual Gridline, you must use Curtain Wall Edit mode. Available operations include: Move or delete a selected Gridline Rotate all the Gridlines of one of the Grid directions Rotate or Move the Grid as a whole Note: Rotate Grid is not available for cylinder-based or Chained Curtain Walls. Add a new Gridline Note that moving or rotating a Grid, or one or more Gridlines, means that the Frame(s) assigned to that Grid or Gridline are moved or rotated along with it. Deleting a Gridline will delete the Frame on it. The Panel(s) will change in size to conform to the resulting new Frame pattern. To make editing the Grid easier in Edit mode, make sure that the Scheme is visible (and turn off the other members visibility as needed).

Edit Grid Pattern and Position Move Grid Line Move Grid Rotate Parallel Grid Lines Rotate Entire Grid Delete a Gridline Add a New Gridline

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

825

Virtual Building

Edit Grid Pattern and Position


In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can customize the Curtain Walls Grid Pattern by editing Scheme Settings. As soon as you edit any aspect of the Curtain Walls Scheme Settings, that Scheme becomes Custom, rather than System-defined. See Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page: Grid Pattern and Preview Panel. To edit a Curtain Wall grid pattern graphically, go into Curtain Wall Edit mode. Make sure that Scheme display is On. (To make selection easier, turn off the display of Frames, Panels, Junctions and Accessories.) Select the Scheme, then double-click the Scheme Tool to access Scheme Settings. A Chained Curtain Wall has as many Schemes as it has segments: you can select one Scheme at a time and customize each Scheme separately. See also Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan. Make any changes in the Grid Pattern, or modify the Grid Patterns origin. The selected Scheme is now a Custom Scheme. Click OK to apply the changes.

Move Grid Line


To move an individual Gridline, select it with the Mercedes cursor (clicking any node will select the entire Scheme). Choose the Move Grid Line command from the appearing pet palette:

Drag the Gridline to its new position (it will remain parallel to its original position). Click to place.

826

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building

Move Grid
To move an entire Grid orthogonally, select either a Gridline or the entire Grid and use the Move Grid command from the pet palette.

If you defined the Grid origin as a defined point (as opposed to Custom Origin) in Scheme Settings, then the Grid origin is locked, and you can move the Grid only in its secondary direction. See Pattern position.

Rotate Parallel Grid Lines


To rotate all the Gridlines of one direction (e.g. all the Secondary Gridlines), select one of the Gridlines you want to rotate, then choose the Rotate Parallel Grid Lines command from the pet palette.

Note: If the Curtain Wall is Curved or Chained, you cannot rotate the primary gridlines, just the secondary ones. As with other rotation commands in ArchiCAD, draw a rotation vecto